How To Increase Your Pitch Success Rate By Analyzing Magazines Transcript

Download (PDF, 240KB)

If you go to this link right here dreamoftravelwriting.com/10mags, there you can download a PDF that has it’s actually got eleven breakdowns of magazines that show exactly how we do it in the database. Let’s go ahead and get started. Like I said, today we’re going to talk about how to get more assignments by analyzing magazines.

I actually am a former magazine editor. I used to work with an online magazine, so I’ve been on both sides of the table, both a freelancer and an editor, and that gives me a lens about what editors are looking for, but especially what they aren’t looking for, what they really have time for, and what makes them think that you aren’t worth their time, which is one of the reasons we’re going to talk about looking in magazines and I’m going to share some quotes with you today from other magazine editors about what they look for in all writers, but especially new writers.

The three main things that we’re going to cover today are how the process of pitching can really improve your travel writing income, when you do it regularly and accurately. Here’s the thing, I’ve found that a lot of travel writers complain, and not just travel writers, a lot of freelancers of all types complain up and down about how they don’t earn as much money as they would like. The thing is that they’re not really doing anything to change that. You know they might be applying to gigs online or perhaps they’re going on press trips, but they aren’t sitting down and systematically sending out pitches, seeing how that goes, tweaking the process, and sending out more pitches. What I’ve found is that making that a regular practice and practice is the main word here, something that you are doing and improving over time is one of the best and easiest ways to increase your travel writing income and I’ll talk more about that in a bit.

Secondly, we’re going to cover why editors respond best to pitches when you demonstrate knowledge of their publication and you know the things is I think that a lot of use think that when we write a pitch, we’re really offering the editor something, but we don’t always sit back and check our assumptions at the door and make sure that we are in fact giving the Editor something that they would like, rather than just something that we would like to provide for them. So we’re going to talk a bit more about that.

Then we’re going to go through how to breakdown a magazine in detail and that at the end of the call we’re going to talk from that breakdown about five specific things that you can include in your pitch to show the editor that you are familiar with their publication.

On the topic of pitching and how that can really improve your income, I saw something in a private Facebook group that I’m part of the other day that even I found heartening and really really impressive. Somebody who, I believe she’s a slightly new writer—but she just has a lot of chutzpa-said to everybody, “Just a friendly reminder to keep pitching. I have more than $7,000 worth of stories in October because of pitches I sent in September.” What’s really really amazing about this quote and one of the reasons that I want to draw your attention to it, is that not everybody talks about how they just don’t get responses to their pitches.

We talked in our webinar last week and I’ll cover more about this later, but getting a response where there’s a yes or a no—and no can be for the best at times—but just getting that response can be the most important thing for pitching. You want to keep away from having editors never respond to your pitches. So the thing that I love about this quote and this writer, is that not only did she send a bunch of pitches, but she sent enough pitches that the ones that people got back to her about (and not just the ones that people got back to her ever) but the ones that people got back to her positively, netted her $7,000 worth of stories the following month.

One of the ways that you can get editors to get back to you faster is to put a time peg to show them that you have a story that needs to run in their magazine very soon. But another way to get an editor to get back to you, even if they’re not going to assign you the story, is to show that you’re someone that they want to work with. And that’s what we’re going to talk about today is how to show the editor that you are that person that they want to work with, even if this first pitch that you have sent them isn’t the right pitch, because editors are really strapped on time and they have so many emails that have nothing to do with writers. They have so many emails from production, from their publisher, from other people on their team who might be writing stories. And to get them to respond to your email is actually getting them to give you an invitation to write back to them. Because when an editor doesn’t respond to an email, a lot of people just never write them again. Some people who are very sort of pushy will write them over and over again with more pitches, but the majority of people if they just have no response, won’t pitch again.

If an editor has taken the time to give you a no, that has more information than just no, whether it’s “we’ve already run that story, we have a story like that coming up soon, I’ve covered that destination too much recently,” what they’re actually saying is “I am opening a door, please write me again.” So we’re going to go into how to start getting those emails.

First, I want to talk to you a little bit more about what editors are and aren’t looking for. Now Geoff Van Dyke, who’s currently the editor-in-chief of Denver’s city magazine 5280 Magazine and also a former editor at Men’s Journal is just one of my favorite examples of the space that is available in the travel writing market for new freelancers. After Geoff was at Men’s Journal, he took a turn as a freelancer for a while and part of that is because of this quote right here, which is something he mentioned at a writing workshop that he spoke at. “One of the epiphanies I had at Men’s Journal was that there are not that many great freelance writers out there because my job became rewriting people who were professional writers.”

Now what I really really love about this is not just, you know, here’s an editor telling you that all of the people you’re intimidated by—people who are getting assignments instead of you—that these people are not that different than you, that what they are pitching and what they are offering to editors might not be the same as the final product that you’re actually seeing in the magazine. What they might be sending is something that’s not quite on par with what you’re sending, except they managed to get the editor to give them an assignment. Now the great thing about this is that, when there’s a hole, when editors feel that they aren’t that happy with the people they’re already working with, you have the opportunity to send them a pitch out of the blue, as someone who has no connection to them whatsoever, and not only get an assignment, but to get an ongoing relationship going with that editor by proving to them that you are somebody that they don’t have to rewrite and somebody that does have great ideas.

Now let’s look at another editor. Jordan Heller, who is the editor-in-chief of Hemispheres, which is the United Airlines magazine, had this great quote, “I once had a guy call me up. He gave me a one-word pitch. He said, ‘Macau.’ And that’s not really a pitch, is it? It’s not a narrative. It’s just a place.”

And I’ve got another quote after this. This is from Anne McSilver, the editor of AAA’s Via and AAA.  Though it is the Auto Insurance Association of America, they also have about twenty three different travel related titles all over the states and they cover international as well as domestic coverage. And, what she said is “I get pitches that say, ‘I want to do a story on Salt Lake City.’ That’s not going to cut it. There has to be something specific going on in that city—trends, attractions.” She takes a little bit further than Jordan, but I think what they both show in these quotes is people are not pitching them a story, but not even just that people aren’t pitching them a story, that people aren’t even pitching them a story for their magazine. So editors are getting so many pitches that aren’t even a story, let alone tailored to their magazines. When you get past these steps, when you not only send the editor something they can work with, but something they can work with that’s tailored for their publication, you’re a step ahead 99% at least of the pitches that they are getting.

We’re back to Jordan Heller because he is just—despite the fact that he runs a large magazine that works with a lot of writers and is very well respected—he  really cares about nurturing new writers. And so what he said is “What I am most interested in is a good idea, and a good idea can come from anywhere. It can come from someone who’s never published before, and it can come from somebody who’s published in every major national title.”

I hope this is really reassuring because we’ve talked about how a lot of the editors, a lot of the pitches that editors are getting are not that great, but that doesn’t necessarily mean that they’re going to work with new people, but that might mean that they’re jaded and they’re sort of done reading unsolicited pitches from new people. But the thing is that, editors are still reading those unsolicited pitches and we have to ask ourselves, why? And that’s because they need ideas. They need to fill the many many pages of their magazine every month and part of the way they do that is by getting ideas from people that they don’t already know, that they haven’t already heard from. So let’s talk about how you can be the one to give editors those ideas. Let’s look at how to break down a magazine.

Now, when we breakdown a magazine, we do want to look at the cover, but we’re actually going to come back to that. So for now, what we’re going to do is we’re going to skip past the advertisements, which of course are at the beginning of every single magazine and we are going to go to the table of contents.

Now the table of contents tells us a couple of different things. First of all, it tells us what is important to the editor. What that means is what the editor thinks is important to its readers. So you’ll see here the features are first. Now in some magazines what you might actually see, is that rather than the features being first, a selection of interesting articles from all over the magazine are first. In this American Way issue, you see that it’s the features.

So the table of contents is typically spread over several pages. So here you see it has the features, but here’s another page and they call it regulars. Regulars are sections that recur in every single issue of the magazine, but they typically have different names. Some people in the UK for instance, they’re called columns, but in the States a column is typically something that’s written by the same person every month, and so we call these regular recurring sections departments, but just for the purposes of this call, I’m going to call them departments.

Alright so in here in this section of regulars, we see departments and between these two things this page up here with the features and the departments, this is going to be pretty much everything in the magazine. Some issues of large magazines will have multiple pages of contents and sometimes they won’t necessarily list everything in there and in this case is seems like they’ve listed most of the pages, but see there’s a jump between page fifteen and page thirty. So there’s some things in here that they don’t have listed, but this is going to be good for our purposes today.

When you’re breaking down a magazine is you start on these table of content pages and particularly you want to start with this regulars section, so if it’s not broken out, you might just have to look at the table of contents and look for a column or department or something like that. But here, we’ve been handily handed this regulars page. What’s great about this is that this is a list, a guiding list for us. It is exactly which sections of the magazine occur every single month.

Now I’m sure you don’t all have magazines at home that you’re following along with, but when you do this at home, what I recommend you do is that you rip out these pages, the table of contents, of course don’t do this if you’re in Barnes and Noble unless of course you already bought the magazine. Rip out the table of contents and then also rip out this page here. This is the mast head.

The mast head does something very important, almost more so than the table of contents. What the mast head does is it tells us who works for the magazine. So we’ve got the main editor, the managing editor, the senior editor, the associate editor, and the assistant editor. These are all of the people that work for the magazine that might potentially write a section. The reason that we want to hold on to this is that we’re going to take these names and then the very first step in analyzing a magazine, is to take these names and then go through and see what sections of the magazine have been written by the people who work for the magazine.

We’re going to go through, and again, these sections in the very front sometimes are worth looking at, but typically they’re just things like we saw up here “Air Mail” which is letters from readers or more ads. Here we’ve got the letter from the editor and things like that.

I’m going to keep scrolling down until we find an actual section.

Here we go. POV, point of view. This is one of their recurring sections as they called regulars and we’re going to call departments and you’ll see that it opens here with a photo and then it’s got the text on the next page. Now this one is an interview and as we’ll see here on the side it says photo is by somebody and there’s Ken Wysocki. I hope he’s not on this call listening to me butcher his name, but Ken has written this. Now if we go back to our mast head, I don’t remember seeing Ken’s name and as you’ll see here Ken is not on here. So that means that that section is written by someone who is not a member of staff, who is a freelancer.

As we keep going through the magazine, we’re back to the point of view. Another point of view section, this is by Adam Pitluk. He is the editor, so this means that this section is written in house. Over here we’ve got another point of view written by Savannah Dickson. She’s not on staff, so this means this is open to freelancers. We’ve got a short section down here by Brain Reeseman and he’s not on staff so that means this section is open to freelancers.

What you want to do when you’re analyzing a magazine, is you want to take your table of contents in one hand and your mast head in the other and look through and check all these bylines. If something is written in house, you can just cross it right off in your magazine. If it’s written by a freelancer, you can circle it or just make a note.

Now I want to take a second look at this section. So this here in the point of view, Operation Turkey Swap is a food-related column where they’re interviewing or they’re highlighting chefs from around the world and their takes on a different dish. So this is something that’s open for freelancers and it has a very specific style. Now this is one of the best things that you can highlight in your pitches as a freelancer. If you want to pitch a section like this, one of the best ways to show an editor that you’re familiar with their publication, is to take a section like this and say I would like to pitch your food-related section and I know that you typically feature four chefs and I would like to, for instance this one is for the November issue, so it’s about turkey, but let’s say we’re looking at the February issue for Valentine’s Day and we want to talk about chocolate cake and you say that I was hoping for your February issue that we could highlight chocolate cake, you know perhaps a flourless chocolate mousse cake, something like that is appropriate for Valentine’s Day. And I’ve got these four chefs lined up who are willing to speak with me about this.

This is one of the ways that you can show an editor that you’ve read the magazine and it’s not only to target a specific section in the magazine, but also to explain to them that you know that they need four chefs and that they need a specific dish and offer them that in your pitch.

As we keep going through the publication you’ll see sometimes on the side here is actually where they list the bylines and sometimes it’s going to be down here at the end of the piece and sometimes it’s going to be at the top as we saw earlier on. This is good to know because I’ve often had people in classes that I’m teaching (see here’s one up at the top) I’ve often had people in classes that I’m teaching tell me that oh the whole magazine is written by editors because we couldn’t find any bylines, but sometimes they’re just hiding. Sometimes they’re over here. So as you go through the magazine—see we’re still at the front of the book with the point of view sections and the front of many magazines which is called the front of the book. This is an area where there’s a lot of these short little things like we’re seeing. You see like Christy Alpert and Abby Kissinger have both written two tiny little things that go on the same page here and this front of book area is where there’s a lot of opportunity for freelancers.

However, a lot of times when freelancers are pitching a magazine, they haven’t packaged up their story into something that fits nicely into one of these front of book sections like I was talking about we can do with that food swap section. As you’re looking through the magazine, what you want to do is take note on how these sections are organized in terms of the type of specific rubric I was talking about.

Here’s another one on food, but this one’s a bit longer than the previous one. This is their food and drink section and these ones are set up more, and this one’s got, this one is a profile of several different locations. This one is more reported style, it’s full of quotes. So as you note these different sections down as you’re walking through a magazine and you’re taking notes either on paper or your phone or on your laptop, write down not only that this is written by Terry Ward, so it’s open for freelancers, but that this section, the second part of food and drink is a reported section on one specific chef or one specific food location. Then as you go through, here’s another one that’s got a specific side bar in the middle. Here’s another one that’s got a very specific layout. Here’s one that’s specifically done as a list, but unlike a list that you would see in an online article, each section of the list is broken down.

As you’re going through a magazine, and again this magazine is a pretty big magazine, so it’s larger than most, just keep taking notes on which sections are open to freelancers and then every time you find one that’s open to freelancers, how is that organized?

We’re into the feature well now, so you can see that every feature has the name of the writer on the first page, and again this one is written by a freelancer. It starts with pictures, so you’re going to know they need pictures. So if you were to pitch a feature to this magazine, you would need to mention to them that you were either traveling with a photographer, that you were available to take pictures or something like that addressing the fact that their features are very photo heavy. Then you’ll see this feature starts with a story. This feature starts with a first-person story that puts you right in the middle of the scene. This is important to note because while it seems like features are always narrative stories or always include a reported element, in many magazines features have a specific tone. Let’s take a look at this one.

This one is a historic feature and again, it starts with “we”. It starts with a writer putting someone in the middle of the scene. Now some magazines, especially if it’s more of a trade magazine, they’re not going to start with a first-person lede. Lede is the first section of the magazine. They’re going to start with a lede that’s more of a statistic or more of an anecdote that’s relayed in the third person, or perhaps something a little bit more encyclopedic giving an interesting point of history about a place. Here in American Way, they really focus on storytelling in their features and so this is another thing that you’re going to want to take in your notes.

Now as we remember from the table of contents, there’s four features in this issue of American Way. I think we’re on the fourth one now and you’ll see again, “Motoring out into the Rio Negro, I cruise down one of the world’s great aquatic super highways.” So here again they’ve got that first person lede and this should wrap up the features in this issue.

Now we’re getting back to departments, which are these shorter things that have a very specific style. This is a department that’s written by a freelancer and it’s about sports, so it’s not necessarily our bailiwick. Here we’ve got business. Often in these airline magazines, you’ll see that the departments that come after the features tend to be less travel-related. These are more for the people who are business travelers or very seriously sitting on planes often and have very little else to do, they’ll flip through a magazine. Then there’s also going to be a lot of ads and the crossword and then if we kept scrolling down we would get into the airline specific information because this is an airline magazine.

I want to go back up to the top here and I’m going to dive a little bit more into what we do now that we have this information.

Now once we’ve broken down the magazine and we’ve seen what sections are open to freelancers, that’s when we want to take a look at that information that we’ve collected on what type of things they cover in a section and how they cover it. We’re going to go back to our table of contents here. So, even though here on the table of contents the POV section is just listed as one thing, as is the food and drink, we know that those are actually several sections. What that means is that if you were to pitch an editor—let’s go back to this food one that we pulled out of the beginning of the POV section—if you were to pitch an editor on this Operation Turkey Swap, what you are going to do in your pitch is that you are going to tell the editor that you are pitching something in the front of book. And again, the three sections of the magazine which are the front of the book which I described, the feature well, which is the middle section where the features are, and the back of the book, which is the departments that take place after the feature well.

You are going to tell the editor that you are looking to pitch them something in the front of the book, and you are looking to pitch…here it doesn’t have a name, so we’ll just call it the ingredient swap section. Or if you were to pitch this one up here that started off the POV section, you would say that you’re pitching them the chef interview section. Then what we want to do, one of the ways that helps editors see that you’re really very familiar with the magazine is to take, for instance this section…the interview section, and figure out about how many words are in it. You can do this by going to the magazine’s website, if they also have the number of words listed on the website, or you can cut and paste this into Word and check. If we were going to be pitching this interview related food point of view section, I would say I would like to pitch you a story for the food, for the chef interview in the point of view section. I know it usually runs approximately this many words and I’ve already secured the interview and I can complete it in the next two or three weeks. That’s how you show them that you understand how this section is set up.

I’m just going to pop over for a second and take Terri’s question. Terri says “what if you don’t have access to a skilled photographer and can’t take good ones? Is it ok for a front of book to request them from your source? For example, from a featured restaurant or other destination?”

Now that’s a great question Terri because the thing is that, especially as you’ve mentioned for that front of book section. In those cases, the editors are rarely expecting you to travel with a photographer, nor would they assign you one because those are short pieces for the editor, they’re much lower budget than a feature, and in those cases it’s perfectly acceptable to get the photos from the venue. In this case, because it’s a longer part, they may have sent a photographer out to take pictures of the chef. If we look at the some of the shorter ones like this one about snowboarding or skiing rather, they might have got these photos from the venue. I doubt that they sent out a chef to do that. This turkey one, as you can see is clearly stock as is this one below. So any time you’re looking at the front of book sections, there’s not a huge emphasis on either you taking the photos or them sending out a photographer for that. They’re going to figure out in-house how to get those images

The other thing is that, I’ve had questions, and I don’t know if anybody specifically asked that here, but I’ve had questions in the past about should I tell them that I also take photos if I shoot photos because (and I’m quoting here) “I heard that that’s a big turn-off to editors because they don’t want you to shoot your own photos” and honestly, I’ve heard people say “should I tell the editor if I can shoot photos or not because I heard that editors these days only buy a story if you have photos to go with it.”

The thing is, both of these situations are true and so it’s a little confusing because on the one hand, there’s editors who would baulk at the idea of using your photos unless you’ve demonstrated to them that you’re also a professional photographer because they are glossy newsstand magazines and they use photos that they have commissioned from photographers. However, a lot of magazines (and I would call these the magazines that pay let’s say five or seven hundred dollars a feature down) a lot of other magazines either rely on or expect their writers to provide photos to them. Whereas if you have an interesting festival or location or something out of the way that you want to cover, they’re going to tell you “I love your story, but I can’t run it unless you have the photos as well.”

So the thing about that is I tell everybody that I know that you should always be shooting photos wherever you are, whether it’s as notes for yourself, in case you don’t remember those vivid details about exactly what the layout in the room where you were invited for tea in Iran was or if the editor wants to use them because you’re pitching a publication that simply is not going to be able to send somebody to get those photos. So as a travel writer today, I think it’s very very paramount to learn some very very basics of photography, such as the rule of thirds, and just how to use your camera and it doesn’t have to be a fancy camera. I in fact travel with a high-end point and shoot myself and I’ve used that, and I’ve even used my cell phone, which takes very large photos to take photos for magazines because the thing is that, take a look at this shot of turkey right here, like this is a great example. This is not an awesome photograph guys. This is like something that you could have taken at your own Thanksgiving dinner. The lighting isn’t awesome. If you look here at these greens and over on the side there’s quite a bit of glare. This is not a fabulous photo. Once you keep an eye out for it, you’ll notice that a lot of magazines don’t feature fabulous photos all the time.

I’m going to go back down to the feature because I always find this to be one of sort of turning points for writers and realizing what their photography needs to look like. It’s studying features in newsstand magazines is a great way to get a sense of the type of photos that you should shoot. So see here this one: This photo is something that somebody could have just taken on their cell phone while watching their kids play, as is this one, even this one is not a big deal as far as photos go. This one you might have had to get in front of the horse, but as you see he’s got his hat down. This is probably not a posed photo. If you want to improve quickly with your photography and be able to offer that to editors as well, I would highly recommend just taking some time, just go to Barnes and Noble or Borders, whichever one didn’t close, Barnes and Noble I guess, and flipping through some magazines and just take a look at what they need because by and large these are photos (I take this photo on my cell phone all the time) that you could easily be getting and once you just start to look for them, you can take those along when you’re traveling and have that to offer to editors as well.

Now let’s go back to what we were saying before about how to put together a pitch based on what you see in a magazine. So let’s take this feature for instance. We talked about the availability of photos, so let’s look at this feature. So this feature is somebody who used to live in Dallas, moved away it seems, and has now come back to see what there is going on and if it’s worth traveling to from far away and he seems to think the answer is yes. So, like I said, the features in this magazine start in first-person and as we’ll see, in the very beginning of this sentence, he’s not showing you what it said up there. He’s not showing you, he or she sorry I didn’t check who the writer was. The writer isn’t showing you what is great about Fort Worth and Dallas yet. They are showing you that they used to be there, they are showing you a little bit about the scene. But even though it’s a pretty long lead, it’s quite narrative. They’re really starting to lay out what’s going to be a long story. And as we go through here, we’ll see that despite the fact that there are quite a few pages of photos, this story, the text of it, continues now onto four pages. So I would say that this is probably a 1500-2000 word story.

When you’re pitching the editor and if you want to pitch this editor a feature, you’re going to keep that in mind. You’re going to keep in mind the length, and you’re going to keep in mind the first-person tone, and you’re going to keep in mind that the editor likes people who have a voice. I mean here they’re shouting in all caps in their story. They’re saying I got a lift back to down town. This is not a hoity toity academic story here. This is a person on the ground just like you and me telling a story and that makes sense for an airline magazine because their readership is very general and they never really know who is going to be picking up that issue.

If you are to pitch a feature for this publication, you’re going to say I would like to pitch you a feature on, I’ll take an example of my own, that’s just like this. I used to live in Italy and I worked as a journalist covering Italy for many years, but I’m embarrassed to say that it wasn’t until a recent trip that I finally rented my own car to drive around the countryside and really hang out where the Italians live and it changed my life and it changed my view of Italy, and I would like to propose to you a 2,000 word feature on my experience driving through the Italian back roads to see its often missed festivals, the cities that aren’t in the guide book, and the agri-tourism where you can get a seven course meal, with alcohol, for 35 euros maximum a person. So in that set up, I’m using a tone that’s very personal and not just to show that this is an experience I have, but to show that I have a person on the ground, down to earth style, just like in the narrative here.

Now that we’ve flipped through the issue a little bit, I’m going to flip back over to my slides.

I wanted to let you know that this can be a lot of work, especially to go through and list all of the different sections covered by freelancers or what’s covered in-house and the style of each one. So while this is something that is definitely useful and we’ll circle back again on how to show editors that you’ve done that work, it’s not something that you need to do on your own, or there’s times when you can’t get a hold of a magazine.

In the Travel Magazine Database we do all of this work for you and specifically for magazines that are going to be hard for you to get. So this means magazines that are in English language, but they’re from Asia, or airline magazines that aren’t available online, or simply you know interesting independent magazines, and this is a really great opportunity for features. I’ve had a lot of people that tell me they want to write a long narrative story, and perhaps they do have a writing background and they totally have the chops to write the story, but they just don’t know who to pitch it to because they’ve heard that you should pitch features to editors you haven’t worked with, or that there’s just not that many people running long form magazines anymore. We’ve got a whole bunch of those going up on the database this week that you’ll see when you log in.

When you get the magazine database, this is what you’re going to be greeted with. You’re going to see a screen here on the right and on the left what you’re seeing, this is the zoomed out of version of this screen. So when you log in, you’ve got some suggestions on how to navigate the database by geographic area and also by topical area, but then you can also just scroll down and see what’s been added recently. Like I said, if you go on this week you’re going to see a bunch of independent magazines that we were delighted to recently get to share with you.

Then once you decide on a certain entry, there’s several different ways that you can use to navigate either to find that entry. So say you know that you want to pitch an independent magazine that’s based in Europe. What you can do is you can go by category-and all the categories, as you see here, are going to be listed at the bottom of the page—or you can go by tabs.

For instance, here is a magazine, which is actually a custom magazine, which means it’s made by a company for its customers. So this is a custom magazine that’s made by a hotel group that’s based in Berlin, and they feature a very heavy front of book, and also features with a strong focus on the Netherlands and German-speaking parts of Europe. So say you lit upon this one and it’s not quite what you’re looking for. You can look through the other categories and tabs that are associated with it.

You can look for other European magazines, you can go through here and find other ones in Belgium, or Amsterdam and Frankfurt and flip through that way. So once you click to an entry, you’re going to see a couple different things. One of the first things that we didn’t cover, when you click through into the magazine, you’re going to see four different tabs and one of the first ones I suggest you check out is the demographics tab. On the demographics tab, this is where we talk about who the audience of the magazine is. So if you have gone a trip, that was perhaps a press trip, or perhaps something you did on your own but it was very family-oriented. You stayed a family-oriented resort and you’re looking for a place to put that trip. You might find that the magazine that you thought would be a good fit because it’s got the right topic, is not because it’s got the target audience right here is backpackers and business travelers, and only a small bit families. I recommend when you click into a magazine if you already have an idea in mind to start with this tab here.

The next thing to check out is the magazine description, and this is where we talk about the sort of nitty gritty nuts and bolts part of the magazine. So how much of the magazine is travel content, how frequently does the magazine come out? If you want to pitch a feature, but the magazine only comes out four times a year, that means they’re only realistically publishing twelve features and it’s not going to be something they buy a lot of. You might be better off trying to find a place, a shorter section of that magazine to stick that article into and then they’ve also got the editorial positioning in the words of the magazine. So whether that’s in their media kit or on their website, or from the letter to the editor of the magazine, this is what the magazine itself, what their editor, what their publisher, what their sales staff, what they think their magazine is about. This is really important because one of the key things about analyzing a magazine and looking at the magazine (and I recommend you do this when you analyze magazines on your own) is to make sure that what you are pitching them, the article that you are trying to sell them, is not based on your own idea of what the magazine is about, but is grounded in what the magazine itself believes and what they sell. Because otherwise you’re going to have a really hard time getting an editor to buy your article, to assign you that article because you’re trying to shoehorn it in. We want to make our pitches not be shoehorn, we want to make our pitches be so clear and so tailored that that editor sees not only where the article would fit in their publication, but that you understand their publication and that means that they’re going to want to work with you more.

After the description tab, the contact tab is going to be another section where we’ve got more sort of overview information, but overview information that’s very important. This is where we talk about all the different people who might be assigning articles in that issue and exactly how to get in touch with them. We always use the email format because editors change, and so we give you an email format that you can plug the first and last name into to figure out how to give them a direct email because those black hole info at emails, you never want to use them. I have had magazines that assign me an article, but after I pitched their black hole emails six months ago and finally found the direct email for the editor. So always email editors directly whenever you have the opportunity.

Now this is a bit fuzzy because it’s a long section and I had to do a little cut and paste, but in the how to pitch section in the Travel Magazine Database, this is where we do what you all and I just did right now with the magazine. We go through and look at the table of contents, and we tell you each section that’s in the magazine, and then we also tell you how many freelancers are used every issue because that gives you a sense of how much competition you have, right?

We tell you which sections are open to freelancers, and then we break through everything that I went through with you right now. We go through how many sections are in there, for instance in this publication Out & About is similar POV section that we just saw in American Way, it’s composed of multiple different sections, and we tell you how long they are, what they cover, and then we also give you some examples of things that have been covered in there recently.

When you sit down to write your pitch, I know that a lot of people spend, I don’t want to say inordinate, but a lot of people get really sucked in to this research process and someone just posted in a Facebook group that I’m in the other day, “How many hours should I really spend researching a publication before I pitch?” I think that’s a really great question because you know you could sit there and you could read four or five back issues of the magazine, and if you’re not reading it properly, you could come up with no ideas and we don’t want that.

What I really recommend you do, to both streamline your pitching time and also your research time, is to make sure that as you’re going through the magazine as we did before, you know as we have here in the magazine database, as you’re going through and finding each of these sections, that you’re not just jotting down what they cover, but you’re also jotting down some ideas. I would prioritize your research time, and this will help make your pitch time shorter, but prioritize your research time to focus on what tangible things you need to know and demonstrate to the editor to pitch that section and what ideas exactly fit that section.

I talked a couple minutes ago about shoehorning. Avoid trying to take an idea that you’ve had and mold the section of the magazine around it. You need to take your idea and you need to slice it, format it, add a couple of new pieces of research that you didn’t have before to make it a round-up. You need to take your idea and change it to fit the shape of the magazine section. Now here are some of the ways that we can do that and we can show an editor that we’ve done that. As we were going through the magazine we saw a couple things, I want to say with the Operation Turkey Swap. We saw some headlines and they were a bit interesting, you know they showed the style of this magazine.

So when you sit down to pitch an editor, the very very first thing that you want to do is (because this has the largest impact on whether your pitch is read) is you want to write a headline for your story. So this means what the headline of the story would be if it appeared in the magazine. So you want to think about your story idea and then you want to look at the magazine and see the style of headline that they use, and especially the style of headline they use for the section that you’d like to pitch and write your own headline accordingly. Then you’re going to take your email pitch to the editor, and in the subject line you’re going to write pitch: and the headline that you’ve created.

When we were going through the magazine, especially in the features, we talked a lot about the type of lede, the beginning that their stories have. So when you write your pitch, the very first section of that pitch after dear editor’s name, is actually going to be a lede. You’re not going to say I’m so and so and I would like to pitch you a story for this section. That comes later. What you’re going to have in the beginning of your pitch is essentially what would be the first couple sentences of that article if you were to write it.

When we looked at those features, we talked about how they start with a scene from their story, they start in the first-person, and they start by creating a description that sets the scene for the reader. So that’s how you want to start your story or your pitch rather. In this case, say we were talking about that chef/restauranteur that began the POV section. In that case, the lede might be an interesting quote from that person if you’ve already interviewed them, or an interesting factoid about that person. Something that’s attention-grabbing is what you need to start with, something about the story you’re going to write and nothing about yourself. Start your pitch with something that grabs the editor’s attention just like you would start the article.

Now after your attention-grabbing lede, the second part of your pitch is going to be where you tell the editor what you are pitching them. So you’ve peaked their curiosity and you’ve sort of teased them a bit, and now you’re going to draw it out. You’re going to tell them, not the rest of the story, but you’re going to tell them what you would pitch them, what you would write. If they want to hear the rest of that story, they need to respond back to you.

In the second paragraph of your pitch, this is where you’re going to use what I was saying earlier, “I would like to pitch you an interview with Mario Batali for your chef interview section and I have access to him already and I know that this section is typically 1,000 words, I’ve secured the opportunity to speak with him for an hour to gather that much information.”

In the second section of your pitch, you’re going to mention the part of the section of the magazine, but you’re also going to mention these facts that we collected about what goes into that magazine to show the editor that you have done your homework about what needs to be in there. Again, this is where we show that we are not shoehorning our idea into that section, but that we are serving the editor an idea that perfectly fits it.

Another thing that you can add in the second paragraph are some samples of stories that that editor has run before that are related to, but different than your story. So this means you know if we had just read this issue, the November issue of American Way, we might mention I know you recently featured so and so, who’s also a restauranteur in New York. And then you’re going to say though importantly how what you are pitching is different than the similar thing that came before. This is especially important if you’re pitching a destination.

There’s a rule of thumb that’s a bit fuzzy about how often a magazine will cover the same place and a lot of people say the rule of thumb is a year and a half, but that’s not really true. If it’s Florence, or Rome, or Paris, or London, these things get a lot more coverage, but they need to be different. Every single time that it is covered in the magazine it needs to be different than the previous time.

If you’re trying to get a story on something very very out of the way into a magazine, I would make sure that they haven’t covered it in five years, that’s the rule of thumb for more unusual things. If you’re trying to cover something that’s a bit more evergreen, say as a destination or a topic, just feel free to choose another time that they’ve mentioned it or something like that and tell the editor why it’s different. You don’t want them to come back and say well we just covered that. You want to show them that you know they’ve just covered that and here’s how your story is different than the one they ran before.

A very quick way to tell if an editor has already covered or a magazine has already covered a destination, like the specific place that you want to pitch is to go into Google and write the URL of the magazine. For instance, Travel&Leisure.com, colon and then a word. That restricts Google to search only on that specific magazine. The other thing that’s an advanced trick here, and it wouldn’t work for the American Way that I showed you, so you’ll see this is why you can’t quite do it all the time, is that a lot of publications will have a page where they show contributors to that issue and they have a little bio about them. It’s not going to be a full bio. It’s going to be something interesting about where they’ve travelled or where they researched that story or something like that. This is a gold mine because if your publication has this, that is a perfect delivery mechanism to you about how you should write the third paragraph of your pitch.

This third paragraph is where you say not only who you are, but why you should be writing the story and that can be something related to your travel background and your specific experience with subject area or your writing background. I would recommend and I always say don’t put anything in that third paragraph that doesn’t specifically have to do with why you should write this article. So if you have a blog that has nothing to do with this article, don’t mention it unless you have had one post that did particularly well that was on a similar subject. If you have been writing for fifteen years, but not as a journalist or not in travel, I don’t know that I would put that. Put something that is related to this story and if you can find the contributors bios in the magazine, look at how they’re structured and try to copy that structure.

We’re getting close to the end of our time and I know I’ve had a couple questions come up in the chat window throughout.

It was such a pleasure to chat with you and share with you my favorite technique about how to really show an editor you understand their publication, so they’re more likely not only to give you an assignment, but to respond to you even if that idea is not the right idea for them, so that you can build a relationship for later.

Again such a pleasure, and I really appreciate you all joining me today and all of you who weren’t here live on the call and are joining us for the replay. Have a great afternoon and a great weekend. I know it’s a holiday tomorrow, so some people might even be off. Enjoy your weekend folks. Bye Bye.

How To Research On The Road And Find Salable Ideas While Traveling Transcript

Download (PDF, 274KB)

This week we are going to talk about how to research on the road and find salable ideas while traveling. I want to talk about this because I have been getting some questions recently about exactly this topic, but often in different ways. When people come to our retreats or do a class like the Pitchapalooza class I ask them to prepare in advance a list of trips that they have gone on recently, so we that could go through and pull out ideas. I often find that while many of you guys are traveling a lot and some of you don’t travel so much now, but have traveled a lot in your past. You’re not necessarily always super on point about how to pull the salable magazine ideas out of there. Maybe it’s because you have your own blog and you’re used to looking at your trips through the lens of what would work for your readers, as opposed to what would work for magazine readers, or just because you’re just new to the game.

Specifically, I want to start with what I just mentioned. How to avoid coming home from a trip and realizing you don’t have many good ideas to pitch. You probably do, and you just don’t know what they are. But, I have seen a lot of people have this feeling. We’re going to talk about specifically how to look at the experiences you’re having on a trip through the lens of some different types of ideas, different types of article concepts, article formats, so that as you’re out there, you’re retraining your eyes to see magazine ideas. Not just to see things that are interesting, experiences, or things like that. But, how to specifically look at your trips through the eyes and mindset of what a magazine editor would be looking for. Also, I am going to talk about my favorite hacks for finding stories on the road.

These are some techniques that you can use when you’re on your own or if you’re on press trips. Just lots of little ways to ferret out interesting story ideas.

Before we start talking about how to research on the road, I want to look at why people get tripped up? Why are people coming back from their trips with ideas that they’re real excited about, but upon further examination they realize wouldn’t work for the types of things they are looking to be pitching.

For a second let’s forget the elusive idea of what story is and let’s think more just about ideas. The ideas that I typically see fall into one of two categories. Either they are too vague, or too narrow. If you have come back from a trip and feel like you had some ideas, but then upon further examination, you thought “Oh I just don’t know who would possibly buy this” or  “I think this is great, but I just don’t know what to do with this idea.” Once you’ve gotten home and it is too late to go back and get more information about it. Ideas that are too vague tend to fall into the category of something that is an itinerary. A lot of people want to do a forty-eight hour & style piece, and there’s just not a lot of markets for those. For instance, something that seems like a list of interesting things that isn’t quite an itinerary. It is more of a type of thing that you would send in an e-mail to your friend about what you did on your trip.

The thing about ideas that are too vague is they often end up having a sort of encyclopedic approach. For instance, you might say “Oh my idea is this festival,” and when I ask you about it, you just tell all the things about the festival. You’re not telling me what is new about it, otherwise has a time peg, and what is the clear interest in this festival for a reader. Often when you have an idea that is too vague it is because your idea is more in terms of a topic and all the things about the topic. As opposed to narrowing the things about the topic that can fit into a magazine idea. The reason we are going to look at different magazine formats later in the call is that looking at your idea through that lens of exactly the framework that a magazine will publish it in can help you step away from this encyclopedic approach. To looking just for the information, you need for your article idea not necessarily the entire history of the American incursion onto Chichijima island in Japan.

The opposite of this is when ideas are too narrow. If your ideas are too narrow and it sounds like someone over here in the chat box has a similar issue to this. What you might find is that your idea seems very interesting. There’s something there that interest you, interest people that you tell about it, and things like this. But, it’s not something that a national magazine or even a major regional magazine can publish because it is only going to be of interest to a small subset of their readers. This typically happens when you fail to pull out something that is universal and in terms of a trend or a message from this smaller instance.

This is something else that we are going to look at later in the call. I often find that the very higher up or well-known travel writers everything they write no matter what the topic, format, or venue has a sense of universality to it. You can say this about fiction, and you can say this about anything, but particularly in travel writing that’s the bar that you cross to become not just a great writer, but a writer that becomes published very easily. As your looking at things on your trip you always want to be looking not just what interest you about something, but how it relates not just to other people who might be reading the magazine, but how it relates to things that are going on in the world. Whether that’s something or the news peg-like Trumpism or something like that, it can be something more general such as how people relate to one another, families, any of these universal touch points you can take to elevate something that might be too narrow and make it have a broader appeal.

The issue also with these ideas that are too narrow is that you might be able to publish it in a magazine that is very closely aligned with the topic, but when you go to super niche publications, you’re going to get less money or no money. They are just smaller they have smaller writing budgets. So, what I always recommend in this case is if you have something that’s super niche in this way in terms of the idea we’re going to look at some different formats that you can pitch it through to get it into a bigger publication. Then you can take it back and use the more I don’t want to say encyclopedic, but use a longer deeper dive into this specific topic type article for a very niche publication where the readers would be interested in such a thing.

Something about idea generation that I have found is that the more you learn about how to come up with ideas for your travel articles the more, you work through these stages that I call the stages of Idea Generation Grief. They don’t match to the real stages of grief, but the idea is that when you first start learning more about how to put together travel pitches, what magazine editors are looking for, and these things. You have this feeling at the beginning like “Oh my God I can’t use any of these ideas there all horrible,” or “I went on this trip, and I thought I could write all these things about it, but now I sit down, and there are no ideas I didn’t do enough research.”  Or “I didn’t research the right things,” and you just have this sense of malaise or depression that you can’t write about any of these things. But, we’ll get over that in a minute. In this first phase, you might even feel like now on this call, or you felt like this in the past. You are kind of hit by the sense that you’re not doing this right.

The next stage you are going to get to is you’re going to get to a place where when you see it you know you’ve stumbled across a totally killer idea that a magazine editor will be interested in. That comes from not just having pitched editors and knowing what editors will respond too, but you can also hack that and do it more quickly by reading very widely on your own by reading magazines. This is how you can get a sense of what editors are looking for without even having been pitching and getting responses from editors. You see in action the kind of stuff they published, and that is how you’re going to know you’re on the road. When you start to say like “This is exactly the right fit for blah section and blah magazine.” After you get to that point when you see an idea you know, it’s a fit or you know it’s a winning idea.  You’re going to get to the point where you realize how you can take every trip you’ve been on in the past year or last 20 years and make tons and tons of different stories from that. This particularly works with essays and narrative features, and we’re going to get to those in the next section as well. Let’s find ways to get to those higher levels the later stages of idea generation grief.

There are tons of ideas, and there are tons of ways you can slant every idea for different audiences and to different things. But, there’s only so many ways format wise to present an idea in the austerities of a magazine.

There’s a lot of P’s in here I noticed or at least there are two P’s in here at the beginning. But, we start with profiles. I am going to go through each of these in more detail. But, profiles and interviews are going to be two different types of things. The profile is the answer to a lot of ideas that you guys are coming up with that you don’t quite know where to place. For instance, a restaurant that is doing something interesting, but isn’t new enough to be pitched to something new and then were going to look at some different types of short pieces. A postcard is sort of a mini version of a feature, but it has some different characteristics. We’re going to look at how you identify something on your trip that could be a post card and how you put that together. A narrative feature, of course, is sort of the golden goose that we all chase after and I’ll talk about how to look for different things on your trip that feed into those. Service pieces or anything how to. Those have become a bit harder to do today and I’ll talk about why. But, I will talk about ways that you can still find things during your trip that will allow you to pitch those to editors. Round ups are also typically shorter pieces where you take several different things that are related, and we’ll talk about some different ways to come up with those. The last one here the news brief and the short are slightly different. These are really the things that you want to focus on. I have one question over here on tips for article research. Later, in the call, I am going to talk about my favorite hacks for doing research on the road.

I do recommend a mix of researching in advance of your trip as well as on the road, and I’ll look at some different ways to do that in a little bit. But, I think one of the ways that can elevate you out of those ideas that are too broad is certainly research things that are on your trip. So, when you get on the ground you already have information and already know how the Japanese tea ceremony works. So, that when you go to a Japanese tea ceremony, you don’t just think “Wow this Japanese tea ceremony is so cool.” You’re looking for the certain things that would make it into an article rather than an encyclopedia piece so, I will look at that later in the call as well. Let’s talk about the news brief. For something to qualify as a news brief, there needs to be something legitimately new that seems clear.

But, the thing is I have a lot of people coming and telling me “Oh I found this thing it’s new,” and I ask, “When it’s from?” They say, “a couple of years.” So, for magazines that does not count. A couple of years doesn’t count and in some cases, not even a couple of months even count. I will essentially gauge it this way the larger the magazine the closer to the second the thing has opened you need your new things to be. So, if a magazine is a less regional magazine or a niche magazine in terms of  the topic those things don’t need to be as new. But, if you’re looking to pitching an airline magazine, a national magazine, a major regional magazine, like a Midwest Living, or Southern Living things that are new need to be hitting the magazine pages the month they come out or the month before they come out. What that means is if you want to be publishing things that are new, if you want to see things on your trip and then pitch it to a magazine as a news brief. What you need to be looking for is things that aren’t new yet as in they are not open yet and they haven’t happened yet. There’s ways to do this. One of the easiest ways is to work with star people because they’re the ones who know what’s coming down the line. They have their own purpose they want to get press releasing before they come out.

If you manage to snag information about something that isn’t widely available it totally benefits you. Then you can go to a magazine editor and say “Hey I have exclusive information on this historic home that is being turned into a venue for a wedding run by this two people with a very interesting back story. Would you be interested in it for destination weddings and honeymoons?” This is the kind of thing where you certainly need to be doing a bit of research in advance of the things that you are primarily going to find on the ground. I always recommend to people that I coach. When you go somewhere especially if you are going to be there for a while you want to be very familiar. I like to do it in person because having already been there for perhaps twelve hours or over twenty-four hours or something and having thought about what I am going to be researching when I am in the destination. To go to the CBB person with that very specific background in mind because otherwise what happens is when you talk to the tourism more they’re going to be telling you from the blank slate of what they want to cover, the little that they may know about you, and what they think you might be interested in.

The more information you can give them about what you’re looking for, the more they’ll be able to shunt you towards, for instance, the urban distillery that is making whiskey out of honey that’s collected on the roof of the convention center. These are the things that they might not necessarily have on their website for you to find in advance but, if you go and meet with someone at the tourism board about specifically the types of things you are looking for. It’s their job to come up with these things for you. I have often found that when I talk to CBB people in this way that they’re going to tell me about the things that they like to do as a person, as an individual that are quite interesting. They would have not necessarily thought to tell me about otherwise, but those are the really great things to hear. If you don’t have the time or the inclination to stop into the tourism board, you can also find these on your own by looking around for coming soon signs and ease dropping. This is something that we are going to talk about later when we talk about my favorite hacks.

Another thing that we talk about a lot is round – up. I often call them basket of kittens and if you have not heard this before we like the term baskets of kittens because it reminds you that the round-up shouldn’t just be a bunch of things around a theme. Each different thing in that round-up or that basket should be just as adorable as the one next to it. They should all be great, shiny, and interesting. The kittens shouldn’t be mixed up with stuffed kittens. You want to have all real kittens in your basket. The thing with round-up’s is that I often have people come back from trips and tell me “I found this thing it is really cool.” I look at it and I am like well “I think it might be hard to do an article about that, but if we look for some more things that are like that? “For instance, I went to The Treehouse Hotel in Sweden. Architecturally it is very cool and when it came out it received tons of press about it, but it is not new enough to just write up on that. So, you can sort of do a stay review, but again it is not super new, so how can you tackle something like that? You can do a round up on treehouse hotels around the world, a round-up on high design hotels around the world, or architecturally significant boutiquey and luxurious hotels in very hard to reach places.

You can often find one thing on your trip which in itself is interesting but would be hard to pitch because it has been around for a while or it is in a hard to reach a place. You can use that as the cornerstone in looking up other things that are like it and write a round-up about it. Another rule that sort of goes around in journalism is the concept of three is a trend. So, if you are in a city that has not had a big exeat movement and you are just walking around thinking that you are in this very off Eden path destination. Then you see three places. The first place is a clear indicator for visitors like a juice bar and then you see a hipster barbershop now you have seen two. Now what that means is that you want to keep your eyes peeled for the third thing of this variety. You have got your juice bar, barber shop, and maybe now you are going to look for a yoga studio. Then you can pitch a trend piece as a round- up about how this destination is becoming a hot bed for a polite way of saying hipster travelers. Then you’ll include these three places that you have found and you’ll probably end up digging up some more. You can certainly start to research this stuff at home by looking at press releases on tourism sites, or on travel media.

The difference between looking for press releases on a tourism board site or on a wider site like PR board or travel media is that on the tourism board site there are going to be various levels of depth. So, if you are in a destination that is not a major city then you’re going to find all sorts of stuff on the website which is perhaps a bit boring. It is a little too much like digging up local news. However, if you are looking at the tourism board website of a major city you’re probably going to find that the stuff that they are publishing is only the high-level stuff. They are publishing hotel openings, festivals, and things like this. But, what you really want to know about is that urban distillery that is making whiskey from the honey of bees that they collect on top of the convention center. 

Those are the types of things that might be a little too small to show up on the tourism board’s website in terms of press releases. However, you can often find more press releases about the smaller business’s in the destinations that you are going to by searching through these other websites particularly travel media which is focused on travel. You also look on PR Web which is more general to dig up some of these things before you leave. Like I mentioned in the last slide about things that are just new. You are often going to find those best when you are on the ground talking to people and we are going to consider some other ways besides just talking to the tourism board to do that later. The thing with round- ups is they are much easier to sell than just profiling one individual business.

Now the things that we have looked at before we looked at the news brief and the round-ups can be classified as short pieces. If you spend time on the travel magazine database or just going through travel magazines on your own. You will notice that most magazines have a good amount of these short pieces. I am constantly amazed by the things that I see like a graphics spent, a walking tour of a neighborhood, or a comparison piece. For instance, Air Canada has something called high-low where they take one destination and then they pick a theme. Then they pick three things that they fit in that theme and then one way to do it on the cheap and one way to do it luxuriously.

You end up with this layout which is very busy because you have six columns, three different things, and then the cheap and expensive way to experience each of them. That is the kind of thing if you do not know about that section in advance when you go to the destination you might find some things that fit into it, but then you come home and be hard pressed to fill those in. We are going to talk specifically more about how to make a pocket magazine cheat sheet later. Particularly for these short front of book sections. All magazines have them and they are all different. 

For instance, a few of the European airline magazines that are produced by Ink Global which produces a lot of the airline magazines and we have all their magazines up on the database. They have this neat front of book feature which they call the question of the month. It will be something corky like what kind of music do Cuban cigar rollers listen too while rolling cigars? Sometimes they are general like why does your cell phone always fall on the screen? These are the types of things that you wouldn’t know to look out for those if you didn’t already know them. So, if you want to be pitching short pieces and specifically finding them on the road I really recommend taking some time before your trip to familiarize yourself with what sort of short pieces the magazines you want to pitch or the magazines relevant to the destination you are going to are looking for.

Profiles can often end up in this front of book section, they can be a loner, or they can even be features. This really depends on the magazine. The thing with profiles is I have a lot of people coming to me with various ideas that are a restaurant, business, or accommodation that is quite interesting, but it’s not new enough to do a news brief on. Now to cover these, you typically need to put them into a roundup, which we have already looked at or find a way to turn it into a profile. Opposed to just saying “Hey here is this hotel.” Now to do that we want to pull from the business, from the person, from the attraction, or whatever it is some sort of underlining story. 

The way to find these to simply ask how something began, why it happened, why it opened, why did it open when it opened, what kind of story do they have, how did it change from how they envisioned it, and has it changed from that to what it is now. Now you don’t have to ask all these questions while you are there, but if you find a place that is interesting or a person that is interesting that you want to do a profile of you do need to get the contact information and at least that basic hook of what the profile will be about before you leave. So, when you get home and you go to write up your pitch you have enough information or the phone number and name to get that information to be able to put that together. 

Donna has a question over here that I want to address because I think that it is interesting. She says if you e-mail an editor that you are going to a city or destination and ask what shorts they are looking for or have openings for will they just tell you? The answer is primarily no and if you send that e-mail to an editor they are going to not be very happy with you. This circle’s back to a quote that I use a lot when talking about pitching. It is the biggest complaint that editors have when people write them and say I am going to “blah” would you like a story? The short answer you should never ever do that. The more specific answer is if you already know an editor then you should do that. This is only with editors that you don’t know that you shouldn’t just say “Hey I am going to this place would you like a story?” For editors that you don’t know you need to be doing the research about what types of short pieces they publish, what destinations they are looking for because it is infrequent that they pick in advance the exact places that they are going to cover and that you would need to know that to pitch. What typically happens is that if they picked the places that are going to be covered in advance they have already assigned that to someone in-house.

The ones that they are looking for freelance pitches for they typically are waiting for ideas to come in from freelancers about what to cover. That is what magazine editors need freelancers for to bring in ideas that they would not have themselves. Otherwise, they would just come up with them and then they would just assign them to freelancers that they already work with. I think that this is an interesting point because a lot of us that are newer really get stuck on the idea of we want to see the editorial calendar and we want to know what the magazines are publishing. It is important to remember that anytime you are on the ground your purpose as a freelancer is to bring editors ideas that they do not have back in their offices. Always keep that in mind. 

One more question on profiles. When writing profiles on businesses or people it is customary to send a draft to them before sending it to the editor so that they can comment or approve the content? I want to just comment on this as well. Anytime that you are written about somebody they will have a PR person and the PR person will tell you that they want to review the piece. You are never ever to say yes to that without checking with your editor and you should always present that request to your editor in the vein of “So and so asked to review this piece before it went to print I don’t know what your policy is on that, but I wanted to check in with you.” You do not want to say that you think it is okay or not because with some magazines it depends on the magazine that is frowned upon to show the piece to the person we profiled beforehand. What is okay is to, however, let them check the quotes that you are using, but not the whole piece.

The caveat here is that some small magazines and particularly trade magazines will want to show it to the person because they are interested in the person approving it because they are going to ask the person for an ad. This is a whole other level of relationship between magazine editorial and money. The typical answer here is that you should never show your piece to the person being profiled just on your own. Sometimes the editor will pull your piece if you have done that. If the person has asked you then you should take it back to your editor and ask what the magazines’ policy is and do whatever the editor says. If the source is really pushing you about seeing the piece sometimes you just have to put them in touch with your editor. I have had a lot of times when I have had to be very firm about this and I do not think I have had anyone pull out of a piece entirely. This is one way that a profile is different from an interview that we are going to get to now.

With interviews, this is going to be all about quotes. So, this might be a case when they might ask to see it and it might be allowed by the magazine because they want to review the quotes. The thing about interviews is you need to maintain a much closer positive relationship with the person being interviewed and their PR person that keeps them on a leash because without the interviewee you do not have a story.

You can write a profile about a business without the interviews and without the permission of the place that is being profiled. They have no say in whether you write that profile, but you can’t do an interview without that person. So, if you are on the ground and you find a person that you want to interview you need to make sure that you get them to say that they are willing to participate in the interview before you go and pitch that piece. Otherwise, that is the very first question that the editor is going to write back and ask you. To circle back for a second the way you get people you want to interview it is a little different than finding something for a profile. When we are talking about profiles this is kind of a good bucket for a lot of those places that may seem interesting, but have been around too long to do for a new piece. Interviews are different. For interviews, you need not just a person that has an interesting background story or that has done something interesting, but they often need to have met certain criteria.

This is another reason why it is good to be in step with what magazines are looking for before you go out on your trip because I have seen a lot of magazines lately that want profiles of not famous people, but of people who are just extracts from where the magazine is based in that live somewhere else. Primarily with interviews, they want people who are quite famous or have done something quite important. With these people, they are not necessarily going to be people that just ran into on the street or even people who just run one hotel. They are typically not going to be people that you are able to interface with on your own when you are traveling. This is the area where PR people are often going to offer to put you in touch with famous chefs, big restaurants tours, or other important people from a place and this is one of the reasons why it is very important to make that stop in the tourism board before your trip and for sure write them before you get there. A lot of the people that you would be able to sell an interview piece of you are not going to be able to have access to on your own unless you have some other personal connection.

I mentioned earlier that the service pieces have been a lot harder to sell more recently. This is because a lot of this stuff is now found on blogs. Not necessarily personal blogs though, also company blogs or AAA or other insurance companies. These are the things about how to rent a car in Japan and how to cross between Israel and Jordan on the border for a day trip as an American. The thing is that the internet now has kind of addressed these questions. I often have people come to me and tell me “I want to pitch how to rent a villa in Italy” and I tell them that is not going to fly. The weird thing is though that there are still several basic questions answering services in magazines so it’s a weird sort of “catch 22” here where they are harder to pitch, but are still being published. The question is how you can be that person? What will separate you from the other people that are pitching these ideas? The best way to do this is to have experts.

If you are in a place for instance Italy. You find that you want to pitch an idea like how to rent a villa what will separate you from everyone else is you already have an expert. If you find an interesting service piece to pitch for instance I mention a lot that I went to Japan last year. We went to this festival that only happens once every 6 or 7 years and it is hard to get in, figure out what is going on, and there’s no information online about how to do it. For that, I might have to find people who are there and I might try to find somebody that works in the organizing party of the seats or maybe a tour guide that frequently brings people there. 

The same goes for Palio in Siena. You can say how to just experience Palio, but an editor doesn’t necessarily care unless you have been able to bring something extra to it. In that case, you’re going to get a local who’s lived there their entire life. You are going to get a tour guide who has access to a special place in the plaza to see it. You’re going to get somebody in the city that is going to give you the things you need to know from a legal movement standpoint. As you’re on the ground when you’re thinking about pitching these service pieces; these how-to pieces you want to be gathering the contact info or just the tips from the people that are going to add that extra oomph to that piece. 

Today one of the best ways to pitch a service piece is around experience’s that not everyone can have because then you yourself become that authority. You can also do this with a humorous or a how not to Ad like how not to be a travel writer. There is still a very startling number of magazines that still feature basic how to service content. I just noticed the other day that AARP which pays $2.00 a word has one of these basic sections. So, you think well everybody must be pitching it. They’re probably not getting as many pitches for that as for instance a travel narrative piece.

If you want to make it in there you need to be pitching something that isn’t just based on your experience, but you also have other people lined up. When I say lined up I mean that you already asked them to participate. In your pitch mention I want to pitch how to plan an inexpensive, but luxurious getaway to Europe this summer while the dollar is strong. You’re going to mention that you’re going to feature this travel agent, this tourism board official, and this travel specialist that specialize in booking villa rentals. In your pitch, you’re going to say I have already spoken to these people about providing their insights for the piece. That is going to be what makes your service piece stand out. You need to gather those connections and those people while you are there in the destination. 

We have one question here that I think is about an interview. If a PR rep sends an e-mail offering to put you in touch with notable people for an interview do you contact the editor before you interview or do you wait until after? This is a good point. Sometimes you will do an interview because you are in a place and a PR person has set it up for you, but then you cannot find a home for it. Then you are screwed with the PR person. What I tend to do if someone has reached out to me is that first I will think about the editors I can contact, if I have the time, and where I would go. Sometimes I will just politely say no. I will tell them that if something comes up where I can use it at I will contact them, but right now I just don’t see a good home for that. The other thing is you can also say thanks so much for the offer and then go hustle and try to place pitches. I wouldn’t agree to the interview unless you already know that you have an editor that will buy that story. Either an editor that you work with regularly that you haven’t specifically pitch this to and you know that they will buy it or one that you hustled and pitched to, but I wouldn’t necessarily say yes without that.

We are going to move on from service because I want to make sure that we get to my hacks on how to do research on the road specifically. With postcards, postcards are interesting because I think they are a bit underrated these days. People really want to write features, but postcards are basically the same writing style and provoke the same point as a feature, but takes up much less space, so editors are much happier to publish them. What this means is that a postcard is going to be something that gives the reader the sensation of what it’s like to be in a place. Also drives home a greater point about travel itself and the nature of the place you’re speaking about, daily interaction, gratitude, all sorts of different things. With a postcard, these are the types of things that whenever you have a little snippet or moment in your trip that was just very special somehow, but it just not enough for a feature then that should be a postcard.

There are lots of different magazine sections that specialize in these, but one I wanted to draw your attention. These are the types of moments that we all have, but don’t necessarily remember that we can pitch. National Geographic UK has one called snapshot. This is a conversation with a local in a destination often when you don’t speak the same language. An exchange that happens that really showcases this universality of understanding and often some other theme. It is quite short I think they have it at 450 words. That is what I mean by postcard. That is when you take a whole trip and stuff it into 450 words. 

The thing is when you look at it in that way like oh my God how do I stuff a whole trip to 450 words you run the risk of just sort of turning it into a paragraph and listing everything you did. What these really need to do is take one moment or a couple moments from your trip to stand for the entire trip or the entire point that you are trying to make. There are a lot of these some in the front of a book, but also in the back of a book. That last page of a magazine if you have ever seen that magazine that has that one page where they have a photo and a tiny vignette at the bottom. That is a great place to study these postcards. That is where they often take place and are done very nicely and in very few words.

This method that I was just talking about where you take several moments and weaving them together to paint a larger picture and show a larger theme this is what a narrative feature is all about. If you want to be writing features and you are not already the way to start is finding the seeds for those on your trips is to capture the little moments. Then during your trip or after thinking about what really struck you. What was the pervasive message that you got throughout your trip that you really couldn’t shake?

For instance, I was in Detroit last year and we had gone with the idea that we heard Detroit had been revitalized, there was all this stuff going on, and it had become very hipster. We went there and we really didn’t feel like it was. We really didn’t feel like the hype about Detroit was true.  There were certainly some things, but we felt like they were in little pockets and we felt like they were all being run by people who had come to Detroit and they weren’t homegrown and coming out of Detroit. There was a friction between the two. That can be the kind of thing where I can go back and talk about different little pockets, and neat little hipster stores we had gone too and contrast that with what we walked through afterward. 

Then also weave in a couple conversations with people and there I have just a few scenes that point to the conclusion that I had realized. You can’t do these though until you have captured these vignettes on the road. Every time you have an exchange or you have a moment where you feel like you understand something about a place, you notice something, or you have the moment of tension where you thought it would be one way and it’s not you should write that down. Write down what you’re feeling, what you’re thinking, and what particularly is different than what you thought it would be versus what it is. If possible if there is anything about your surroundings that plays into that either takes pictures or notes so you can pull out of those later about what is striking you.

That is what I have in terms of different sections and now I want to get into my favorite hacks for doing research while on the road. I realize that I forgot to make a sign for my absolute favorite one. So, I am going to start with that one so I don’t forget. When I get to a place especially if it is a place that I haven’t been before or a neighborhood of an area that I haven’t been to I spend a certain number of hours or more getting lost on purpose. What I do here is I look at the map and I make myself an outline like a quadrant. I note the name of various major streets that are at the outline of my quadrant so that when I hit my quadrant I know. I will typically use this if I am going somewhere and I heard or seen something in my pre-research that there was a certain area that was quite hot or cool.

I think this is likely to come up with a lot of different businesses that might be interesting to profile, use in a roundup, or that might give me ideas for trends. What I will do is block out this little area and I will write down like on my phone or I will keep the picture open on google maps and I just wander around. I will try not to walk on that same street twice or walk in the same direction. I am just trying to cover as much territory as possible. That I found is really one of the best ways. I really like to do this one of the first evenings I arrive somewhere if I can. It is really one of the best ways when you are going like this. 

You are trying to go to a museum, store, looking for something specifically to just get a feel for the tone of a place and for the attitude. This really helps you to see what is there as oppose to finding something that you are looking for. I really recommend doing this at the beginning of your trip if you can, but particularly in areas that have been told you by a guide or blog post by doing your research. This is an area where there is a lot going on because that’s how you’re going to find those places that people haven’t already written about, the business that are newer, or just opened, and that are coming soon that are in those areas by wandering around on the sidewalk and going to those parts of the neighborhood that people aren’t telling you to go to.

Now another thing that I like to do at the beginning of my trip, early on, or even before is what I call the dossier. If I am going somewhere that I don’t already know. I want to essentially download all the basic information so I am not distracted by it when I am walking around.  This means culture things, historical, the names of neighborhoods, or characteristics of the different neighborhoods. There are two ways that make it very easy to do this that I like. Wiki travel has these travel things for different cities that are like a guide book but in a very cursory way. All the things that you need to know and understand. It will tell you the different neighborhoods, characteristic’s, major attractions, prices, to and from the airport, all this basic information so that you do not need to learn it. You will not have that crowding up your little idea antenna while you are on the road.

If you are going to be somewhere for some time and particularly if you are going to be looking for features I recommend going to a guide book. Reading in a guide book that first part that lengthy written section where they talk about the history, culture, and all these things. If you are going to be somewhere for a week or even 5 days I would consider finding those types of things and read a lot of it online. I would really recommend reading those things to give you a type of background in the factors that have made the destination what it is today. That will give you a basis to see what is different now which is from once derived trends and what’s new and things like that.

Another thing to do early in your trip and this goes back to Lauren’s question earlier about what are some basic tips about article research. Hang out like I said and you can do this using the CBB website, travel media, or PR web and see what is the new coming out of the destination right now in terms of tourism. But, then you don’t want to just know what it is but you want to figure out why. 

For instance, if you see that there are six new big brand hotels opening why is that? Was there a big investment six years ago? How has it translated into the restaurant scene? Is there a change? Are these hotels all in a certain neighborhood that didn’t get tourist and now a lot of people are staying there? Why is that? That is why I like to go and walk around and look at these things. Not necessarily because I am going to write about what’s in the press release, but because it is going to give me ideas of where to ask these questions and where to look for profiles and how to find the stories that are going to be news even if I don’t necessarily have those inside scoops. This is how you are going to be able to dig those up.

Now, this came up recently I think at our idea feast. I hear a lot of people say oh my god I go on this press trip and we are there all the time. It is like three or four days nonstop and we have no times for ourselves or they said there was going to be four hours for us to explore on our own and then they screwed up the schedule. Then we had to do this tour and then we had no chance for us to look for our own stories. This happens.

Press trip schedules are never what they say they are going to be. They change between when you get them, when you get there, they change when you go to sleep, and when you wake up the next morning. This is just the nature of the game and the earlier you realize that the less disappointed you will be on press trips in your life. But, there is a way around it. What I like to do is whenever I am on a press trip I make sure I have one day before and one day after that trip in that destination. Now some press trips you start somewhere and end up somewhere else and that is great because you get to see two destinations. 

This works particularly well when you could go back to places that you have been. What I do is that first day I use that day not only to get on the time zone, but to go through my dossier, do my getting lost walk, and get to know the place. Then when you are out on your press trip and out on all your tours you already know something about the destination, about what’s going on, about how things work and that allows you better interactions with the people that are leading your tours or the locals that you are going to run into. You will be able to speak to them on more their level as opposed to somebody who is just plopped there and is trying to figure out what is going on. 

On the last day, however, this is when anytime on your trip you did a tour or stopped somewhere interesting and they had to hustle you out. You couldn’t taste the wines from the winery or something like that. This is when you go back and do all the things that you would have liked to do the research on your press trip, but didn’t have time for. If you have a press trip that is a rambling or a one-way itinerary this could be a little hard. But, you will always find that there is always something maybe in the last city that you stopped in or that are an easy day trip. Hop on a bus, train, or rent a car and go back and check out. This can be the saving grace for if you are on a press trip and they just did not come up with anything interesting in terms of story. This could be the thing that allows you to still get some good juice out of the trip that you are on.

Now, this is another one that you can do at any time on your trip. This is one of my favorite secrets. We all have work that we need to do when we are on a trip. We write our blogs, we have to write stories that have already been commissioned about other destinations, and we have other things that we need to do. I try as much as possible not to do that work in my room. Sometimes you just must because you need to concentrate. I really try to go out as much as I can and work in a café if it is daytime or a hotel lobby if it is the evening to eves drop. 

I live in New York and people will say all sorts of things in cafes about the economics of our country that I learn in these cafes. In most destinations, you are going to be able to hear some things and the things that you hear are always going to be illuminating. You might hear about an interesting business. I was sitting at the café that I work out of in New York and I overheard someone talking about a farm that had this interesting investor model that their friend owned. It is right up near right where we have our retreat center. The thing is you will not get specific ideas for this, but it is really the best for coming up with trends. I really like to do this in both places in cafés and in hotel lobbies because in cafés you are going to get mostly locals and what they are interested in. In hotel lobbies, you are going to get mostly visitors. 

This is fascinating because you are going to hear why people came to the destination, what they are doing when they are there, and things that will inform you not just in terms of what you’re doing on your trip. But, what the average person, business traveler, or average tour group is doing in that destination. That is how you can see if the stuff that you’re doing is ahead of what people are doing or in line with what people are doing and that helps you know where to pitch these stories when you are home.

Now I am just going to go to the next slide for a second because it is related. I call this the barista weekend. While you are in these places like these cafes or these hotel lobbies chat with your server about what they like to do. Talk about the bars, cafes, and restaurants they like to go to and specifically about what they like to do on the weekends out of town because this is going to be the way that you find the interesting day trips from your destination. The people who do day trips especially the things that are newer or that have more interest as oppose to more attraction value are going to be the people that live there. If you talk to the people who live there specifically people who work in the hospitality industry in some way. They typically have an interesting line on what these day trips are and what interesting things are coming up. I find out about all sorts of festivals this way, pilgrimage walking roads, close small towns, so I highly recommend this.

Now I am going to go back to the magazine cheat sheet. You can find much more information about this on our blog. It is going to be our URL/pocket-idea-cheatsheet/ and the idea of the pocket magazine cheat sheet is that you want to put together before your trip different magazine sections that you would not just like not pitch but, that you can fit several article ideas that you can come up with generally while you are on your trip. What this means is that if you are a person who likes to check out proper English teas then you’re going to put the tea time magazine section which is a roundup of all the tea places in one city on your pocket magazine cheat sheet. If you’re somebody who likes to chat with locals then you’re going to put that geo snapshot that I mentioned on your cheat sheet.

The magazine cheat sheet is a way for you like I mentioned when we were talking about coming up with profiles and shorts it is a way for you as your out walking around to make sure those ideas are an “ah ha” there a yes. Like when we’re talking about the three stages of idea grief. The third one when you see an idea a know that’s a fit. The pocket magazine cheat sheet helps you do that by giving you a constant reminder to craft your ideas, to turn your eyes while you are out walking around specifically towards these types of things that fit in the format that the magazine is looking for. It is not just going to be that it’s short, but that the end root high-low I mentioned which focuses on a specific them and each them has to mention the expensive and cheap way to experience that theme.

Thank you all for joining us and if you have any questions or anything please go ahead and send them to questions@dreamoftravelwriting.com.

How To Earn Big With Travel Content Marketing Writing Transcript

Download (PDF, 281KB)

I can tell that a lot of you are super interested in content marketing writing. I have to say, to be honest, it does pay very well. Sometimes I think it’s easier to write for magazines, but a lot of you are super excited about this, so we’re going to have pretty much the whole month of webinars around travel content marketing writing this month. This, today, in this webinar, I’m going to talk about the different types of opportunities, and we’re going to look at some things that I’ve done, and some ones that I’ve pulled from the web that other people have done.

Then next week, we’re going to look at how to find these opportunities for yourself, because as you’ll see in this webinar, the ones that are advertised online are typically not the best pay rates that you’re going to find. In fact, often they’re going to be like a third of what you’ll find if you set it up yourself. The third webinar this month, we’re going to look at once you’ve found those gigs, how to go out pitching them. Then we’re going to wrap up with something based on some questions from you guys. I’m going to put together one more topic around one more content marketing, and then we’ll move on to something else next month.

I see Hilary already has a question in here about rates. That’s great, and I’ll address that as we go along. The thing is, about rates, and something that I had here in the webinar was “how to earn big with travel content marketing,” one of the things that I find working on the Travel Magazine Database, and pitching myself, and putting together the job listings every week for the Dream of Travel Writing Newsletter, is these things are all over the map. When I started my very first, or I guess one of my really early ongoing gigs that I had, was something that I was doing for Italy Magazine, which had a website that had news briefs every day and also some feature articles. I remember they came to me and they wanted $20 a post, but not just for the short ones. Also, for the long ones, even though they were 1,000 words and this is 200 words. That was sort of my first indication, and we’re going to look at this later on in the call, but people have no idea what they’re paying for. They really don’t know how much time goes into it, but we as writers really think about how much time we’re spending. I talk a lot about how we need to concentrate on our hourly rate, and how the rate per article or rate per post doesn’t actually matter. It’s only our hourly rate that matters.

I find, for instance, right now I’ve got a job lined up for some writers for our database, which is really very copywriting oriented. It’s not writing articles. You’re writing the information that will help people pitch magazine articles. A lot of people, even though I asked in the job listing for a per-post rate, and I gave a sample post, in fact, one that’s on the longer end of what we usually do, in order to get that per-post rate from people, people keep trying to get an hourly rate. I’m like, “Look, I’m a writer and I understand, but most people, most companies really don’t care what your hourly rate is. They care how much it costs them to get the thing that they need.” As we go about putting together our own pitches for these content marketing gigs later, that’s really something important to keep in mind, is that the person paying for something only wants to know what’s going to be the total cost for them to get the thing they want. It’s up to you to manage your time to make sure that you can produce for them what they want, in a number of hours that makes sense for you. That’s totally your job. That has nothing to do with the client, the person that’s paying for it. At the very end of this call, we’re going to look at what types of content marketing we should avoid for that reason.

Today, like I said, we’re going to do more of an overview of what sort of the scene is, so to say, and in line with Hilary’s question, I’m going to talk about rates, but as you know, people are notorious for not wanting to share what they’ve been paid for things, so I’m going to tell you about my own rates, because they’re hard to get from other people.

First of all, why do companies need us for this type of work, and what type of things do they actually need us for, as opposed to things that they might think that they can do on their own, like have an admin do it and it’s not worth assigning that out to a freelancer, or something that they might not really get that they need? Like you can try to sell them on it as many times as you want, and give them all sorts of numbers about ROI, but if they don’t think it’s important, they’re never going to pay for it. Then we’re going to look at a couple examples of things that I’ve done, and ones that I’ve pulled from the internet, of projects that other people have done.

I’ve pulled some things from the web, from coincidentally a lot of content marketing travel writers that I know, from various writers’ groups, along with some other folks, to show you the different varieties of things that are available, and also that will help you a little bit see, even though I don’t have rates from these people, you can see the size of the project, and that can help you see how lucrative this is, as opposed to just doing perhaps like one-off things for websites here and there. Then, at the end I’m going to talk about, like I said, which things pay well, and which ones really don’t. You should take care not to become known for any of these things, because you’re going to pigeon yourself into really low-paying work.

I have a magazine writing background, but for this case, I wanted to tell you about my background of content marketing gigs. I actually, when I first started travel writing, played around in magazines for a little bit, and I had some luck, but my husband has a full-time job, and he’s from a culture in India where the women also work, and it’s totally impossible to him to imagine me sort of being like the writer who is scrapping along. I’ve always had a mandate in my household that I have to earn an income equivalent to what I earned in my full-time job at MIT before I left to be a freelancer. I decided really early on that in order to hit my income goals, I needed to have money that was coming in every month, preferably paid in advance, that I knew was going to be there and that would cover my sort of base income needs, and that that was hard to do as a new magazine writer. Now, I have most of my income coming from magazines, because I have relationships with editors.

As a new writer, this was a really great way for me to very, very quickly get to $4,000 a month, for instance. There’s a blog post on our website where I talk about a time when I had a really bad accident and I couldn’t work for a couple of months, and then just in a period of a couple of weeks or a month, I not only put together a whole new slate of clients, but I actually doubled my income from what it had been before. You can definitely do this even if you haven’t been in the game for that long, and you can definitely do it quickly. It just takes knowing, like I said, who are the right people to work with, and who are not. Let’s start looking at that.

Why do companies and tourism boards need us, and what do they need us to do for them? I think there’s a word missing on there, but it’s cut off by my slide, so I’m not sure. In case you guys haven’t heard this statistic before, one in 11 people in the world work in the travel industry, or related sectors. That’s huge. I mean, just think about how many people are in the world that we often forget about, right? I live in New York City. I know there’s a couple of other people who live in cities here on the call today, and you’re walking around, and you see so many people, and you see the tall buildings, and you think, “My god. Do we really need a grocery store on every corner? But I guess we do, because so many people live here.” That’s just a drop in the bucket compared to all the people in the whole world, but really, like, nearly 10% of people work in the travel industry.

If you think about that, that’s a lot of companies that need to be making money to pay their employees. How do companies make money? They make money by selling things. How do they sell things? By people finding out they have a product, and becoming interested in it, and then buying it. That’s where the content marketing comes in, and the whole concept of content marketing, it’s a bit new for some people, and it’s a bit passe for others. It’s sort of funny. It’s like Snapchat, I guess. Some people have no idea what it is, and some people are like, “Oh, I’m totally over that.” You know, I am speaking at the World Food Travel Association Conference on something kind of related to content marketing, more brand storytelling, and the guy who runs the association said to me, “Oh, did you see this article saying content marketing is dead, and we need to stop flooding the internet with all of these articles?” I was like, “Well, okay. But then how do companies show they’re better than other companies?”

The thing is that there’s so much content marketing out there, which is really just showing people what your products and services are through various pieces of content, that the public doesn’t even really see, you know? There’s email newsletters. I find I spend like half my life writing email newsletters these days for myself, let alone other companies, but email newsletters are one of these things that if you don’t follow a company, you don’t know how many email newsletters they’re sending out, or what specific ones need to go out and things like that.

That’s an area where a small company, like a boutique travel concierge booking agency, or villa rentals or something like that, the owner of the company has a lot of other things to do that are quote-unquote “directly” related to producing income that they need to do, but they also know that they need to get their newsletter out in the same way that One King’s Lane, or I don’t subscribe to fashion ones, but there’s so many of these emails that go out just to remind people Anthropologie, J Crew, things like that. That “These products are there, and please buy them.” That’s a fundamental part of business, and it’s one that can be a little hard for us as we do our prospecting to find companies to pitch, to know about. But I’ve secretly found that almost all company owners would love to get this off their plate if they don’t already have somebody doing it. Remember that one for later.

Blog posts is something I’m sure you’re all super familiar with, and the thing is that I think we get really pigeonholed when we’re looking at opportunities to do blog posts for some big companies that have well-known blogs, and we forget that a lot of smaller companies, that can be a huge differentiation factor for them, to have some really solid information both about what they do and painting a picture about this sort of tour experience they offer, or destinations and things like that, can be a really huge selling point for them. There’s a lot of statistics out there that we’ll look at in future weeks when we talk about putting together our pitches. There’s a lot of statistics out there that show how, especially in travel, these sort of blog posts can make a huge impact on revenue, and that makes it a really easy sell when you go to company owners.

Social media posts. This is another one I know a lot of folks say for travel agents now, Pinterest is enormous. I personally don’t use Pinterest or care about Pinterest, even though I’m doing all the interior design for the retreat house, but I know that a lot of people say they get really good sales off of Pinterest. If you specialize in Pinterest, that can be a good thing to do, but I’m going to put a caveat on social media posts. We’re going to talk about the income potential there, so if you are really good on some type of social media, you might be better off thinking about how you can make that into a strategic offering rather than simply doing social media posts for people.

One of the things that we probably wouldn’t see as consumers are case studies and white papers. These are two things that companies often put together either to have on internal, or sometimes external documents, but to make a case for why their services exist, and why their company is better than other companies. Sales copy and product descriptions, those sort of things are really easy to find and really easy to see if they suck. One thing that is a good way to identify if somebody’s product descriptions suck is if you see the word “nestled” a lot. I apologize to anyone who is in my pitching class that’s recently sent me something with the word “nestled” in it, but please ban it from your vocabulary, along with “various.” I was talking with someone about “various” the other day. Don’t use that word. Find a specific detail.

Sales sheets. This is something that you guys might not be super familiar with. A sales sheet is essentially like a list of the things that a company sells, but with very short descriptions that a person who does sales for the company can use as sort of Cliff notes as they’re out there selling things. These are also the kind of things that company owners hate to put together, but they’re super necessary and sometimes they don’t even realize they need them, and that can be a good thing to pitch.

Event books. These are like after a conference, or like if a company has something for their clients, any client appreciation thing, it’s something that you can put together for them to send out to their clients after to boost goodwill. It’s not as sales-related, but it can be useful, and it’s related to custom magazines and brochures. These are crazy hot. I can not believe it. Every time I go to conferences, my husband hates me. Or rather I should say not conferences but trade shows. I come back with like bags and bags full of things, and now I can slyly say that I am bringing them back to the retreat house for travel writers to use to brainstorm their trips, and I think he sort of buys that, but you would never believe … Obviously we know about airline magazines, and I’m going to mention those again in a second, but Visit California has a beautiful magazine that you can find on newsstands in fact. I am constantly impressed with European places. The ones they have in English are really, really beautiful, and sometimes need to be rewritten, and so that can be a good thing to look into. People are putting together beautiful, hundreds of page long essentially magazines about their destinations, and they need people writing those. We’re going to look at some people who do that kind of work in a little bit.

I’m mentioning companies and tourism boards sort of interchangeably here, so I just want to sort of explain that for a second. If you … In fact I just saw, if you’re going to ITV Berlin, which is one of the two big travel trade shows in Europe, it’s in March, and we’re going to be doing a workshop there, if you’re going to ITV Berlin, the blogger speed dating is full, so I’m sorry if you missed that, but you should still do your blogger registration. Anytime you go to a trade show, you have a captive audience of both companies who do various types of travel services, so maybe they do concierge travel bookings. Maybe they’re a bike tour company. Maybe it’s a hotel company. Maybe it’s a PR company that supports hotel companies. Maybe it is a travel technology company that makes neat little mini digital magazines for hotels to stock on iPads in their rooms. There’s so, so, so many different companies that all need content.

The other thing that’s there in this captive audience is thousands of tourism boards. There’s tourism boards for like little tiny micro-destinations, little tiny cities, big cities, regions, coalitions of cities within a region, countries, groups of countries. There’s so many different tourism boards, and they all have these type of magazines I was talking about, the custom magazines that all have blogs. They all have these sell sheets they need to put together. They all do all sorts of email newsletters, not to consumers, but to travel agents and to people who book meetings, and different things like this.

These two sort of sectors, the travel companies and the tourism boards, are the two verticals, so to say, of people who buy a lot of travel content that we can write, that we like. There’s a lot of other things. I do a lot of work in the meetings industry because I have an events planning background. There’s also hotel, hospitality. There’s a lot of stuff there. There’s a lot of sort of adjacent types of travel things that are not always as interesting as working with a tourism board or a tour company, but if you have that background, it can be very lucrative, because not as many people want to work with them. These are the type of clients that we’re talking about for the purpose of this call, when we look at this type of work.

The average person who is either running a new venture or small venture, and sometimes even a large one, but they often have some processes built out, they are totally strapped for time, for comprehension, for getting their crap together. They are just always running behind, and anything you can do to make their life easier, as long as the benefit outweighs the cost, they will barely think about, and they will just say yes. This type of new person is a great one to go after. However, there is kind of a double-edged sword here. People who don’t really know very much about marketing tend to have some weird ideas, like I said. Content marketing to some people is passe, and to some people it’s like, “What is that?”

I read this really interesting quote in an article in a very mainstream outlet about marketing, in fact, that was specifically about travel content marketing. I thought it was funny that they’ll talk about content marketing all day for IBM and Accenture, and big tech companies like this, and then when it gets to travel, it’s kind of like their eyes glaze over and start rolling around in their head. They said a blogger doesn’t write comprehensive essay the way that a traditional journalist might, which I find a little offensive, being both. If you’re just a blogger, I’m sure you find it extra offensive. “But instead works at the dizzying speed of the internet.” They kind of have it in their head, like, we do all these things that they don’t understand, and we do them very quickly, and we just do lots and lots and lots of stuff. Like I said, we’re going to look at the end of the call about how you want to get away from being pigeonholed, to being the one that does lots of things, because having to do a high number of anything that requires individual effort on each one is going to make your hourly rate really take a huge dive.

Then they go on to say, “This is not the stuff of lofty travel writing.” I forgot to put in a slide on this, but how many of you, and just say like, “sure,” “yes,” over here in the chat box, how many of you know who Don George is? I’m very pleased to say that, like, I know him personally and I hope that he would call me a friend. He is sort of the father of modern travel writing in a way. He’s written Lonely Planet’s book on how to become a travel writer, which I think actually has a new edition coming out this year that I’m excited to check out and share with you guys. He runs the Book Passage Readers and Writers Conference. He edits all of the anthologies for Lonely Planet as well. He’s really, like, got his fingers in all these pies that are very editorial and very lofty, so to say. He used to be the travel editor for the San Francisco Chronicle. Even he has travel content marketing clients. I think it’s two now. He has two blogs that he edits for companies, and procures travel storytelling for them, but it’s corporate.

It’s very inaccurate to demean travel content marketing today by saying it’s not the stuff of lofty travel writing. Not just in this article, but even in your head. If you tell yourself that this is kind of the thing you’re doing on the side or until you make it and you start working with more magazines, that’s going to sort of keep you from putting your best efforts and ideas and enthusiasms into this, and it might make you end up with the type of clients that are not going to pay very well. The thing is, I have found that if you just stick to it, and you’re like, “No. I want to write about this specific thing. I want to write these type of articles.” You can find that client. Like I said, one in 11 people work in the travel industry or related industries. There are so, so, so, so, so many companies out there that need this content, so don’t give that up and take work, travel content marketing writing, that you think is sort of beneath you to pay the bills, because you don’t have to.

This is one of the things that I really want us to start thinking about next week when we look at finding companies, but I want you to start thinking about this week. You don’t have to take things that are just sort of like, oh, some copywriting gig that you do, or some company that you just write these boring blog posts for them, because A, you’re not going to produce your best work. B, you’re not going to be super happy doing it, and that’s going to make a drag on your creative energy that’s going to affect your other work. And C, these are actually opportunities to do really great writing work, and I’m going to talk about that when we get to the next section on examples.

I’ve just got a lot of interesting comments over here, so I want to share a couple of them with you. Kristen from Boston said a lot of companies are now hiring journalists, and paying them more to write content. This is totally true. This is happening for two reasons. A lot of journalists have been laid off circa like five, six years ago, and were sort of scrounging around for work, and they got gobbled up by a lot of companies. What I’ve noticed, though, is a lot of the times the journalists go full-time with companies. They end up hopping around a lot, because they’re not really a fit. They’re trained in this sort of old school journalism, and they have a lot of, like I just said, they have a lot of negative feelings like they’re just doing this for the money, and it doesn’t turn out with their best work. That’s why I mentioned Don, because what he’s doing with his blogs is really the ideal hybrid of good storytelling.

Another good example is Patagonia. Their magazine for ages has had travel stories, really great travel stories. I think they pay a dollar a word, publishing really big adventure writers. That is pre-internet, and has some really great examples. I’m just going to take a sip for one second.

I’ve got another comment over here that I wanted to share with you. Donna said that she was researching being a journalist versus a blogger, and this is a question that I get from a lot of people, about perceptions, and ideas. She was annoyed with what she had read. I think this is really kind of one my secret things, is that when I started doing this, I was able to find really great gigs that other bloggers weren’t finding, and I was able to get good rates, and I was able to do the work that I wanted to do because I didn’t settle, but also because I kind of refused to believe what everyone was telling me, because what I find a lot is that there’s a lot of companies out there that are open to doing different types of travel, and one of the things that we can do is to be really educational when we work with our clients. There’s a large element in some of the better paying types of travel marketing that we’re going to get to that’s about education. It’s about how storytelling can help them with their goals, and how the tenants of traditional journalism can be more effective than empty SEO copywriting.

I know somebody’s saying that I’m sort of ragging on old school journalists. I’m just talking about a couple of people who I know who have kind of hopped around to a lot of places. A lot of people have switched over from traditional journalism into content marketing really effectively, and I know that there’s a whole group on this around … We do Keller Williams’ course called Content Marketing for Journalists, and it’s because it’s a really comparable skillset. Like Donna’s question, I don’t think you have to think about it as either-or, because the skillsets are really the same, and especially if you’re able to keep yourself open to telling the types of stories that you want to tell, there’s really a lot of opportunities that exist, and that you can make for yourself to tell those stories that maybe you’re having a harder time finding a place for in journalism, or just that you prefer to do in a freelance setting rather than full-time in content marketing.

Alright. I want to look also, and I’ve mentioned a couple of these, but there’s some content marketing outlets that a lot of folks are familiar with. Viator, everybody and their mother seems to want to write for Viator, or has written for Viator. Their rates really aren’t that great, I’ll warn you, but they’re also sort of going through some changes, so that might change. They have lost their person, Katie, who was managing their writers for a very long time, and they’re filling that in, and they’re trying to figure out what their new content strategy is. Historically, they haven’t had great rates, but that might improve going forward.

Michelin, like this is one I think we all forget about. We think about Michelin Guide, as in for food, and we think about maybe Michelin Tires, if you have a car, but I think that we forget that they’re actually the same thing. The Michelin Guide has actually been around since 1900, and that’s kind of the original content marketing. It was just this great piece of collateral that this company decided to start putting together to get more attention to their brand. This is one of the instances of content marketing that’s really separate from what the brand does, like the connection is there, but it might be a little harder to see, right? They’re talking about driving, like doing road trips for great food, and so that supports the tire idea, but it’s really about the food, right?

Another one, Trivago, a lot of people have been telling me that they’re writing for. What do they sell? They sell commissions on hotels and flights and stuff like that. Another one that’s been around forever is World Nomads. They’re, like Matador Network, a website that has a really, really built-out blog, probably with tens of thousands of articles, about all sorts of things about travel, and how to travel, and personal stories, and what to look out for, and destination guides and things like that. What they sell is actually very different. World Nomads is a company that sells insurance, and Matador Network, I sort of heard from their PR person who’s also my PR person, and also their social media person, that the way that they actually make their money is by pitching to companies to do branded content for the companies. We’re going to talk in a little bit about these sort of clearing houses, who are people who are very happy to match you up to content marketing gigs, but there’s a cost involved, and it’s not just a cost in your pay cut. There’s another cost, and we’ll look at that.

Another type of content marketing that we all know very well and would love to be published in is airline magazines, and then also these destination magazines that I was talking about. The destination magazines are like a very clear connection to what the destination sells, but airline magazines are another one of these ones, like Michelin, where they’re a little sideways. It seems like it’s just a nice perk that the airline puts there for you to read when you’re not allowed to use your phone, but actually they’re trying to pitch you to go on more trips and to fly their airline.

With content marketing work, like I said, you’re going to have a steady income, as long as you set your contracts up right. This is one of the reasons why it’s really useful to set up your own contracts. You also have the opportunity, if you’re not ghostwriting, and I’ll get to ghostwriting in a minute, to amass a lot of clips very quickly, because you can set your contract up to do a certain number of things every month that you don’t have to pitch every time. The only thing that I think is often overlooked that can be really great, especially for new writers, is that having these ongoing gigs means that you have a writer who’s going to work with you every week, or a couple times a week, to improve your writing. People talk a lot about the benefits of mentors, and this is one thing about sort of the slow and painful death of old school journalism, as a lot of people call it, that I find really sad.

I didn’t work in a newspaper when I started, but I did work at a university, and I was a writer at a university, and I had editing duties and also writing duties. I learned both writing and editing underneath people who had been doing this at a very high level for 15 years, who were very karate kid style strict with making sure I didn’t reuse the same word at all in the same paragraph, if not the same document, and so on and so forth. Just these types of mentor relationships where people are constantly watching out for you and able to keep you improving over time are really, really valuable. If you are in a situation where you’re doing content marketing work with some place that has an in-house editor, that can be really great, but there’s a lot of times also, and these are the things that might not be better for people who are newer writers, where you will be also editing yourself, as well as doing the writing.

I’m going to talk later also about times when it’s better for you perhaps to go through a content marketing agency rather than do it yourself, but this is one of those things. If your writing could use polishing, if you would benefit from having some sort of editor mentor, this is one of those times where even if you want to do content marketing, you might be better off going through an agency rather than setting up the gig yourself, because then you’ll have somebody who’s got a relationship with you and is doing that sort of quality control.

Alright. There’s a lot of companies out there that are happy to connect you with these opportunities, and when I was doing my search to find some content marketing examples to share with you guys, I found ones I had never even heard of that are very, very tiny shops. It seems like they’re popping up in every city now, which is good if you want to work through them. It’s competition if you want to pitch individually. One that I’ve seen a lot of people have success with, I’ve had a weird experience with them, is Contently. They seem right now to be hiring people for Marriott’s Traveler content studio publications. Somebody in one of my Facebook groups just got a bunch of gigs there right around the new year. MasterCard also does a lot of stuff through them, in terms of destination guides.

But that was one that I had a weird experience with them, and this is one of the issues that you can have when you don’t set up your own contracts, but you’re at the mercy of these content marketing agencies. Is that we did this really long interview, we did all these back-and-forths, we pitched all these ideas. I set aside time in my calendar to get this project done, and then it never sort of never came to fruition, and then they put pause on it, or canceled it or something, and then said, “Oh, well we have this other thing that you can also do,” which was really not so interesting and not something I would have set aside time from my magazine writing to do. This can also happen obviously when you work to set up your own contracts, but when you do it on your own, it’s something that you can see coming further in the future, and you can manage as well.

The other thing, like I said, you’re going to sacrifice a bit of pay when you go this route, obviously, and how much that bit is, really depends dramatically. Sometimes that can be 50% or 60% of what the company is actually paying you. I say this because long, long ago, once upon a time, I did marketing writing for a staffing firm, which also had full-time hires, and I’ve seen how literally, like, it’s 60% to 75% sometimes, the difference between what the client is actually paying, and what the person gets. On the one hand, it’s horrifying, but on the other hand, I see all the people who are working in the company and working hard to bring in these jobs and do all that stuff. The caveat here is, if, and we’ll talk more about this next week, you don’t feel like you have the very commonly used word now, the “hustle,” or the “chutzpah,” or the balls or whatever to be cold emailing people and convincing them to hire you for something, then you might be better off paying some other trained salespeople to do it by going through one of these companies.

The other thing that you can sacrifice is good contract terms. We’ll talk a lot more about this in later weeks, but I am religious about making sure that my contracts are as friendly to me as humanly possible, both in terms of payment terms, and in terms of copyright and all those things. It’s really not that hard to do. There’s a lot of substitutions you can make. We have a post on the blog about freelance writing contracts that has a sort of “if this, than that.” If they want work for hire, instead ask them if they’ll take non-exclusive rights in perpetuity. The thing about contract terms is they’re always open to negotiation, and when they’re not, when somebody says they’re not open to negotiation, you will have a choice. You can choose not to work at that rate for those contract terms.

The other thing that you sacrifice when you go this route is the ability to choose editors you like to work with. To me, it’s really important in terms of maintaining my writing energy, and just my joy in life, and so on and so forth, to work with people that I like to work with. I always prioritize working with magazine editors and so on and so forth that I actually enjoy emailing, that crack jokes every now and then. But when you go through an agency, you’re at the mercy both of whoever within the agency they assign to you, as well as whoever on the other client side might get attached to this project.

There’s a couple of questions in here that I want to answer quickly, but we have a lot more to get through, so I don’t want to take too long. Yeah, Joe is saying that he had the same experience with Contently. He wrote the articles, submitted them, then the editor stopped replying. That’s horrible, and I think they have some sort of protection against that, if you submit it through their system as opposed to through email. That’s another good reason to be careful. I even only mention Contently because they’re much better than a lot of the other options out there, and I know Maya Tilly is here, and she does a lot more content marketing work, so if you have some other agencies that you like, drop them in the chat so I can share them with others.

For Contently, the way to get set up with them, if you’re looking at working with them, is I believe you just go online and set up an application, and then if it’s accepted, then you load the portfolio, and then they review your portfolio to match you up with gigs. I’ve also had them reach out to me separately, even though I had a portfolio there, just because they were looking for people in New York that could write a certain type of article, so it goes both ways. Brian wants me to share the article. I think he means the contract article. Tell me which one you mean, and I’ll send it out in next week’s newsletter, okay, Brian? Thanks.

Like I said, the best-paying opportunities are often the ones you create yourself. I just wanted to put a tiny, tiny thread in here on the topic of really, really, really bad, really, really bad content shops that you don’t want to get into. There’s this thing called BlogMutt that I found many, many years ago, and I’m amazed that it’s still going. I think they pay writers maybe $5 an article. Maybe it’s $3 an article, but here’s the thing. They have sold innumerable companies on the concept of having custom blog content written for them, four posts a month, for a plan of $79. Like, how could you not buy into that? If you’re one of these super time-strapped, you don’t really know how it works, people that I was talking about before, and you know that you need content but you don’t even know how to go about doing it, and somebody tells you they’re going to give it to you … Whoops, sorry. They’re going to give it to you for $79, that’s fantastic, right? Of course you would say yes to that.

This is one of the things that we need to look out for. Like I said, all of these content marketing shops are competing with us when we are going out and looking for our own gigs, so we need to make sure that the pricing, the package, the offer that we’re putting together is still going to be as attractive- particularly, it would be better if it was more attractive- than the ones that they have access to.

Alright. Let’s look at some real life examples of travel content marketing gigs your peers are out there getting paid for. I’m going to mention a couple that I’m not currently doing anymore, but that I’ve done in the past. I can’t tell you the names, because I have an NDA. This is one of the things that you’ll often end up, if you were doing ghostwriting, having to sign something saying that you will not disclose that you ghostwrite for those individuals, because they’re very concerned with making it seem like the content that has been written has been written by them. I happen to have a background in ghostwriting. When I was at MIT, I actually ghostwrote for the president of the university, and the chairman, and occasionally the provost and some deans. I had the luxury of having spent years being trained in a very well-respected named establishment in ghostwriting.

When I went out, that was pretty easy to sell. You know, “I’ve ghostwritten for the president of MIT. Would you like me to ghostwrite your blog?” But you don’t need to have that. The one thing I’ll say if you want to get into ghostwriting, is that it is different, and it’s a skill, and it involves a lot of listening and synthesizing, and getting to know somebody’s voice. If you feel like maybe because you have an editing background, or you’ve taught writing, or you’ve taught something similar, maybe come from screenwriting or something like that, that you have a good sense of voice, ghostwriting can be really good for you.

I had this background in ghostwriting. I also had a degree in Italian, and I had spent some time living there. Right off the bat, when I went out to set up some of these custom gigs for myself, I was like, “Okay. Who’s got a company?” I only looked at small ones, because I was new at this, at freelancing, and I wanted to find people who I thought were on my level. I said, “Who has a company doing travel planning for people going to Italy?” I said, “Okay, well I obviously want people who can pay, so I’m going to look at ones who do luxury travel.” At the time, and it’s changed a bit now, Travel and Leisure and Conde Nast both had these lists of travel specialists. I went to those two lists and I pulled out everybody listed for Italy, of the top Italian travel specialists, and I emailed them all. The funny thing is, they are competitors, and so it’s great that I have an NDA, because they don’t have to know that I write for their competitor, but it was really not the biggest research project in the world.

I’ve done other ones since, but this is a really great way to start, both if you’re doing ghostwriting, or if you’re just doing any other type of non-ghostwritten blog posts, or writing like that. It’s to take whatever area you know best, in terms of format, topics, blog posts, et cetera, and whatever area you know best in terms of travel style or geography, and just find who is doing that at a high level, that they are getting paid very well to do that sort of thing.

The first couple emails that I sent out about this, I had heard back from … I think maybe I sent them on a Monday, but maybe I sent them on a Tuesday. I had heard back from and signed half of them by Friday. One of them, I remember … I can’t remember what my initial quote to him was. We weren’t doing blog posts every day. It was like one or two a week, and he said, “We need it work-for-hire.” I said, “Well, basically that’s going to cost more.” He said, “How much?” And I said … I think I said, I don’t know, two grand or something for the month. He said, “Okay.” I was like, “Holy cow. That’s a really great rate.” It wasn’t long blog posts either. I think when I did the math, because it was different length blog posts and everything, it ended up being like $350 for a $500 blog post. These rates exist, and like I said, this was like the very first bunch of people I approached. I’ve done this with lots of other types of companies. I’ve had people tell me, “Oh, we can pay $35.” Then we end up getting it up to $150.

Obviously, you’re going to have a much better rate when you approach people who haven’t put a job ad up, and I mention that not just because they’ve already got other people coming to them, but if they’ve gone through the effort internally to put up a job ad, they’re thinking about their budget. You’re much better off catching people who haven’t thought about looking, because they don’t have an idea in their head yet about what this costs them. Like I said, education is a really big part of this whole content marketing game, and so when you’re able to educate a client on what it takes to create this for them, how many hours on your side, you need to get transcripts of their calls with their clients so that you can hear the types of questions that their clients ask them, and turn those into blog posts and things like that, you can really sell them up on what the appropriate price for you is, and get them to understand that value.

Okay. There’s a couple of questions. Joe asked, “Where do we find these clients before emailing them?” I just had like a very quick technique I had used, using the Travel and Leisure and Conde Nast list, but the whole webinar next week is going to be all about how to find these people. Do I have templates for the emails? I do, and I think there’s one already up on the blog, but if not, in the third webinar in this series on how to pitch these things we’re going to talk about them. Donna asked if I had specific training for content marketing. I have marketing training from being on the corporate side, and like I said, I have a lot of ghostwriting training, but I don’t have a certificate. I was actually, preparing for this call, I was reading something about the different content marketing certificates. I have to say, I’m not super convinced.

I’ve actually had some people applying for the job listing recently to write for the Travel Database that have a bucket of listings, and I’ve been very sort of off-put by two things. Their rates aren’t very high. Whoops. Why did they pay all this money for all of these certifications if they’re still not able to command high rates? B, why are they not following the instructions in the job ad. If they’ve gone through and done the certification, did they just get it because they watched enough videos, or did they actually have to be tested, or how does that go about? This is something I’m not super clear on, is those certifications, and if somebody knows more, I’d love to hear about that, and I’ll research this more for later calls.

One more question. “Is content marketing the same as blogging? Is copywriting also a part of content marketing?” In the replay, go back to one of the earlier slides. I had a big, long list of the different things that can be called content marketing. There’s also case studies, and social media posts, and product descriptions, all sort of things. Any piece of content that is part of the marketing of a product or service by a company goes in the content marketing.

We’re getting a little close to our time here, so I want to go through some of these other folks. I didn’t include names on here, because I don’t want you all to start Googling these people and emailing them and asking them what they’re doing, because I just pulled them off the internet, but I did some searches for travel content marketing writers, and like I said, I found actually a bunch of people that I know from different writing groups. I looked at, “What are some of the projects that people have been doing?” I really liked this one that I found, because it really goes back to what I was saying about the education element. The best-paying gigs often involve not just doing the writing, but doing the hand-holding with the editor, or in this case also the CEO, of what the company needs.

Whenever I do the blog type of content marketing, I always try to include and say that this is part of the fee, that I will be putting together the editorial calendar for the blog, and I will be working on it with them, and explain what goes into that, and the background that I have as a magazine editor, and having worked on a lot of different publications to do that. In this case, she says she advised them on branding, content marketing, social media topics, blog posts, and website setup. This is the thing, is that you can just do the writing of the blogs, but also have calls with their team every month, and divvy all of the tasks that you don’t want to do, but that they need to be doing, to other people on the team. I know some people who do social media. They do these sort of consulting roles where they don’t really actually write anything. They just talk to the people who work for the company and sort of pivot them and guide them along to do more best practices than what they’re doing on their own.

Another one that the same woman had done is for a startup, she did all of the travel content and consulted on the branding and the email campaigns. Like I said, when you can get in early, it’s great, because you have no constraints. You have nothing coming from the founder of the company that they have heard of this thing, and it’s great, and they really, really have been wanting for ages to do it, and now that you’re new, can you help them with it? Or, “Well, this is how we’ve always done it, so why can’t we keep doing it the same way, even if you show me the statistics that the way you’re saying is better?” When you can get in with somebody new, that’s really great, but the downside of working with people who don’t already have a blog or social media profiles or an email marketing service in place, is that you also have to walk them through choosing all the companies and doing the setup, which is one of those things that you might not want to get involved in.

Another thing, and we mentioned this earlier in the list of different types of content marketing you can do, another thing that happens when you do content marketing as opposed to just picking up assignments, is that you often have the opportunity to write the whole magazine. I had a client that I did this with for years. They had a sort of insert, I guess is the right word, but this little travel magazine that went out in all of the newspapers along the east coast every year, once a year. I wrote the whole thing for them, and the guy that owned the company and I would get together on a couple of phone calls every year, and we would talk about what was going to be in the articles, and I would write them, and it was very minimal editing, and that’s often one of the really great parts of creating your own content marketing clients. But like I said, if you need more editing, then that can be a good reason to go through an agency.

For that gig, I think I got 75 cents or a dollar a word. That was just this little tiny content shop somewhere in Pennsylvania, who does a number of these every year. I should have asked him, like, what other ones I could help him out with, and I didn’t, and that was kind of stupid, but it was a really, really great rate, and a lot of those are out there. This one woman I found, she seems to specialize in these. She does these 84-page brochures where she talks to the company about what’s going to go in there, and she does the research with the people that need to appear in the pages to get information for them, and then she writes the whole thing, and she does that also for some cruise companies. I really love this, because like I was saying, Patagonia for instance, their catalog that displays their clothes has some really, really lovely travel stories. These brochures can be a good place to combine the content marketing type of writing that’s more copywriting, like project brochures, and also getting in these neat little stories that you’d love to write and you’re not quite sure who to write them for.

Another thing that can happen is, aside from writing a whole magazine, you might find yourself writing an entire website. I found a woman who specializes in that, and I really want to draw your attention on this one to a couple of things. There’s some things that she mentioned where she overhauled an existing website, but then there’s also ones where she talked about setting up a new WordPress site and helping them find the theme, and also setting up the analytics. If you have a background with your own blog that you know how to do these things, that can be a huge time savings for a company to do all this setup for them, to already know what are the right plugins that they need, and those things like that.

The other one I want to draw your attention to is on the bottom, she said she took a tour of a place, and then the client entrusted her to do the site map and fresh content for their venue site. This is a really great way, actually, to find gigs. If you are traveling either independently, or you’re on a tour, keep an eye out at the places that you’re visiting, and after you’ve written about them, so after you’ve written on your blog or in magazine articles or whatever, go back and ask them if there’s anything that they need help with from a content perspective. I’ve seen people do this also on interviews a lot, where they’ll interview someone and then after the interview, the person might circle back and ask them if they’re available to do some writing. These places that you’re researching for other stories can also be really great sources of this type of content marketing.

Another thing that I think is really cool is writing travel-related stories for not travel-related websites. This is another girl that I know, and she … I guess woman, sorry, not girl. She’s done some really cool travel-related pieces for Ancestry.com. You know, when you think about that, that makes a lot of sense, because a lot of people these days take these ancestry trips where they want to go find their relatives in Italy, or Ireland, or what have you. This is one of the neat places where you can find some interesting work that not a lot of people are looking at, because it’s not technically travel.

Like I mentioned earlier, tourism boards can be a really great source of ongoing work, but also big projects. I think this is the same woman from the previous slide, but she said that in her early content writing days, she worked consistently for My Destination Malta, and wrote much of the content for the website, including the entire Towns and Villages section, and travel articles, and profiles of a business. One of the benefits of content marketing that I mentioned earlier is the ability to get a lot of clips quickly, and so if you were to work on a project like this, not only would you have a nice chunk of income for the month, and walk away having a great general portfolio piece, but you’ve also got different types of articles here. She’s got ordinary travel articles. She’s got destination pieces, and she’s also got profiles. This is a great reason also to take these full website or full brochure projects on, because it can be a lot of work in the short term, which is good money-wise, but it’s going to also give you a lot of nice clips in the short-term.

This same writer, who is somebody that I know, she’s also written for a lot of these places, like I said, that are travel-adjacent in different ways. She’s written for some visitors’ bureaus, but she’s also written for the Office of Hawaiian Affairs, which is a government agency that you could say kind of has a travel angle, but you have to go in and look at their website and help find it. She’s also written for VisitTheUSA.com. She’s written for a bicycle tour company. She’s written for a museum. This is a good sample of a good … How to look at your local area and saturate it, how to figure out without traveling to new places, just the companies that are near you who could need content, is to look at the different attractions around you and if their websites seem to be updated.

We’re getting to the end of our time, so I want to get to the last topic, but if you have any other questions, throw them in the … Oh, I have a couple more that have come up, so let me answer them quickly. “Do tourism boards pay well?” Bonnie asks. This is a great question, and I’m not sure if you were on the beginning of the call, but I mentioned that rates can be really all over the place. That’s why it’s often good to find people who aren’t looking, and educate them, and then once they are sold on working with you, to offer a rate. I have a friend who is a documentarian, and he has recently started doing documentaries for big companies, and he has this really great way of approaching clients called “story selling.” I’m going to borrow some of his slides and talk to you about that when we talk about how to put together your pitch.

The idea is that you paint a picture for the client about what their future is going to look like, so you go to the tourism board and you get them to envision … I did this with Luxembourg once. You get them to envision what it would be like to have somebody spend a couple weeks traveling around the country collecting a ton of content, and then put together for them a whole series of blog posts with associated social media updates for the whole year, that they have ready to schedule and send out. Then they think about that, and they think about what it would look like, and they think about sharing it with people, and they think about the buzz that it would create, and they get sold on that story. They get sold on that vision of the future that includes you, and so then when you tell them your rate, it’s very hard for them to say no.

Tourism boards that are large can pay very, very well. The small ones, for instance, I’m not saying that they’re super small, but I was doing an interview with … I think it was Cedar Rapids, but it might have been Grand Rapids, and I’m embarrassed that I can’t remember, but it was a while ago. I was interviewing the CVB, and they were telling me about how they’re doing a lot of videos, and how they ended up hiring somebody in-house because they were paying like 80 grand for a three-minute video. Obviously, video is a bit more expensive, but this is an indication, you know? They’re also doing a new video every month, so if you think maybe they’re spending, say, 30 to 80 grand every month on just video, what they might be spending on other things. They’ve decided that video is a priority. Tourism boards definitely have marketing budgets. In fact, that’s one of the biggest things that they have a budget for, so they can be a really great outlet, also, for that reason. Because they have thought about how important marketing is to them, in a way that some of the other types of companies that we’ve talked about might not have quantified quite so well.

“Do CVBs and government agencies not choose to hire big PR companies to do their marketing?” You know, I would actually say that large corporations tend to hire agencies to do their marketing. The issue with working with a government agency is that if it’s the federal government, you’ll need to be registered in their system, and there’s a couple of steps to doing that, and it’s not the end of the world, but you’ll just need to be registered, and then you’ll be in the small pool of people who are registered and able to do this type of work, of which there is a lot. I have a friend who works for the … I think it’s called the GA, the General Administration, so he’s like a staff writer for the government, and you wouldn’t believe the type of stuff he does. There’s so many writing opportunities for the government. But like I said, with the CVBs, it really varies. It varies with size, and if you have yourself set up as an LLC, that can make this whole thing a lot easier with the government agencies and CVBs for sure, but the biggest thing for them is the liability, so that’s why it’s best to set yourself up as an LLC if you’re going to do content marketing.

Two more questions quickly. “Do you pitch a story to their websites, or do you pitch what you can do for them?” In these cases, we never want to pitch an individual thing. We want to pitch a package, and we want to pitch ongoing work. We’re not talking about just pitching a blog post. We’re talking about pitching them that we will do four blog posts for them a month, or three blog posts for them a week, and here’s why, and here’s why we’re going to overhaul their content strategy, and here’s why we know more than they do about what’s working right now, because we have our own blogs that are large, and we’re tuned into the scene, and we’re going to share that knowledge with them. All right. Let’s circle back. I’ll get to your question after, Hilary. Let’s circle back for one second so we can get through the content for folks who need to go, to which travel content marketing opportunities pay well, and which ones you should avoid.

Low-paying content marketing work. I talked about social media posts. This is really a tricky area, because a lot of people need these written, but it can take you a lot of time for not great rates. If you’re going to do social media posts, I really recommend pitching it in the price range and with the expectation of more of a strategic position, because then you’ll be able to command a much better monthly retainer. Likewise, writing short blog posts, things that are 250 words, 150 words, which you shouldn’t use 150 words for SEO purposes anyway, but shorter things like that are a big drain on your time, because something that’s 1500 words needs as much research as something that’s 500 words, and so to do that research, you’d be much better off doing a longer post. You should always try to sell, if you are convincing people to do a blogging contract with you, you should always try to get them to be at a 500 word or maybe 300, 350 word post absolute minimum for their short posts, and there’s a lot of resources out there about the SEO benefits, especially today, about longer posts, that you can show them those statistics.

Photo editing for social media. This is another one that can be really, really tough. If somebody wants you to use your own photos for social media, and they’re sort of paying you a per-post rate to put them up on Instagram and Pinterest, that’s not going to work out very well in your favor. You’re much better off if you can get access to a library of images that they have from professional photographers that are already edited, that you can schedule for their Instagram or Pinterest, but like I said, anything involving social media, you really want to pitch it as a strategic contract rather than just an executionary contract.

Similar to these “we don’t want to write short things” missives that I said above, is writing descriptions of hotels, and condo rentals, and tours, where there’s like a very short part that you’re writing, and then a bunch of other sections that you need to research and fill in the details, like the length, or the number of miles that the tour is, or the number of sites that you see, and the name of each site, and double check to make sure it’s spelled correctly. Those sort of things end up taking a lot of time and minutia, and don’t have that much writing, and don’t pay very well per-post, so your hourly rate can go really down.

I had a contract once for something like this, though, that did make sense. It was … I want to say it was 40 pounds a post, when the pound was strong, so it was more like … I think it ended up being like $75 or $100 US. I can’t remember how many pounds it was. It sounded low in pounds. It worked out okay in dollars, and it was only 150 words. There was a little bit of looking up things that I had to do, but it was mostly writing, and they were giving me the things to put together. In that case, even though I was writing something very short, it made sense, but when you’re doing more research than writing, that’s when the rate’s not always great.

A quick story about clients who give you new rates now and promise to raise them later. “Avoid them” is something I could tell you, but it’s so easy to get sort of emotionally involved with a client, especially if you really like the vision that they’ve created. I have had multiple people that I worked with say, even if we’ve worked together for years, like, “Oh, I can’t raise the rates this year, but I’ll give you a bonus,” or something like this. Or they send me a present. It’s really weird. I don’t know why. Sometimes people send you like a physical present instead of giving you a bonus, and they could have just given you a bonus. But what I’ve seen, and I’ve heard this from a lot of other folks, is that the people who don’t understand your full value, and understand that you need to be paid for it, are never going to understand that.

Something that happened to me was that I had worked with this person, ghostwriting her blog for years, and we did a lot of different stuff together. I also ghostwrote guest posts for her. I don’t think I did her email newsletter. She was actually a pretty good writer, but it came time that she wanted to launch her first course. We worked a lot on the strategy, as in when she had started the idea of the course, she had no idea who her audience was, and she really needed a lot of help. I spent a lot of hours with her both on the phone and over email, rewriting what the course was going to be about, and so then I sent her like, “I can’t just be paid to write the workbooks that go with the course. We need to include something about the strategic time. Even then, these workbooks are 20 pages, and here’s what that costs.” And she totally balked.

She had worked with me on this for all this time, and I knew that she was not the best with rates, but she was increasing them over time, and I was trusting her, and she totally balked about the rates, and it ended up being the end of our relationship. It’s best to sever those things, or not get involved with them, as early as you can, because otherwise that’s when you run the risk of having a lot of bills that are outstanding that don’t get paid, or having somebody try to get you to redo their whole blog, and then you work on it in different phases, and at the end they balk on the price, different things like that.

Okay. Content marketing work that does pay well. Content strategy. This is when you do either an overall, all of their content that’s going out, when their emails should be sent, when their blog posts should go up, how often they should run contests, how you integrate the social media with the blog. You can also do it on the smaller level of just figuring out what types of blog posts they should put up when, by looking in their Google Analytics, or also just by looking at the open rates on their emails, or by listening to the questions that they’re getting from their clients, different things like that. There’s different levels for the content strategy that you can do. You can do it in a very overarching way, but then that becomes onerous time-wise, and if the company people are not the best at providing you with things you need, that can also put you in a difficult situation, because you can’t deliver on what you promised. If you can do it in a way where you are strategizing things that you are executing, that you know will work out, I think that’s best, because then you don’t have to become over-involved with the company.

Likewise, with social media strategy. You can do, as I mentioned, this other woman that I know who has calls once a week with the team, and she advises them what to add or subtract, or how to change what they’re doing in terms of the wording, or timing, to have the posts have a better reach, or you can do it where you are doing all the posts for them, but you’re charging them a rate that includes having calls with them to discuss the strategy, researching the analytics and new trends, and really doesn’t pay you a per-post rate for each Tweet or Facebook post that you do.

Ghostwriting pays wonderfully. The rates that I said for those blog posts, like I said, were the ones that I got when I just started doing this. I know people who get paid $1,000 plus to ghostwrite things that are less than 1,000 words, so that can really work out very well for you, but it’s a skill that you need to have and respect as a different skill than just blog writing. White papers also pay very well, and they’re one of these things that, like full-site rewrites, are big projects, or at least medium term projects. Anytime you’re getting into something like that where you’re also having a management element, like I was talking about the woman who does the full 84-page brochures, that’s when you’re going to start getting into these good rate territories, even if you’re doing the same type of writing that might not always have a great rate per-post. If you’re doing a full brochure that has some short descriptions, it would suck if you just had to write, you know, 200 of those at $10 a description, but if you’re getting paid $10,000 over the course of three months to put the whole thing together, that’s a different story.

Another thing, like I was talking about Don George does, is these destination stories that are used in a content marketing setting. That’s really big, because anything that involves the concept of storytelling puts you ahead of in-house copywriters. That’s really what you need to sort of sell as the distinction with content marketing, that we are not just providing the words. We’re thinking about how they land with our clients’ customers, and how successful they are, and optimizing for that. That’s the difference between just the content creation and the content marketing angle.

I’m going to skip the quick anecdote about VAs because we’re past our time, so if you have to run, thank you so much for your time. If you have any questions you can reach me at questions@dreamoftravelwriting.com, and I jump over and answer some of these questions from the chat box.

Hilary says, “I’ve found that many of the larger CVBs actually outsource their marketing.” For that, this is related to I think Joe’s question about, “Don’t most CVBs and government agencies outsource to PR companies?” In these cases, there’s two types of outsourcing. If you were on the call earlier, we were talking about these content marketing companies, and what happens is when CVBs are quote-unquote “outsourcing” their marketing texts and brochures, sometimes they’re outsourcing it just to like a person who is a freelancer just like you, but they are hiring other freelancers, they’re subcontracting to get that work done. Like I said, if you are set up as an LLC, then you are one of these companies that can be outsourced to. The size of the project and the CVB really dictates the type of person that it’s outsourced to.

If you are working with “I Heart New York,” in fact I’m a little annoyed with them. They just hired a new PR company that’s not very effective, but if you are “I Heart New York,” that’s a really, really big contract that is going to be under different digital marketing agencies, and PR agencies, and things like that. As a freelancer, you would be put in a situation like we were talking about with Contently, that you’re going to need to go through somebody else who’s interfacing with your client for you. Even though it might sound nice to work for I Heart New York, that might be best avoided. However, like I mentioned earlier, Visit California has a really lovely publication that they put together that’s similar to an airline magazine.

In these cases, where it’s something of the nature of a magazine that’s put together, that’s going to be outsourced to a publishing company. Sometimes they call themselves content companies, but usually publishing companies, and they’re going to have editors just like any other magazine, and you’ll pitch them … Sometimes you’ll pitch them, as Lena was asking, sometimes you pitch an individual story, but often you can pitch them with what’s called a letter of introduction, which is more of a, “This is who I am, and here’s my background, and here’s why I think I could help you with what you’re doing.” Then if the editor likes you, then they assign you a package of articles similar to what I was talking about when I said I was doing that newspaper insert that appeared in all the newspapers up and down the east coast. That was the kind of thing where it was run by a small publishing house, but I was still able to get all of the writing work.

Okay. One more question. “Can I get more detail about the government agencies and how to get set up working with them?” I can’t give a ton of detail, because I’m not set up for it. I’m pretty sure that Carol Tice, on her blog, has written about that pretty extensively, so if you Google search for Carol Tice on Make a Living Writing and “government agencies,” you should be able to find it, but if I remember correctly, there’s a couple different paperwork things that you need to submit from a financial level, and also from your clips, and I think they need to call some of your references, but it’s pretty well-documented on the internet, so if you just look that up, you can find it. Like I said, that’s for the federal government. That’s not the same way that it works when you want to work with a local CVB.

Remember these people that I was talking about in Cedar Rapids, I believe, who do the video? They’re not set up in the federal government system. You don’t have to go through the same way of doing bids to work with them. They are looking for people that they know, and that they like, and they see do good work. Working with your local tourism boards means that you don’t need to worry about that, and also this government requisition thing that we’re talking about is in the US. In other countries, I’ve worked with tourism boards like Luxembourg and things like that, who don’t have similar systems. Another thing to consider is that tourism board is a catch-all word for a couple different types of things. Often, what we as travelers think of as the tourism board is actually a non-profit that’s separate from the government. Sometimes it is a a chamber of commerce, which is a governmental entity, and sometimes it is a sort of third party thing called a DMO, or a destination marketing organization. That is a for-profit company.

There’s actually these three different types of companies that constitute the larger bucket of tourism boards, and they all work in different ways. The government ones can be a little bit more difficult to work with, but there’s many fewer of them. A lot of them are non-profits that are funded by various types of taxes and things, but they’re actually set up as a non-profit and they can work with freelancers even if they don’t have an LLC, and the same is true with a DMO. Whether or not you need an LLC really comes down more to the internal setup in the tourism board. Sometimes it’s just a blanket policy that they have, that they don’t want to do a 1099. As in, they don’t want to hire you as a person. They only want to hire you as a company, and that really comes down to how they have their own taxes set up. Like I said, that’s a very, very case by case thing.

I’m really happy Hilary Brown has said she has been Googling, I assume, whatever her subject areas are, and she’s brought up a bunch of great things. I hope that you all take this with you and start to, as you’re hanging out on Facebook, and on the internet, and maybe researching your own trips or conferences that you’re going to, starting to notice where some of these opportunities might be.

Again, if you have any questions, let me know at questions@dreamoftravelwriting.com, and I hope you all have a really great night. Bye bye.

Don’t Create Ideas Out Of Nowhere Transcript

Download (PDF, 274KB)

Thank you all for joining us today. We’re going to be talking about how to create ideas when you need them because they don’t really come from nowhere. Good ideas, in fact almost all ideas that really are salable to magazines are based on something and we’re going to look at different ways to find them.

So today we’re going to be talking specifically about this concept of becoming an idea machine, right, we’re talking about idea generation today. This is really very close to my heart because, it’s honestly the biggest issue that I see people struggling with in their travel writing careers. Whether they come from a journalism background and they just feel like their ideas for travel aren’t quite right, like they know how to generate ideas in other sectors, but they’re not sure what’s a good travel idea. I’m not sure if she’s on the call today, but there was someone in our Pitchapalooza class who has a science writing background, oh there she is Marilyn, and was saying you know, “I tend to be so detail oriented and I stick to the facts and things like that, and that’s not really how it works in travel” but in fact, it is. I think that once you understand really what ways there are to come up with ideas for travel articles and how to use them, then that can really push past a lot of different things that hold people up.

Then we’re going to talk about three ways to generate new ideas from the past content of a magazine that you’re looking to pitch. Then we’ll look for ways to create ideas from other pre-existing sources, so not necessarily the magazine you’re looking at pitching, but other magazines, conversations that you overhear, things like that.

You know I’m going to get to this in a future slide, but ideas are really the lifeblood of this job and so for myself, I’ve been a magazine editor, I’ve worked as the primary news gatherer for an online magazine about Italy and I’ve worked as the contributing editor, so I had to write several articles a month for all sorts of different magazines. The way that I do that successfully is by showing editors that I just have ideas whenever they need them, all sorts of ideas, they can pick and choose which one they like best, but I always have more. That’s something really key to succeeding as a travel writer, whether you’re writing for blogs.

The same is true with people that I’ve written for their blogs on a regular basis. You know, I had one site that I wrote to for several years and she would come to me and say “Hey we’re doing this new thing. Do you have any ideas?” and I would send her ten. That way I always got to be the one leading the charge on all of the new series and things like that, because I always had ideas to give her.

Before we get started about talking about specific tactics, I want to just circle back for a second on what I was touching on just now when I was talking about my own background, about why is it so important for us to come up with ideas, right? Isn’t what we’re selling actually the words that we’re typing, and not the kernel that then becomes that longer article? When I was doing some research to see if there were some idea generating tactics that I didn’t already know about for this call, I was reading some things by Carol Tice. She has a blog called Make a Living Writing and she also runs the Freelance Writing Den, and she has a journalism background that’s very interesting.

She didn’t go to journalism school, in fact, I don’t think she even graduated from college, I think maybe not even high school. She’s very self-taught. She really started out working in newsrooms and so she got on on-the-job training on how to be a journalist and she’s been very successful and in fact she’s a regular writer for Forbes Entrepreneur. What she said on the topic of idea generation is that “If you’re not developing article ideas, you’re just not serious about earning well as a writer.” I think that’s so true because I think most of the time that I talk to people who aren’t very happy with their income, or who feel like they’re stuck or they’re stalling out, and I say “What are you pitching or who are you pitching or how are you pitching?” The things that I hear or the ideas that they ask me to work on with them or the queries they ask me to look at, tend to be the same ideas, not even a whole trip or something, but just the same idea rehashed and not sliced into different ways, or not matched better to the magazine. They get really stuck on what they think is an idea without coming up with lots of ideas.

Here’s the issue with not having lots of ideas. There are two really dreaded idea snafus that I want to bring up. So the first one, I’ve seen both of these happen many many times, but I’m going to give you some specific examples. So the first one is when the editor gets back to you and says, a good rejection right, the kind of rejection we all want to get. The rejection where they don’t just reject your article, but they give you a chance to pitch them more things, they give you more information to help you better fit your pitch. So then you know it could be that they’ve already got something similar, that they’ve covered the topic too recently, and then at the end they say can you send me some other ideas? We talked about this a lot at the idea-fest and even at the Pitchapalooza, and in the workshop that I gave recently in DC, but a lot of times I talk to people who have said they’ve gotten a lot of rejections, but they’re good rejections. They were rejections where the editor asked them to send them more ideas and then they don’t send more ideas. If this has happened to you in the past, put it in the chat box, only I see it, not everybody can see it. I just want to know how pervasive this issue is. How many times has an editor said no to you, but said something akin to, but send us more pitches? Tell me if you’ve actually sent them more pitches. Because even I’m guilty of this.

I remember when I was first starting to pitch a lot of magazines and I was just pitching big national newsstand magazines, you know because why not? I was pitching destination weddings and honeymoons, I was pitching you know every day with Rachel Ray, I was pitching all these big magazines. I cannot tell you like how many of those editors got back to me, even just on the first email, to say no for a valid reason and to ask for more pitches. I was really surprised because these were very very large magazines. So let me see over here, it looks like that just happened to somebody very recently, somebody said yes and no, that’s happened a few times, I probably follow a path a few times and the other ones I just don’t, I have definitely dropped the ball in this area. You know it’s not anything to feel bad about. It quite honestly happens to everybody, but the way to get around this, is the techniques we’re going to talk about later, but also a little bit of fear.

I think that we tend to, when you get rejected, just psychologically you’re put in a very vulnerable place. So then the idea of coming up with more ideas, that also might get rejected, feels very hard. So you get this you know sort of sense in your stomach, this sense of dread that these ideas have to be perfect because this is going to be my last chance. And because they didn’t like that last idea, so how can I make sure they like my next idea? You get a little bit of anxiety about it. You know, to that point, what I say is that you don’t, not only just that this idea not have to perfect, but if you continue to give them ideas of the caliber of the first idea that caused the editor to write to you and ask for more ideas, they’re not just going to stop responding to your emails because they clearly liked something about you. They also know that it’s not always the next idea or even the one after that. Sometimes it’s the fourth or fifth idea that finally makes it through. The people that get published in big big magazines, I’m talking like Smithsonian, Travel & Leisure, sort of big magazines, aren’t just the ones that are the best writers or even the ones with the best ideas. They’re the ones that just keep pitching and don’t feel bad about sending more ideas.

I’ve used this example a couple of different times. I like it because it was the first sort of major, or you know like dollar a word sort of newsstand assignment I got. I had gone on a trip to Turkey and we unexpectedly had the opportunity to visit this tea plantation and also to go to where they take the tea and they dry it and they ferment it, then to see it packaged. So I really saw tea from plant to tea bag and I thought “my God this is like I’ve got to do something with this story” and I didn’t know where to start and I looked up tea magazines. I found one that was a newsstand magazine that focused on tea and I checked and they had a section that was travel oriented. They often did it as a round-up, but there were a couple instances in the past where they had gone to plantations in India and China and done a first-person story. So I pitched and the first time I pitched to the editor@ email address and I heard nothing. This is also a great story about why to never pitch to the editor@ email address. Then I got a hold of the editor-in-chief’s direct email and I sent it to her and she wrote me back in like a number of minutes, you know very very quickly. She essentially said you know this sounds great but it’s just not a fit for our audience, it’s just too exotic. Then I immediately turned around, not that day or that afternoon, but maybe the next afternoon, and I found out it was the anniversary of the Boston Tea Party and I pitched her a standard round-up on Boston. She had already assigned it. So now I’m on my second rejection, right? But again, like the first rejection was maybe something a little outside of what she would cover. The second rejection was good enough that they already assigned the article. So I pitched her another one and that one got assigned. So you never know and it’s not like you have to be rejected differently each time or something like that. It really is a function that everyone in this business knows, that you just keep working at it until you find the right fit.

The other idea conundrum that we can get into that’s very sad, and again, pop into the chat box and let me know if this has happened to you. Have you had a magazine that you really wanted to pitch an idea to, and you sat on it and you sat on it, and you didn’t send it and then one day you open up the magazine and you see that idea there? I had this happen to me with AFAR, and as you may have heard me say before, there’s various reasons you know to pitch or not to pitch AFAR. Yeah I see some people in the chat box say this has totally happened to them. When I had this happen to me with AFAR—oh no, it just happened last week to somebody—well, pitch that idea somewhere else, because that means it’s a good idea. I had this happen with AFAR around Indian food. So AFAR has this section called feast, which some of you may be familiar with, which includes sort of some background and a recipe about a particular type of food. My husband is from India and I go there quite frequently so I wanted to pitch something around Indian food, because they want it to be something that you have a connection to, but it has to be outside the US or mostly outside of the US. So I had been wanting to and I had been kind of sitting on it and I might have even had it drafted and one day I opened up AFAR, at the airport on the way to India in fact, and there was this big huge extra-long street feast column about street food in Bombay and I was just kicking myself. And like, as several of you have said, it really hurts right? It sucks because you think oh well I should’ve pitched that idea, but here’s the thing. I get questions a lot, usually in live workshops that we’re doing, about idea stealing.

I think there’s become this fear, this kind of pervasive thing that you’re afraid that an editor will just take your idea and use it without having you write it by having somebody else write it. I have a story about that that goes with another slide that we’ll talk about later. I think what people often don’t realize, what we’re going to talk about later on the call, is that ideas, like there’s no new ideas is an expression that people say all the time, but I think a more apt way of saying it is that an idea is just a kernel, and the actual resulting article can be all sorts of different things. But that idea, that starting point, it’s very easy for a lot of people to have the same idea.

For instance, I was in California a little while back in Silicon Valley, which is actually where I’m from and my husband also has a lot of family there because you know the stereotype, he’s Indian and everyone works in computers so they all work at Google, it’s actually true. And so, I was there and just in conversations with friends of ours that were you know recent transplants to the Bay area overheard or had tons of conversations about housing prices. It’s like Trump today. It was the only thing on anybody’s minds, the only thing anybody could talk about. If they didn’t have a personal story, they had a story from a friend or they had just managed to buy a house doing something amazing, or they couldn’t buy a house no matter what they did. It was all anybody was talking about. And then I went to stay at the home of a friend of mine who was kind of a struggling journalist, not travel, I guess I would call her a bit more of a generalist and she had moved from New York where she was a broadcast journalist to California for her husband’s job, and she was just struggling to find you know her footing with freelancing and things like that. She had got an assignment on exactly this, on the difficulty of the housing market, with Courts, which is a sort of general interest online news network. And she was complaining that the editor had sent it back to her for rewrites several times and we were working on her piece.

The thing is that she was clinging so tightly to her version of this idea about the issues with the housing prices and so, to show her that the idea could be written a totally different way, more in line with what the editor was looking for, I just took these conversations that I had had with other friends, and some other statistics that I knew from growing up there, and I wrote her article. The exact same ideas, the same points, everything, but with completely different interviews, completely different facts, but making the same point. To show her that you can still do the same idea, but with a totally different take on it, like what the editor was looking for. And so when you have this, “oh that was my idea” sadness, it totally sucks, but the thing is that, anybody could have had that idea and done it. The editor could have had that idea and assigned it to somebody or whatever, but what actually matters is the execution. So we’re going to look at how you can take an idea that already exists in another magazine and execute it a little bit differently even for the same magazine, if not for a different magazine.

Alright so let’s move on and look at three ways to generate article ideas from a magazine. So I’m using the term magazine-first here as opposed to idea-first because this is kind of how I classify different ways of generating article ideas. So either you have gone on a trip and you have seen a neat restaurant where they’re doing something innovative and then you think “ok I have to find a place to write an article about this” and that’s idea-first. So that means that you’ve thought of something and now you’re trying to find a home for it. The flip side of that is if you for instance, in your sort of back pocket magazine idea file, know AFAR has a section called One Great Block, which I’m not actually too sure that they have anymore, so don’t go too crazy with this, but if you know that they have a section called One Great Block where they take a neighborhood in an international city and it doesn’t have to be something too big or important in terms of the city, but it’s typically not in the US, and it’s a block that has an interesting mix of shops and restaurants and cafes, and things like that. On the same street where you’ve seen this restaurant, you’ve seen several other things because you have in your head the idea of AFAR’s One Great Block, you’re now going magazine-first because you know that AFAR has this column, so you’re looking at your trips through the lens of what that magazine looks like. So if you have any questions about magazine-first versus idea-first, I know I talk about it pretty often, but drop those in the chat box so I can clarify as we go forward.

Here are three types of magazine-first ideas. Now this is my favorite for two reasons. Fill-in-the-City we’ve called it, ok? These are some of the easiest ones to start working on if you are not really familiar with shaping your ideas. So if for instance, you have heard from me or from editors, or you’re just not getting responses to your pitches. Like you’re not getting a negative response, you’re just not getting any response. It probably means that your ideas aren’t being fit snugly into what the magazine is looking for. So a very common anecdote or antidote, I always have trouble with those two words. A very common antidote for that issue, is to start writing your pitches based very specifically on the formats that magazines use so that you get used to the types of articles that magazines are looking for.

This one about fill-in-the-city is one of the absolute easiest because you don’t even need to think too hard about the article idea. You just look at everywhere you’ve been in the last year and check if the magazine has covered it and pitch it. Then when you write up the piece, all you have to do is follow the rubric for that story. In this case I have two airline magazines that I want to show you that have, each of them, three different fill-in-the-city article sections. The ones that I’m giving you here are very specifically you know things to do in a particular city. The one that I mentioned earlier, AFAR’s One Great Block is another example. It’s not necessarily billed as a city guide, but it does end up being a city guide. There’s also very often in the front of the book, in the beginning of the magazine, a lot of these short sections that are essentially based in the same fill-in-the-city concept. I know a lot of the other major magazines, whether airlines, American Way, or Travel & Leisure have sections particularly in their food area that are essentially about the transformation of a city’s food scene. So, it’s fill-in-the-city because you’re choosing Baltimore. But then you might be talking about the growth of the urban bee culture in Baltimore or something like that.

In this case, if we look at B Inspired, which is the Brussels Airway magazine, they’ve got three of varying lengths here. So the first one is going to be specifically about, and I’m going to close my chat box for a second so I can read these. This first one is going to be specifically about a town in Belgium. So in this case, it’s a very simple exercise of “hey I went to Belgium. Let me look at this magazine. Have they in the past covered these cities that I’ve gone to? No? Great! Let me just pitch them the city and exactly the things that I cover in this section.” Done. Very easy pitch. Very easy idea.

The next one is a bit more onerous. It’s called “Barrio”, which is a bit funny for Brussels Airways, but there you have it. So this one is more of a standard city guide. It’s listing bars, restaurants, museums, shops, and a little bit about each of those.

The third one that Brussels Airways has, “The Big City Guide” as they call it, it’s a travel story in first-person. So it’s essentially, if you look at these, these are really good examples of the three different types of fill-in-the-city articles that you’re generally going to see. One is more about why to go to a certain place now and little bit about what you do there. The next one is a very standard third-person city guide, more of a round-up style. The last one is a first-person, with some sidebars where you’re talking about a particular trip that you’ve been on.

Now I want to look also at Delta because Delta has as well, and they’re so long and interesting, I tried to slam them into this slide and I apologize if they’re hard to read. Delta also has some very standard fill-in-the-city type things here, but they’re a bit different than the ones that Brussels Airways has so I want to show you these.

The first one is very very short and it’s in their front of book section, which is called “Wheels Up” and it’s called “Trending”. If you notice, the ones that they have on here are sort of not traditional city guide cities in a way. Like Mexico City perhaps, but it’s a bit having a renaissance. Oakland is a very sort of newly hip and worth traveling to and no longer dangerous city. Ottawa is getting a lot of revitalization in part because of anniversaries and some other things, but this is the kind of thing where you’re doing a short front of book thing that is specifically about why you should travel to a city right now because it has improved. Something has changed, because there’s a new reason to go and to go before everyone else goes.

Now the next one is a column that a lot of you might be familiar with. There’s another version of this that is you know, the “Three Perfect Days” in United or “48 hours in” in The Independent. This is more of the itinerary style fill-in-the-city article. In this case, in Delta’s “1 City 5 Ways” they take one city and then they talk about five different ways to experience it for different types of travelers. So it could be a foodie, a historian, the family traveler, the multi-generational traveler, the girlfriend getaway, you know something like that. For this, you know it’s useful whenever you’re doing the fill-in-the-city pieces to check the types of cities that they’ve done in the past. So as opposed to the “Trending” one that we looked at earlier, where they’re doing less standard tourist cities, in “1 City 5 Ways” they tend to do bigger cities.

Then the last one that they have in Delta is something that I’m seeing more and more of. So this is also going to be a third-person reported feature, but it’s a really deep dive into one city’s culture. This is becoming a lot more common, especially in the airline magazines I’m seeing these. But also more generally, where they are really giving credence to the experiential travel boom right now and showing people not just sort of how to experience the city as a local, but offering visitors the opportunity to understand the landscape like a local would. So in this case, they’ve got typically three out of four different sections that they focus on. So either it’s a Q&A with the city’s governor, or I think that’s supposed to be mayor. A Q&A with the mayor, a business focus, a travel focus, or a sports focus. So again, you know I’ve shown the types of cities that they’ve mentioned here and they’re pretty big, but they’re not necessarily the same as like a Rio or a Seoul.

So the second way that you can take something that’s already in a magazine and create new ideas right on top of that is a technique I like to call “just like blank, but with blank” and so what this means is that you look at an article that has been done previously and you can this is sort of similar to what we’re talking about with the city ones, but you can use it on all sorts of different articles. So say you’re looking at a trending front of book section and I’ll go back to that example I used earlier about the bee culture in Baltimore. In that case, they’re looking at urban agriculture which is you know cultivating bees in a city that you think of as very not grungy, but industrial. So then what we can do is go “what’s another city that’s rather industrial that has an unexpected urban farming movement?” Then we might go to Atlanta or to, it’s funny that I’m having a bad time coming up with industrial cities, or somewhere in India where there’s a lot of pollution or something like that. Take a different type of urban farming. Rather than bees it might be goats. People are suddenly keeping goats in their back yards in some of these cities. Now we have you know an idea that’s just as interesting as the other one, but has a different protagonist. So you can even go back and sell that to the very same magazine. Now this technique, “just like blank, but with blank” works really well with features. The thing about features is that a good feature article idea you can boil down what the article is about in just one sentence or less, but it should have a noun and a verb. So I pulled these out of the database and so they’re not necessarily going to be set up in the way that the writer would have pitched this article idea to their editor.

For instance, let’s look at this third one here about how Leonard Casley has declared his farm a principality and grown it into a tourist attraction, right? So that’s kind of cool. Then we can say noun has declared his something a principality or you know an otherwise autonomous legal area and turned it into a tourist attraction. What else can we do with that? You know there’s the obvious example of Christiania in I believe it was Amsterdam or Copenhagen which is a zone a sort of or this is a bit more hippy style, but declared itself an autonomous area and has become a tourist attraction. You know you can, I recently read about a city in Italy and I couldn’t believe I didn’t know about this, that had some time back also declared itself its own kingdom or its own country and the Italian government doesn’t recognize that, but they have proceeded for hundreds of years you know electing a new king or their own president or what have you and then it was talking about how you can visit as a tourist.

Let’s look at another one here because you can really apply this formula to pretty much any feature that you find. So another one here, the next one is about how or let’s go down below that “Walking by Water” so about the writer’s experience of a four day bushwalking expedition through islands off the coast of Tasmania. Like I wouldn’t necessarily think of a walking pilgrimage trekking sort of story by skipping across islands. What a cool idea. So we can take this and turn it into you know a walking excursion in the San Juan Islands of Seattle and how you can do, not Seattle, of Washington and how you can do all of those different islands on foot. You can turn that into, I’m trying to think of some other islands that are close together, for instance, in the Maldives, there’s all these different islands and you have to either take a boat or a water plane to get between them.  There are some in the south that you can actually walk between them and then you could take a little boat to get to the next one. So you can do a walking trip through the Maldives. It’s very unexpected when you apply it to these other things. So this is one of the great things about the “just like blank, but with blank” is that it forces you to look at things that you typically only envision in a certain way as a new article idea.

For instance, the first time I go to a destination, you know whether it’s a country or a big city or whatever I typically think of that trip as my familiarization trip, whether someone else is paying for it or not. To me that’s like the get-to-know-the-area trip. Then I’ll go home and I’ll think about it and then I’ll pitch some other stories in advance of another trip that are now focused around the background knowledge that I have of that destination. This “just like blank, but with blank” especially when you use it for features is a great way to come up with these ideas. If you know you’re going somewhere, for instance I’m going to Israel for TBEX and I’ve been there in the past and I know a lot about Israel. I could look at this, I could go through some magazines that I want to pitch, and I could look at the type of features that they’ve done in the past and I could say “Hmm could I do something with this urban farming in Tel Aviv?” And then I could just do a little Googling and see if there’s something that fits in. Or I can do something about you know walking. Walking in an island area, what about the Dead Sea? Could I do something about walking the Dead Sea? Something like that. So this is a really great technique for pitching in advance before your trips, but it can also help you if you’ve already gone on a trip and you’re trying to figure out what to do with your trip to better organize those interesting experiences that you had, or the people that you met, or business that you’re looking to profile but you’re not quite sure what to do with yet.

The last one of our way of generating ideas from magazines is “the story behind the story” and I really love this one because it’s very universally applicable. You can pick up a magazine and pretty much every article, ask yourself why did they include this article? What is interesting about this? What did they not say in this article that’s also interesting? Is there you know a person that they mentioned who deserves a full profile? Or a business that they mentioned in the round-up of a city guide that on its own is doing something very interesting and should have a full feature dedicated to it? So this is the case where you can pitch something that was previously mentioned in a magazine back to a magazine, but in a more full blown format and say hey I know you mentioned blah blah blah, but there’s actually a great story in there about how the founder had cancer and decided to do something different with his life and then moved to this area and then recovered from cancer through the amazing cuisine in Okinawa and then became part of a center there educating tourists about the cuisine and I’d like to do a story on that. So that was a totally made up example just now about somebody I actually have read about recently, but it’s a good look at how you can take something and as I mentioned this is good for pre-trip research like the previous one. You can take something that has a little inkling in an article and do some digging and see what else is there and expand that into a much bigger story. These do work very well as business profiles or people profiles, but they can also work really good with trends.

It might be that you see one of these shorter front of book trending 250 word city guides about, I’m going to go back to the Baltimore bee keeping example, and you can say “Oh well that’s interesting” and then take it two ways. What other types of unexpected urban food programs or revitalization programs are going on in Baltimore or what other cities have a program like this? Then you can take that trend and expand it either of those two ways into a larger investigation into a larger story.

The one caveat here though is the covered-too-recently issue though. So this is one of the things that I see people get with some frequency from editors and I think it chalks up to this idea that we might think “oh well I know the editor did a story on blah blah blah but my story is different because of blah blah blah”. For the editor, they just can’t. They can’t be covering the same places too often if they are a national or international magazine because they have a geographical mandate. What to do in this case is to make sure that when you do a story behind a story, that first of all, you’re pitching things that were covered not yesterday, but like a few months back, and then the timeline of magazine publishing will help you out there because by the time your article actually comes out, another six months or a year will have gone by. Also, that you’re really making sure that you’re only drafting off of the original story and you’re not writing something that’s too similar. So that means that you read this as a short, you’re going to make it into a feature that’s more a person profile as opposed to a location profile.

Or you know if it was previously more of a person profile, then you’re going to turn it into more of a destination piece. So you want to really make sure that you’re flipping the type of story as well when you do this in order to avoid issues with the editor saying “well we’ve already covered something too similar”. To go back to what we were talking about common idea snafus earlier, this technique of the story behind the story is really great when you get that email from the editor, like what else have you got? Because that’s when you’re nervous and you’re scrounging and you’re not sure what they cover and you can certainly go back and do a fill-in-the-city or a just like this, but with that. But if you’re nervous about coming up with the right idea that the editor will certainly like, then this can be a little nerve racking.

So the story behind the story is really great because you can go back and know that they found x, y, z interesting in the past so that they will find it interesting in the future. Like I said it’s not a big deal if you get a rejection the second time, as long as you’re still showing the editor that you have good idea. So if you pitch them something and they say “oh wow that sounds like a really great story, but we covered it too recently”, you’re going to be getting a second good rejection. You’re also going to be getting more useful information, which is that this magazine won’t cover Africa, a specific country in Africa or a specific city in Africa more than once every five years or something like that. That will help you shape your next pitches. Alright, so let me know if you have any questions on this. I want to move on to coming up with ideas more out of thin air as opposed to a specific magazine that you’re looking to pitch.

Alright, so one of the techniques I really like for this is called “National to Local”. You’ll notice that a lot of these techniques sound a little bit similar, but it’s really a function of when we’re creating these ideas out of “nowhere” they’re not coming out of nowhere because they’re based on something. So all of these ideas are going to be based on different things. But in this case, national to local, what this means is that you’re taking something that is playing out on a national or international level and applying it in a very localized way. So this doesn’t mean you know (I’m going to time travel a little bit because now Brooklyn has become a thing everywhere) this doesn’t mean going back to the genesis of Third Wave coffee, and saying oh look we have our first Third Wave coffee bar and blah blah blah place, you know now we’re finally cool and hip. People definitely are writing those articles, but that’s not necessarily what I’m talking about here. So when I say this is great for trends, what I mean is that you want to be able to find something that’s not necessarily just a trend coming to your local area first, but you want to show something more complex. You want to show how it’s playing out. You want to show the effect of the trend, rather than simply that it has arrived. And this is also good for current events, as well as trends.

For instance, something that I’ve been batting around in my head for a couple weeks now, is that I was at a big writing conference, probably the biggest writing conference in the US, and there was like 40,000 people or something like that. And I could not believe that almost every single session, every single keynote, every single everything, was about Trump. If not entirely about Trump, there was a very large section about Trump and specifically, people were talking about this malaise that was essentially keeping them from writing. Or they were talking about how perhaps an agent was saying how, their writers don’t want to work on the books that they’re currently writing and they all want to do something different. But essentially there was this whole wind of change that Trump had brought about in the writing world and I haven’t seen anybody write about that yet. If someone else wants to steal this and run with it, just let me know so I don’t pitch it. But I haven’t seen in Salon or in the writing magazines, anything like that yet, sort of a deep examination of how this cultural shift is affecting writers and what you can do about it.

That’s the kind of thing where you’re taking something that’s a national trend, but not necessarily specific to the area that you’re writing about and applying it on a local level. So in this case, you’ll see what I did as a “local level” was actually more of a local topic, rather than a more local geography. You can do that as well.

This is the kind of thing where, if you write about history travel, RV travel, food travel, but even more specifically food tours or something like that, you can take these national issues or these current events and apply them to your specific subsection within the travel industry. Just as you can apply these things to your specific geographic area. So this works correspondingly very well for more niche magazines whether it’s in size or geography, but you can also use these national to local things to frame the articles you are pitching to national magazines. So for instance, the one that I keep mentioning about Baltimore and the bee keeping, is the kind of thing where they found a national trend or something that was trending and becoming more common, in a specific city and they pitched it to a national magazine that has a section about specific cities. The national to local idea doesn’t necessarily only have to be used when you are writing for Blue Ridge Outdoors or Los Angeles Magazine or something like that. This is also something that you can use in national magazines as well.

The flip side of this is local to national and this is actually quite different than going from national to local. Because rather than taking a concept and applying it, we’re actually taking content and bubbling it up. So that’s the big difference between these two things. It’s that rather than taking a seed and a framework and looking for something to fill into that, as we do with national to local, here we’re finding good examples on a local level and then bubbling them up to national recognition. For instance, the one I mentioned previously about the bee keeping in Baltimore. If we were going to start with the bee keeping in Baltimore and then look at how we could do a local to national. Here’s how we would that. So say we found this bee keeping trend in Baltimore and we said wow that’s cool. I haven’t seen that anywhere else. I’m saying this as if it was really the beginning of the trend. Then what you would do is you would take some other places where this was starting to be seen, three is a good number for trends, and say Baltimore, Seattle, and Nashville, there’s starting to be the urban bee keeping trend and so you’ve taken one city as the kernel and you’ve put out feelers and grown it into a story that has more national impact.

Because of that, this works really well as a basket of kittens. For those of you that aren’t familiar, a basket of kittens is when you have one thing that’s just a fantastic idea, it’s very cool, it’s very shiny, it’s very interesting, it might be a restaurant with an entirely new service concept. For instance, when the dining in the dark restaurant came out or something like that. But you want to pitch this to a magazine that is national or international, so pitching something that is so geographically localized would not work for that editor because they need to be serving readers in many many different places. So then you go out and find, if not other dining in the dark restaurants in other places, you go find other restaurants that are very similar in terms of doing something quite unheard of that affects the sensory experience of the restaurant. So you might include a place where you only eat with your hands, you might include this restaurant which I think is in Japan, where there is a full choreographed experience of light and sound that goes along with you meal. Then you might include a place where in addition to eating your food, they also give you a sniff of something to go with each dish or something to show you how that affects the dishes and then places where you can have those, the little sort of drug thing crystals that affect your taste buds and make everything sour taste sweet. So then you would have a round-up or a feature article or something about a new trend in sense-enhancing or sense-altering dining, right? So a basket of kittens is when you have a bunch of things that are all interesting on their own and when you put them together, each of them shines, but the whole package is so great, it can’t be ignored.

We’re going to be finding these local to national things in local publications or just picking them up by word of mouth on a local level, you can start to feel like you’re stealing a story that somebody else has already written. Here’s the thing about that. As I mentioned in the beginning of the call about this journalist friend of mine in the San Francisco Bay area, and how I rewrote her entire story about housing prices and they’re affecting families in California, the story is going to be different depending on who writes it, depending on how it’s reported, depending on the examples you use and the people you interview. You’ll come up with different quotes, you’ll come up with different facts, you’ll come up with different examples.

A really interesting example of this, of a journalist thinking that there’s absolutely nothing wrong with this, is that, a few years back, it was maybe even four years back now, I got an email from a journalist from the Financial Times ok, so like nothing to shrug about. He had read either one blog post or several articles I had done on a trip to Turkey, in which we visited these places called yaylas, which are the summer residence of the semi-nomadic farmers in the mountains between Turkey and Georgia, where each family has a house just like in the village below, and it’s essentially like a duplicate of their house below and it’s where they go in the summer. I talked about how you can walk from one yayla to another and things like that. He wrote me and he didn’t even say like “oh I like your article. I want to do something similar, do you have any tips?” He said “can you tell me the name of your guide and give me their contact information and also tell me all of your places you stayed?”

So essentially, rather than just taking my idea and pitching an article about it, which he had done, he also came and asked me to give him all of my research. Now obviously I didn’t do it. I told him to do his own job, but this is my point. It’s that it’s not unusual for people to draft. It’s not unusual to get an idea one place and then go redo the trip yourself, or redo the interviews or something like that. So as much as it can feel icky and you certainly shouldn’t do like that guy did, it’s not even that it’s not uncommon. It’s both common and it’s even quite accepted with editors and so don’t feel this stealing feeling about it, unless you have specifically written somebody and asked them to hand over all of their research because that is in fact stealing.

A good way to do this local to national sort of transition, is that when you are traveling, particularly if you are traveling to places where there’s not a good bubbling up of stories from that area, whether it’s a place abroad where there’s not a lot of English language media or it’s just a small town or something like that. Pick up the local publications. You know now there’s Edibles all over the place. So even if you can’t physically pick them up, you can go online and check out the Edibles in these other areas. You can Google you know newspapers in x, y, z county and find some stories on there. There’s so many ways that you can get in touch with what the local journalists are covering and skim those, both for baskets of kittens, or to just go and re-research yourself, like with the yaylas and just write a bigger first-person feature story.

Alright, so we’re getting close on time, so the last one here on getting ideas out of nowhere is “Re-visiting Big Events.” This is a technique that I really love because it’s quite under-used, but it’s always effective. In a way this is a version of the anniversary idea, so ideas work best, pitches work best, when you have a very strong time peg. A time peg that I think a lot of people rely on is an anniversary. So you know, it’s the anniversary of a city and it’s a very big one. Like it’s their 350th or something like that and that’s a great reason for the editor to run that story. But the thing is that anniversaries on their own aren’t ideas. You can’t just write a story about how it’s the 350th anniversary of Quebec City or whatever, because that’s just history. That’s just a history lesson. That’s just getting on Wikipedia and rehashing things. That’s not something that an editor is going to bite on. But what you can do when you use “Revisiting a Big Event” is that now you have a built-in story. Rather than just saying this thing happened a long time ago, what you’re pitching becomes “I want to talk about what has changed since this big thing happened and how is it affecting x, y, z people”. So those people might be tourists, those people might be restaurants, those people might be the hotel industry, those people might be locals of a particular ethnic background. It can be all sorts of things. So you know not to play on tragedy, but a good one here for this transformation angle and recovery angle is terrorist attacks. Not because there are lot of them, but because it’s something that really sticks in peoples’ heads and they’re concerned about how people have recovered. Likewise with catastrophes, like earthquakes and tsunamis and things like that.

I did a piece on this a few years back about this portion of Emelio, not the recent earthquake in the mountains, but the portion of Italy that had had some very severe earthquakes and tens of thousands of people were living in tents, but it’s the area that produces all of the prosciutto and parmesan cheese, and balsamic vinegar. I had been covering it for Italy magazine when it happened, so I had a lot of information on just how devastating the damage had been. Then I went back a year later and checked in with people about how they had rebuilt their businesses, what interesting philanthropic initiatives had sprung up to help them survive and how tourists can contribute to that. So that’s the kind of idea about a recovery story that you can do and depending on the scale of the initial incident, that a bit informs when you should go back. For instance, you know if it’s something small, in a year you could have a good level of transformation to talk about. If it’s something very devastating, it would be between five years or even ten years. So another way to do this is to take something that’s new or that was new a period of time back, so one year, five years, ten years and talk about how that has changed things.

I know a lot of people have grown up in cities that are now completely different, whether they have become like you know where I’m from Silicon Valley has become this major tech area and cities have sprung up where there was nothing before. My husband had a similar incident in India. It can also be the reverse. It can be a town that was previously a depressed former mining town or former factory town and then a hotel opened and now that’s completely revitalized the neighborhood. So taking something that was new, but hasn’t been new for a little while, is hard to just write about that thing. But if you can say, five years ago, this thing opened and we’re going to show how it’s transformed downtown Beacon, New York on the Hudson Valley into 1.5 miles of antique shops that are all community owned that draw 10,000 tourists a month from New York City. So this is the way that you can take something that isn’t new enough to just talk about because it’s new, but use that to tell a greater story, one of transformation.

You can even do it with political things here, right? I think we’re rounding up here now on the one year anniversary of Brexit, of the Brexit vote. So you could come to London, and bop around and check out how that’s affected prices. You could talk to tourists on the street about if the lower prices motivated them to come here, talk to people who run businesses about if they think that they’re going to be able to sustain if Brexit continues, things like that.

Like I said, this is a way to use the concept of anniversaries, that has a built-in angle, that has a built-in story to tell, rather than just a simple time peg. These are the three ways to sort of create ideas, not necessarily out of specific magazine and pitch it back to that magazine, but kind of out of a greater cultural understanding.

The one thing that I want to say about whether you’re using this technique or whether you’re using the techniques to come up with ideas for a specific magazine from that magazine itself, is to not pitch multiple ideas to the same magazine at the same time. I’m not super sure why there’s a discrepancy and misunderstanding around this. I think it might be because when you’re pitching to websites, you can often pitch multiple ideas at the same time. But print editors do not like it. Don’t do it, unless you’ve been working with an editor for quite a while and this also goes for major online websites, as in not places that you might be applying through a job ad that has specifically asked for multiple ideas, but a website that pays writers that you’re applying to for the first time. Any time that you’re pitching a place that you don’t yet have an in with, you haven’t yet published there, you should only be sending one fully flushed out pitch per pitch email. What that means is that if you have multiple ideas for the same magazine, that’s great because as soon as you get that email from the editor that says “oh I like this idea but we’re already doing something similar. What else do you have for me?” You have a bunch left.

I think when we get an idea and we know it’s a good idea, we’re really tempted to sort of get it out the door right away, as soon as we know that it’s a fit, we dither for a while about writing it, but once we’ve hit that moment where we know it’s an idea we want to get it out. We want to get it assigned. So if you have multiple ideas for the same publication, it’s really tempting to try to get them all to the editor because you want to sell them. They’re ready. They’re all ready to go. But the thing that’s really great about having a bunch of ideas in reserve, is not just to have something ready when that editor asks you for more ideas, but also to have something ready when you don’t hear back from the editor at all, which is totally disheartening. But you need to be able to be mechanical about it. What I advise people whenever I do workshops is that you send somebody a pitch and then immediately go to your calendar and either one week or two weeks, whatever your preference, or how time-sensitive the idea is, you put a reminder to follow up and then in another one week or two weeks you put another reminder to follow up.

In that second reminder, you put the next article idea you’re going to pitch them. So what that means is that you’ve sent a pitch and in the next you know week or two, you say “hey I just want to check and see if you were interested in (and then put the title of your article idea and make sure that you’ve also pasted the original pitch below)” and then the next time you check in with them you say “hey it looks like you might not have space for (and then put the title of your previous article), so I wanted to send you a new pitch” and then you go right into your next pitch idea just like that. I have heard editors say either that they have assigned an idea only after getting two, three, four emails like this because they could see the person had a lot of ideas and they wanted to invest time in starting to work with that person. Or conversely, I’ve had writers say with quite a bit of frequency actually, that when they use this technique of immediately pitching a new idea and just very pleasantly saying it looks like you weren’t able to use that idea so let me get you a new one, the editor has assigned them the first idea. So showing an editor that you have a lot of ideas in this way, for the same magazine, does a lot to increase that editor’s confidence about working with you in general.

I just had one, oh ok somebody is saying “Thank you. I’m always torn about whether to send one or three.”

The one thing I will say though is if you have a bunch of ideas and you’re not quite sure what will fit, the only way that I would ever advise including extra ideas is; you’ve written your whole pitch, you start with your lede, you tell what idea you’re trying to pitch and how that would look as an article, you talk about yourself and why you are qualified to write this article, you say would you be interested in (the name of your article) for (the name of the magazine), and then, and I don’t like to do this because it can weaken your point. But you can say I also have features around blah blah and blah (and name three other interesting things that you’ve done recently) available to sell or something like this. Let me know if you would like full pitches on any of those. So this can work if the editor can’t use the idea that you’re pitching them and they’re not quite sure about responding to you, because then they can say “yeah I like that idea about the new beach culture in Northern Portugal. Tell me more about that.”

But I really advise using this with caution and only using it once you’ve got your pitches to a really good place because the whole idea of sending only one idea in that pitch, is to show the editor that you are confident that this is a good idea. And not wishy-washy and that you actually know the publication and you know it is the right idea to send them. So I would only advise, including this little kicker at the end of a couple different ideas, just in two or three words each. Don’t flush them out any further than that. Because if you’re experienced and that’s coming across in your tone, the editor will see that and they’ll know that you will send an equally fleshed out idea or equally fleshed out pitch for the next idea. But if not, it will just confound the waters for them and make them doubt whether you are really sort of solid in your idea. So, if you want to pitch multiple ideas, and if you’re a really solid pitcher, then you can certainly look at including that line at the end. But if you’re a little new, if you’re on slightly shakier ground, then I wouldn’t go about doing that.

I don’t want to keep you, especially after and I appreciate everybody joining us after I had mistakenly set the email for 3:30 in the morning. But I look forward to talking with you again next week.

Have a great evening everybody!

How To Generate Sure-Fire Salable Ideas Transcript

Download (PDF, 251KB)

Today we are going to be talking about how to generate sure-fire salable ideas for magazine articles. I know that we have talked a lot about in our other webinars, about different ways to break down your pitches or you trips in to pitches. Or different ways to write the perfect pitch and all of those things.

What I found, especially when I was first starting out, is that starting out my pitch thought process with what magazines are looking for, rather than what I have already done, I had a much-much higher success rate. If you read the blog post or the email newsletter about this call, you already heard a story that I am going to tell again during the call, and about why I think that is really great.

But, today what we are going to do is we are going to look, like I said, at why pitching magazines that idea can help us achieve better results. We are going to look at that in the context of what really is the purpose of a pitch in reality because its not really what you think. Also, what the different sections of what your pith should be and how if you start thinking of your article idea from the magazine itself you’ve already written most of your pitch. Before you even have to think of a specific article idea. Then we are going to quickly just look through the structure of the travel magian database. Because I know that is something some of you asked about. We will then will do some live demos on how to reverse engineer ideas to fit magazine sections. So, thanks so much to you guys that are putting magazines over here. We have so many magazines that I cant always remember which ones we have, but any ones that are in here I will at least look up. And if we don have them, I will add then to the list for the writers to add them to the list as well.

Alright so before we get started with looking at the magazines, I want to just talk quickly about what is the real purpose of a pitch. Because its not to g et an assignment. Here is a quite that I love and I use all of the time and if you have been on our other webinars or live workshop, you have probably seen it. But this is from Jordan Heller, who is the Editor in Chief of Hemispheres and also United Rhapsody magazine and Amtrak’s News and National which has replaced the previous Amtrak Arrive as their magazine. Which is a cool opportunity for a national level long form articles as well. He said “I once had a guy call me up; he gave me a one-word pitch. He said, ‘Macau.’ And that’s not really a pitch, is it? It’s not a narrative. It’s just a place.” You know, this is sort of an extreme example. But I love to remind you guys of it because I think we all get really in love with our articles ideas. As we’ve conceived them but those aren’t always publishable for any magazine and especially not this specific magazine you’re pitching. That is why I really want to focus on sort of restructuring your magazine article idea thought process. So that you are really grounding yourself, you’re training your eyes, you’re training your mind and senses to look for ideas that are publishable. We are going to look at three specific ways to do that later.

The main purpose of the pitch is actually not to get the assignment, its to start a conversation. So what this means is that while your pitch letter is pitching a specific idea, and I emphasize A as in one, as in you should never multiple pitch an editor that you have never worked with. That is a pet-peeve of a lot of editors, so it just seems a bit choice oriented one vs multiple. But its just something that across the board magazine editors don’t like to have multiple pitches from people they have already worked with. Because they want to see that you have given them what you think is your best idea for them. Which circles back to what I was going to say right now about the purpose of the pitches is to start a conversation about your ability to write for their magazine. So, sometimes the first article you pitch them- they accept. But the funny thing about that is that can often end up with you writing just one article for the magazine. Because you don’t feel confident that you completely understand the magazine or that you have a great report with the editor or all of these things because you didn’t have to work for it. You didn’t have to do some digging in conversation over email with the editor about what they are looking for and so you don’t have as much of a stick to them. So often what I like is I tell people that the purpose of your pitch is to try and get a ‘no’. Because when an editor says no, if they say no, as in if they respond as opposed to not responding at all. They often tell you why and if they don’t tell you why you can write them back and ask and more then often they will tell you. When they tell you they’re going to give you information that is going to help with your pitch. Ok?

The way that we start this very important conversation about what editors are actually looking for is to show the editor that we have good ideas in the first place. And what we mean by good ideas in this context is ideas that are actually publishable articles, as opposed to ‘Macau’, as opposed to ‘biking in the Rockies’. These are topics not article ideas, ok?

The second thing is to show the editor that you are professional. That is accomplished by following specific pitching formats, as well as by showing that you understand what a good idea is, ok? And the most, most, most important thing is to show the editor that you understand his or her publication. That’s where pitching idea first really comes into play. Because, our idea is inherently grounded in the magazine. So from the get-go our pitch is based from the idea that we know the magazine because we had to check out the magazine in order to write the pitch. You always want to pitch to get a response whether that is a ‘yes’ or ‘no’, and we do that by showing the editor that we are professionals. That we have good ideas and that we understand the publication. Because then they want to invest the time in helping you get it right, ok?

Now, lets just look super, super quickly and I’ve got a whole webinar on this if you haven’t seen it. Go check out our webinar on “How to craft the perfect pitch.” But, all pitches, all good pitches are composed of three things.

They are composed of an attention grabbing lead/lede. They are composed of a body that explains to the editor just as much as they need to know to ask you for more information. What you’re going to write in the smallest number of words possible (fewest number of words). So if it’s, you know, a one word sentence that is perfect. If it’s a topic, sort of your thesis and then a couple of experiences that you are going to include in the article-that’s great. If you’re going to do a round-up you’re going to say what the round-up is about, why it’s important and couple of places you are going to mention the round up, then the fact that you have visited there, ok? then the last part is the “I’m so great” paragraph which is why you are the one that should be writing this article for this magazine.

When we are writing the lead, this is something that I think a lot of people spend way too much, and I mean I know a lot of people spend way too much time on this. Because they think that they need to be artistic. But the thing is that when you pitch magazine first rather than an idea first, you’re lead can actually write itself from the previous copy in the magazine. So, if you are pitching a specific section of a specific magazine or even a feature, you can just look at the past editions of that same section you’re pitching and how the leads were formatted. Then you know what to wrote! So, if this magazine favors leads, this lead is the first paragraph or couple paragraphs or sentence depending on the length of the article. If this magazine favors leads for their features lets start in medias res, which means in the middle of a scene. That means that you’re going to powerful scene from your travel experience and start your pitch with a lead that is in medias res. If this magazine favors leads for its, like one thousand word profiled apartments, then start with a startling fact about the person or business being profiled and that is how you will start your pitch. So, when you’re pitching idea first and not only is it easier to get ideas but it is also much easier to write your leads, ok?

Now, the middle paragraph like I said should not be everything but the kitchen sink. It should be only the super gist that the editor needs to know in order to assign you the article. But this is also a prime opportunity for us to show the editor that we understand the magazine. So, what this means is if you’re pitching something that has a very specific format, it’s not up in the database but i’m probably going to pull it up and show you a little bit later. I have one of our new writers is working on a new entry for En Route, which is Canada’s magazine. Which I am super excited to share with you. They have a section called ‘High and Low’ in the beginning of their magazine and this takes one destination and looks at how you can do it on a splurge budget or bottom base budget. That is a very specific rubric and they have different activities that they include; they include a hotel. they include dining, they include activities. In the middle of your pitch, if you were to  be pitching that, you would say “And I will include…” and then you will list the things that you know that they include every single time. Because that not only shows that you  know what you’re going to write if you get the assignment but also that you have done homework about how the magazine formats a section.

Now the last part of the pitch s the about you, that “i’m so great” paragraph. This is the kind that, again, people can spend a lot of time dwelling on what is or actually isn’t important. The thing is that this is another thing that the magazine can tell you how to do it. Not every magazine can get away with this all of the time but a lot of magazines have, in the front; in the mast head a section where they feature a couple of the contributors and they have little bios about them. So, look at what the magazine has highlighted in the bios of the contributors that they featured. Those are the kind of biographical details that the magazine deems important. The editors like to know about people. So that tells you the kind of things you should include in your bio to show the editor that you’re the right person to write for their magazine.

Alright, the last thing that makes a great pitch; even though its kind of the first thing, in terms of the editors interaction with your pitch is a great headline. And the great headline should go in the subject line of your email. Again, one of the best ways to make a headline a headline that’s going to make the editor not only open your email, but think that you get their magazine is to write a headline like the magazine has as its headlines. So, you check out for the section that you’re writing. You know, perhaps it’s Delta has a section called “One City 5 Ways,” so perhaps you say “PITCH: One City Five Ways Soul.” That would be the eventual headline of your article, but you know that one is pretty simple because it’s just the name of a section. But there might be ones where, you know, some magazines like to have plays on words; so you make sure that the subject line of your email is a play on words. These are all things that you figure out if you start your pitch with the magazine.

Alright so we are going to dive into the database in a second. Please, please, please, chime in on the questions if you don’t see the database in my next window pop-up, when I swap over. Before we do that I just want to say we are going to look at three different ways to pitch idea first. I want to emphasize that you can use these techniques whether you, and I didn’t put on here ‘after a trip’, but you can use these techniques in advance of your trips to get assignments, which is really what they are great about. You can use it whether you already have an itinerary or whether you, like I already do this because I am partially nomadic and a lot of other nomads can do this as well. You know you’re thinking about going somewhere for a month and you’re sort of the in ‘information gathering’ phase. About what there is to do even in that section. You can use that sort of pitching to figure out ‘do I want to go to this part of the country? Well let me see what’s there and let me see if I can get an assignment. And if I get an assignment then I will go there.” You can also use it if you’re going to be on a press trip and you already have an itinerary. I just applied for one of the press trips for one of the upcoming TBEX conferences and they have this Darude, which is a type of- it’s a subset of a cuisine in Israel that I have had before in a restaurant here in New York. But I haven’t had it in Israel and they have a special cooking and foraging experience. Knowing that that is on the itinerary of this trip, I could pitch editors around that or pitch around another tour I know I am going to be taking or something like that.

The three ways that we are going to look at how to use this sort of reverse magazine-then-idea rather than idea-then-magazine technique is something that I like to call “The airport approach” and then we are going to look at ” The I want to pitch you” method; so this is where we are going to look at the magazines that you guys have said that you want to pitch. And then “loaded gun prep technique.”

The airport approach is the following: often people are going to a destination or have gone to a destination and they say they don’t know what magazines will take that and you know maybe they are thinking about hyper-regional magazines. Like, there are press trips for The New York Times travel show coming up and they’re all very regional destinations in sort of central and upstate New York. Even my first thought when I was writing in to the PR folks about where I was going to place the stories, I was thinking ‘Well New York Magazine, Hudson Valley Magazine?” I was immediately thinking about the regional magazines. But what we often forget is that even the very sort of out-of-the-way seeming places have these tiny, tiny airports that are often served by major airlines. We can go on the websites of the airlines and figure out which airlines fly to this tiny, tiny destination that we want to feature. We can then go pitch the airline magazines of that airline. Because, what happens with editors who have this mandate like airlines only cover a certain subset of destinations in the world. You also have that regional editors like the editor of 5280 which is Denver’s magazine; they do a lot of travel coverage. They have written about a lot of places to death! United has written about New York for every single issue for like seven years or something like this! They would be so excited to have some thing that fits in their mandate of the places that they are able to cover because the airline flies there or fits into the geographical area in which 5280 The Denver magazine is distributed to. But it is new, because they are not leaving their desks that often, especially if its an international magazine. They aren’t regularly flying every single airport served by their magazine. So by giving them these very out of the way things you’re actually doing them a favor.

Now “The I Want to Pitch You Method”: The thing about this is we often say (I think I am even guilty of this when I first started…I was definitely guilty of this when I first started) and I see this is a lot of your pitches. That you say ‘I want to pitch such-and-such magazine’ and then you just take an idea out of your idea file and give it to them without matching to a section. This is not the best way to break into your dream publications, the best way to break into your dream publications is to say ‘ok, my dream publication that I’m dying to write for has this very specific section and I’m just going to pitch that section to death until the editor knows who I am and either gives me an assignment for this section or gives another assignment.’ Literally that is the best way I have ever seen to break into magazines that you’re just dying to get into, is to just keep pitching highly focused ideas to get the editors attention and eventually they will say yes to one of them. Or they will get back to you and explain why they are saying no and then that will help you get a yes in the end.

Now, the other one that I personally love, I call “The Loaded Gun Prep Technique”: we talked about this about the live Pitchapalooza. I see that we’ve got some people on here that are going to be in the January correspondence course Pitchapalooza as well. So, what the loaded gun means is that you sort of carry around, in your pocket on your phone or in your head, a list of certain magazine sections that are very specific. So, I talked about in the live post and the newsletter for this webinar about how I pitched this tea magazine which has a very specific section where they profile four or five tea stores or places where you can have High Tea in a given city or area.

You know once I got that first article I sort of carried this around and when I got to a city where I noticed they had a certain concentration of tea places. I would say ‘ok there’s three are there five? Because, maybe I can put this together and pitch this to the editor.’ So with the loaded gun technique is, it means that you sort of collect a couple very specific sections and you have them with you when you travel. So this doesn’t necessarily mean that you’re doing it in advance but it can also help when you are making your own itinerary for a trip and you are looking around at what you might want to do. If you have in your head five, ten, fifteen, twenty sections of magazines that are very specific knowing that if you find something that fits them that you can pitch to this magazine and that can also help your trip planning a lot. I know several of you, I am trying to see who is on the call today, well not all of you but a decent portion of you have your own blogs. So you’re probably accustom for looking for things that fit into certain sections on your blog when you are planning trips. This would, for people like that, be a very easy thing to start working into your travel planning.

Alright guys, we are going to try and switch screens here, so bear with me. In the meantime, while I am doing that it says that we should include the nut graph in the pitch. So, for those of your who did’t know this is a question about the structure of the pitch and we do have a while other webinar just about how to write the perfect pitch. What the nut graph is- its essentially like the distilled version of the who-what-where-when-why. Its the called the nut because its kind of the kernel of your story. The nut graph is, the way that I’ve described it, its that middle paragraph. So we do need what is essentially the nut graph in travel articles its a little different. You don’t typically do it so quite as who-what-where-when-why oriented, but like I said you do need to say what you are going to do if its a round-up you need to mention one or two places.

Now you should now all be seeing the database. Before I go in to talking of the three styles that we were talking about before. I am just going to do a quick tour of the database, because I know some of you have asked for this and several of the folks do have database access and would probably love to see more tips about how to use it. There’s a couple of things we are going to implement before we jump for the new pricing in January second that aren’t quite in here yet. But I will just tell you about them now. There are a couple of different ways you can search for articles in the database. So when you first log in this is the screen that you see. We have got two sort of suggested things here. You can search magazines by topic here like I was saying everybody loves airline magazines. You can juts click here and then you’re going to see an opportunity to scroll down and see all of the different airline magazines. Because, I am logged in as my admin access you’re probably going to see a little bit more than you usually would see just on your own.

The other thing you can do is you can search magazines by geographic area. This isn’t necessarily where the magazine is based, this is the kind of things that are covered in the magazine. You might find a magazine that’s international because it’s Be Inspired which is the Brussel’s airway magazine but they do a lot of European coverage, so we will file that under Europe. If you scroll down you will see all the entries starting with the most recent entries and then if you get all the way to the bottom of the page you will see some more options. You can put a specific word in, you could type “profile” and then see all of the magazines that have types of profiles and thats the kind of thing you would do if you were pitching an idea first, right? But that’s not what we are doing today, but this is something that you can do, you can type profile, you can type drinks, and the other thing is that if you are trying to search for things like profile and drinks that are  more general categories you can also click on the tags.

Like, here is a photography magazine we’ve tagged it as it takes photo essays. If you are looking for something topical, here’s something, a magazine that has a section on deer. So we’ve marked deer. Then the other thing is: every different category that we use is also accessible here on the bottom as we’ve got sort of a short version over here on the side. What we’re going to add soon is that every article will go into one so we can start looking. I am going to look at Delta Sky and so every article in the magazine break down talks about the different types of magazines that are available for pitches. Something that I am going to be adding that will be online next week is that all of the different types of articles, and for those of you that were with us last week remember I talked about is the food profiles and business profiles and features and shorts and news briefs and different things like that, those are soon going to be tags. So you can search specifically by “Ok, I have a news brief to pitch and let me see who all is looking for new briefs.” So when you do click into a magazine this is what you see, you’re going to land on the description tab.

For every magazine to start we include the really sort of overview information. Which can help you weed something out immediately. For instance, if this magazine was only yearly but if you have a sort of timely pitch, you don’t want to pitch them because its not going to make sense. But since this one is monthly that means they need a lot of content and that’s great for us. We also have a little bit here about the editorial positioning and this is always great to look at. Because I know sometimes people get really attached with a certain idea and they want to pitch it to a magazine that they have just have been dying to pitch. But its a very, very, adventurous independent traveler sort of concept for a magazine that’s really more about group tours orientated travel experiences. It’s always good to check this to see and we use the magazines own words here because of this to see what the magazine thinks is their brand.

Because if you pitch something that’s not in that, its going to be hard for the editor to say yes to you. Then if its possible to read magazine issues, the full issue online, lets see here. This is one that because its an airline magazine you can find the full issues online, for a lot the consumer magazines like Backpack or a Travel Leisure this is much harder. So we will say that if there is a place where you can see partial issues online and then where you can get full issues online paid. So we always have something here, unless there is a very rare couple number of Indie magazines  that there’s just absolutely no way to get them online, what so ever, because that is their business model.

The other thing that is really important to check when you pitch is to make sure that you’re not off base of these demographics. So, Delta they say that their audience is made up of affluent vacationers and business professionals who are socially active, quality conscious, and ambitious. I have a lot of friends that are like Delta fanatics and I have to say that is really pretty true and they are not the same who fly on American and they are not the same people who fly on United. So, this split between male and female is pretty even but you will see with some of the other magazines that its really not and that can also be really great to know. Not that you’re going to go and pitch a girlfriend get away to Garden and Gun, but you might have something that being whether its shopping oriented or maybe it’s just a cooking experience or something that might be a little less attractive to a magazine editor whose readers are primarily male. This is good just to check and also likewise with the median age and income because you might be pitching something that’s too expensive for the average readers of that publication. I’m going to skip the how to pitch for one second because we are going to come back there.

The contact information here we have the email format for every magazine, I think there’s a very tiny number where we don’t have an email formats for that we are working on. We then have the editors, but we don’t list every single editor, we only list the editors that would actually be useful to pitch an article to.

Alright, now the sort of ‘meat and potatoes’ of the database is this how to pitch section and we include two things here. We include the editorial structure which really kind of tells you the order so that you know that everything in the front of a book is going to be shorter. From the beginning its shortest to longest, right? So I think “one city five ways” is actually several pages and the “wheels up” these are very, very short just a couple hundred words. So, its important to know this order because they always sort of rise in word length over time.

Then we have in the “What to pitch section”, we say approximately how many contributors there are per issue. This is really important for you to know because you need to know how much competition you have in a certain way. Because, you know, I think we all struggle with how much time is spent on our pitches and I am the hugest, hugest aficionado on not spending so much time on your pitches. But, if you’re trying to pitch a magazine that, Delta unfortunately has a lot of contributors, but what if you’re trying to pitch something that only has sections open to freelancers and it’s a huge newsstand magazine.

You’re going to have to put together a very, very, polished, perfect pitch for that magazine as opposed to some thing that is also newsstand magazine but regional and has twenty freelance contributors per issues, right? Because those editors are more desperate for ideas than the ones I mentioned formerly. In the ‘What to pitch section” we break down which sections are available to freelance writers and then which sections are not available to freelance writers. So these ones are written by members of staff, so its not so much applicable to you guys but we have some PR people who use the database and in here we say who the regular contributors for each section that is written by staff are. In case there is a regular contributor who the PR people know how to pitch them, so thats why thats in there guys.

Then we go in to a very, very, specific coverage of how to pitch each section. This is what we are going to focus on for the rest of the call, is looking for magazines that we are going to talk about through this class. So, I talked earlier about One City Five Ways, it showcases one city from the stand point of a sports fan, an adventurist, a foodie, a historian and picks different places to stay, places to eat and activities for morning, afternoon and the evening. So it’s got a lot of stuff. But then if you look it’s very brief so you’re going to have to be very, very, focused in this article. So what this also means is that the word count of the article is informing your pitch so if we send a 700 word pitch for this 700 word article the editor is not going to be very happy. Because they are going to think that you don’t know how to write concisely which is what this jammed packed article absolutely needs. So having the word length spelt out is also a really good metric for yourself to go back and double check that you’re pitch is not out of whack with the type of writing that is necessary for the article at hand. Alright, so I’m going actually just flip the order a little bit and I am going to go first with the magazines that you guys have asked about and then we’re going to go do the airline approach.

While I am going through the magazines that you guys have asked about or has any other magazines that we want to look at let me know. In order to help with the airline approach, now that I have explained it, if you guys have some places that you’ve been that you’re like “hmm what can I pitch? what magazines can I pitch for this very, very, random place” please drop those over in questions while I am going through the magazines, I’ve got some ideas for that. Otherwise I will just use some of my own off the top of my head, but I would love to have some from your guys that we can look at and start to workshop.

I am going to go through the top of the list. Ok, so the first ones, somebody asked for Travel and Leisure, which I know that we just added recently. I’m going to just go through and open these all and cue them all up. We’ve got Travel + Leisure, we’ve got somebody who asked for Departures. Now, Tamera there are actually two different Departures magazines. Are you talking about the American Express one, do you know which one? Do you know that there is two? Let me know in the chat box.

Somebody also asked for International Living, which I know that we have. I hurt my finger so pardon my slow typing you guys. We’ve got the Edible Franchise. Jerry, is there a particular Edible that you’re interested in? So let me know if that would help, otherwise I will just pull up a couple random ones. Sunset, I also know that we have. Are there any more? Kathy, I am pretty sure that we have Yankee. Yeah we’ve talked about that. I will look into this UAE airport. If anybody else has any airports, please chime those in on the side.

I’ve got Sunset, I am going to look for an Edible- Jerry let me know if there is a specific Edible and then Yankee we are going to pull and then we will start doing this.

I think that is a good number for this. So, when you’re pitching magazines, magazines first and then ideas. Like I said, you can either start with a specific magazine that you absolutely want to get into. Or you can either pick the database or you can go to the bookstore and just sort of peruse around through a big pile of magazines and assemble for yourself a loaded gun. So we are going to use the magazines that we’ve got here to do a little bit of both of those approaches and then we are going to circle back to the airport approach. If you’ve got one more magazine and then I am going to stop pulling up magazines. None in particular, Jerry says. Let me just see if we have the Departures and then we will get going. The thing is that you’ll notice that as we go through them there’s, like I said, a large variety of numbers of words of contributors, ok? So, there’s somethings that, looks like its not in here I’ll add it to the list though, because Departures is something that a lot of people are asking questions about and because it only goes to people who have a high level American Express credit card, it’s hard to get so I will work on getting one of those.

You’ll notice that as we go through these that there’s a large difference in the numbers of contributors per magazine and that should definitely inform the quality of your pitch. But also it might inform the quantity of your pitches. So, unless you’re absolutely dying to break into magazines if you see that they don’t really have that many contributors, it might not be worth your time. Because, what I really try to always counsel people to do, and this is a big occurring theme in the Six Figure Travel Writing Road Map, is only go after editors; whether that’s editors content management, editors at a travel company that you’re doing some blog posts for or editors of a travel magazine. To only go after editors that you’re going to do a lot of work with.

This is one of the reasons that I highlighted Jordan Heller earlier. Because, like I said he’s not only the editor of United’s Hemisphere’s Magazine. He’s also the editor of United’s Rhapsody Magazine and the new Amtrak magazine and I think also a couple of other little magazines. He might be editor of Brussels Airways as well. With custom magazines and you also see this a lot of times with trade magazines. Editors typically have several magazines that they are working on, so if you pitch to one magazine you can often end up getting assignments in many other magazines without having to rebuild relationships. So that’s one way of going about maximizing the amount future work you can get from your pitching relationship building. But the other way is just to avoid spending a disproportionate amount of your time pitching magazines that don’t really use a lot of contributors. Ok? alright. So lets sink into Travel and Leisure.

Say we want to want to break into Travel and Leisure, which of course we all do, and I know sort of through some little sources. Although this editor isn’t there anymore, but Amy Farley who used to be at Travel and Leisure and I think now that now is on a  business break or something.  Was always saying how she is kind of desperate for stuff for her front of book; and the thing is that a lot of times, to seasoned freelance writers don’t like to write the front of book articles because you actually end up doing the same amount of work both in terms of research and writing and self editing and also doing edits with the editors for a small piece as you do for a large piece. To long standing freelance writers they are like “well, I would just rather get the assignment for the large piece.” But if you are new to a magazine, what that means, is that there is a lot of opportunities up front and this is one of the reasons that when I am editing the database entries with our writers I really push them to break down all of the different things that you can pitch to the different front of book sections. So what we noticed when we were doing Travel and Leisure is that they have this section Here and Now, which as she says there are about seven five to six hundred word pieces and about three or four of these are written by contributors. These are really like little snippets of different thing and they are kind of all over the place which makes it little hard to pitch but also makes it kind of good in a way because you just kind of never know what they might take. So, they’re really focused on what’s new and whats trending, right? For instance, Hawaii hits the main land. Who has not heard about the Poke Craze, right? I cant tell you every time I turn the corner in New York City there is a new Poke stop, right? So they recently had an article about Hawaii Hits the Mainland about Hawaiian chefs who have moved to the mainland to bring native food, not just the Poke but also things like Spam wasabi and things like that. If you are trying to break into Travel and Leisure this Here and Now section can be a great place for you to fit this sort of little thing that you randomly see on the road or just catch wind of, in fact I completely forget to email myself this last night. But I walked by a place here in New York that is a opportunity to essentially 3-D print yourself. So, they have little, I don’t even know, like mini statues of peoples families. This is clearly for the rich, upper east side, gossip girl set. But you can give them a photo, like a family photo or a painting if you’re that kind of person and they will 3-D print it for you and so that for a super, super luxury magazine could be a great front of book thing about the perfect souvenir  to get while you are in New York City, right?

Sometimes when you’re just walking around and you see something that just seems so new or like you’ve finally seen enough of them that you’re sure its a trend, that can be a great thing to pitch to this front of book section for a magazine like Travel and Leisure. Now otherwise in Travel and Leisure we’ve got Beyond, this is a compilation of stories surrounding a personal experience by the author in a specific destination. I really this example that she used here in “At Home on Hivar” and I am probably butchering that, because I don’t know Croatian. But it’s about the authors perspective on Hivar changed from when he visited as a college student and how it changed and didn’t when he returned years later. These come in two formats: they come 500 words or 1500 words and Travel and Leisure pays as we see down here $2 a word. So, you know, 500 words is pretty great and essays can be hard to place so if you are looking to break in to Travel and Leisure and you have something like this.

You sort of just echo experiences like you were there when you were younger and now you’re back or very, very, well followed for this sort of thing; editors really love them. I don’t know how many people could really say you were there as a college student, I think in Croatia that would work or in Florence, Italy where I used to go to school maybe not so much. Maybe if your parents were in the foreign service or you had a relative that lived on a Caboots in Israel or something like that. Thats probably a great type of thing that you could stick in here. If we were looking for instance, at this magazine and saying ‘ok, how can we pitch it?’ We’ve got these front of book things. We’ve this Beyond essay, this features since we are talking about Travel and Leisure I am just going to say don’t expect to pitch a feature right out the bat and get in with them. All of the big magazines we are about to look at, its probably not the best strategy you want to start somewhere else.

We will look at some magazines that you can pitch features to though. We’ve got Here and Now and Beyond and then there’s this Upgrade section and Worth Flying For, which are quite short but they’re also very easy to fit different thing in. Upgrade we talked about in  the call last week and this is about tips and strategies for traveling or how to travel and they have to be quite general because Travel and Leisure is an international magazine with quite a broad focus. That the kind of thing that if you’re on an airplane and you over hear a couple conversations but the same thing. Maybe its trend of how parents are now actually taking red eye flights because the newborns sleep on red eye flights because the places are quieter or something like that. Then you could say how the new planes are helping your kids sleep at night or something like that.

Worth Flying For is a 200-word, second-person article about must try. This is the kind of thing you can apply in a a lot of different places where you are traveling to. So lets say we are going to TBEX in Israel and we want to pitch Travel and Leisure. What can we do here? Alright, so if you are trying pitch in advance of your trip you can look at Beyond. Do you have a personal connection to the destination? Maybe if you do, maybe if you went on one of the programs to Israel when you were young and now you are going back as a travel writer with a full different view of the destination and also in a very different time for Israel. Especially with the recent events going on right now that could be a great story, especially because of the time peg of what’s going right now with the U.N.

We can also look at Worth Flying For, we can do a little research in advance  about what is the best place in Jerusalem to have humus, right? You can talk about shakshuka, its a very popular Israeli dish. Its a tomato, egg, sort of wood fired grilled dish and why its worth flying for.

Or for Here and Now we can look at what is the 3-D printed souvenir of Jerusalem? Or of Twelve or Hisa? This year is major anniversary year or Israel. So perhaps you could find out what are the festivals they are doing around that or some other events that they are doing that would fit in the Here and Now section. But keep in mind that anytime you are pitching something that’s super timely like a big anniversary, you have to be well ahead of the curve. So since we are in December right now, pick something that’s sort of more generally about Israel’s big anniversary next year when independence is probably a little late. But if you could find, a friend of mine used to be in the Army, she was a tour guide and the place she guided her tours was essentially like the seat of the big independence movement and it was they relocated a lot of settlers and it became a big caboots scenes and so and so forth. That kind of thing you could kind of highlight that historic place. One specific place and the events that they are doing still gets something in for the 2017 anniversary if you’re pitching right now. Alright so that’s Travel and Leisure.

Let’s pop over to International Living. Say you want to get published in International Living. Now, this is a magazine that uses quite a few contributors every month. If I’m not mistaken, 20 contributors every issues. Doesn’t surprise me. I’ve written for them and I have a lot friends who have written for them. So, they have a lot of very specific types of articles that they look for. So they’ve got this International Dates which is around an event that takes place during that month. So, this is the kind of thing where I was talking about where if you were going to TBEX in Israel then you can look at some of the anniversaries coming up and you can pitch something for that. That would be perfect! Also, I’ve mentioned on some other calls how I went to this, I don’t even know the right word to describe it, but this religious festival in Japan that happens every 7 years. Where they ride a tree down a very, very steep hill and you know, I could hold on to that and in seven years from now and on the right month I could pitch that to the International Dates section in International Living. But this The Savvy Travelers Corner is a 300-500 word article on the inside scoop of what to do at a particular location. This is the kind of thing that is perfect for the loaded gun approach, right? So you could now, the International Living, is always looking for the inside scoop of full days worth of activities. So what that means is that you could be doing your freelance assignment in a cafe in London and ask the barista or over hear some people and ask them some questions about what are the best things to do in Central London and jot those down. Go around and get some prices on different tours and take some different pictures of different destinations and there is about 30 minutes of walking around and back ground listening while working on your work- you’ve got a Savvy Traveler’s Corner.

Offshore & Finance these might be appropriate for some of you guys but these are much more oriented towards people who are investing overseas and things like that. So we will skip over that one.

Lifestyle is a great one to look out for. Lifestyles is a 1,000 word section about an individual or couple that is living their retirement lifestyle abroad. This is a great type of loaded gun section. If you just know that there is a magazine that takes this and I’ve seen a couple other different ones like just around while working on in the database lately. Then when you’re sitting around like I said, in a cafe doing your freelance writing work or in the hotel lobby,  this is why you should totally write outside if your hotel room while you are traveling because you get great ideas. I love to write in the hotel lobby in the evening. If you’re sitting in the hotel lobby and you hear this couple talking to their friends who are staying at the hotel but they are there to visit this couple that’s been living in this destination for a long time because they retired there when they were 45 and the husband got out of the military service. That’s when you could just say “hey, excuse me, it sounds like you’ve got a really good story. Do you mind if I interview you for this magazine article?” Get their contact information, pitch the editor. say you’ve already gotten the go-ahead to interview the person and there you go you’ve got an article. So, like I said this is a really really great loaded gun sort of section here.

Real Estate, oh my God, real estate is another really good kind of loaded gun topic area within travel, that I wished more people would take advantage of. I think its now called the International New York Times, has a really great real estate section and can be a really good way to get a New York Times clip. They are always looking for sort of iconic but not necessarily celebrity owned type thing. But, like a castle in Tuscany or a big old farm house in Provence or something like these really, really beautiful houses that are on sale. So, I’m traveling around I am always looking in the windows of the real estate offices everywhere and see if there’s some crazy interesting thing up there. That maybe I can reach out to the person and do an article on that. So here you can see that International Living has one and this is more narrative than what I was saying about a particular property focus. But what that means that if you just so happen to be, like I said, walking around and looking in the shop windows and notice that the prices somewhere are super out of whack. I was in Monticello which is a really super adorable hill town in Italy that’s very, very well known for its wine. The views are beautiful, the place is awash with tourist and we looked at the property prices and they were so low we couldn’t believe it. So, that might be the secret way to get a hill town apartment in Tuscany, there ya go! There’s a story for the Real Estate section of the International Living. So, here’s one real estate section but there’s several other ones that are really great loaded gun article types to hold on to.

Solutions: this is similar to what we were just talking about in Travel and Leisure. But this one is more around the issues that International Living covers which is retiring abroad or generally moving abroad. So this one this one is facing retirees abroad. This would, again, be that type of thing that in the cafe or the bar or the hotel lobby and you hear people be like “oh my God, like have you done your Visa run yet this month?” or something like that. Then you know its a great concept for this solutions here. We are getting a little close to the end of our time so I’m not going to go through all of it but I’m just going to sort of slowly go through here.

Again, they have another one on investments and profits. They have collectables and this is another great one I wanted to high-light. It’s on antiques and collectables from a specific region. Like I noticed that when you are in Japan, you can get an Obi which is the very fanciful tie that the Japanese women put on their Kimonos and its actually really, really long. You can get used Obi’s quite inexpensively as a tourist because Japanese would never buy one. That’s a really great collectable item that you can get. That’s the kind of thing that you might just want to walk around and see a lot of these things and go ‘huh! I didn’t know you could get that thing here’  and then you know that’s the kind of thing you could pitch to this section.

Alright, so we are going to pop on over to Sunset. So, Sunset, for those of you who aren’t familiar is a magazine that focuses on the American West and they actually have several different issues depending on the specific geographical area. So, one of the things that that means is that a couple of their front of book sections, particularly the “A Perfect Day in…” they do a different one each issue for their five sections. So the editors actually need 5 different “A Perfect Days in..” every month. So that’s another really good one to keep in mind. Because, what that means is that no matter what you are in the West you might actually be able to pitch them multiple things for this section every month. So if you live out there or travel out there often, especially if you are based there and do a lot of little random day trips this is a really great loaded gun section to keep in mind. But, if you look you will see that’s its a very, very short, right? It’s 400 words. And, so like what I said, we want to make sure that the length of this section dictates our pitch. We don’t want our pitch to be longer than the length of the section.

Where as Wanderlust is much longer, it’s 2,500 first person. So, this is the kind of thing where if you are in the Western states you just had a really crazy experience that might make a good Wanderlust article.

They’ve also got another great Food and Drink one here. Food and Drink things are some of the best loaded gun articles. I have seen a lot of people asking me lately about drink like cocktail or specific craft distillery oriented things and they are several different, we featured them in our last call, but there are several different magazines like Rogue Report another high end travel magazines like that. That have specific sections about that. So you know, I was just looking up restaurants in the Hudson Valley where our writing retreat center and I was on Hudson valley magazine’s “Best of..” there were a lot of these regional magazines, too. And they have the best Bourbon and I had no idea that the Hudson Valley was even known for Bourbon enough to have the best Bourbon. So, now that’s something I knew to look into where I can place that. That means that if I had a good loaded gun of drinks articles I would know right away “oh. ok! Well this is where they feature, you know, the best craft distilleries in this certain area.” Or this is where they feature a drink you wouldn’t expect to be distilled in this certain area.

Alright, so another thing is that I know that Sunset does work with new writers for their feature articles but the thing to keep in mind is that whenever you have a magazine that is a bit lifestyle and some of the airline magazines are more like lifestyle and some are more travel oriented. Sunset is one of these lifestyle travel hybrid magazines. You’ll see we’ve got some other ones like that in the database. There’s Savannah Garden and Gun. In New York we have New York Magazine and few other ones like that and Hudson Valley that I was talking about is another good example. Minnesota Monthly, 528, ones like that are also great examples. Anytime you’ve got something like that sometimes the features there need to be something that you found on your travels but you expand in a way thats not quite travel orientated.

Sunset has a lot of food coverage. They also have some garden coverage. So for Sunset something that could be a great feature is not just a tour of a particularly fascinating historic garden but you know of a historic garden that is attached to a historic home and you’ve interviewed the people who lived there in the past and now its gone to a non-profit and the people who caretake it you’ve all sort of talked about the evolution of the garden in a more narrative sense from being a family property to a place of learning. And its got both the travel service and that narrative and profile elements in there. So like I said, as you will see their features have won quite the gimmick.

Let’s pop over to Edible magazine that Jerry asked for. But, I couldn’t find the one that you asked about. Because we don’t have a copy of it. But I am just going to show the Manhattan one for now. So, the Edible franchise if you guys aren’t familiar, I think there are like 87 of them now. There’s quite a few and they are really, really good loaded gun articles. Like I was talking about how food and drink are really great things to keep in your back pocket. I really like the Edible magazines for that. In fact, I try and pick them up everywhere I go because of this. Because, there’s ones with really specific sub sections. I think in New York City those ones are from Brooklyn, Queens and Manhattan and then there’s one for the Hudson Valley and then there’s one for Central New York, there’s one for Long Island and there might even be a separate one for the Hampton’s. That’s all within a two hour driving range. I’ve seen the same thing in a lot of other states as well. So, they’re great opportunities to build ongoing relationships and they don’t tend to be, even though they are a franchise, they don’t tend to be so related that one editor will edit multiple ones. But sometimes thats the case and you can also use that as an in with another publication. So, in the Edible Manhattan that I’ve go here you’ll  that a lot of things that they will use freelancers for are shorter and one of the things that I’ve noticed in a lot of the different Edible publications is this notable edibles and that’s featuring a distinguished company. One of the great sort of loaded gun pocket articles that you can do for Edibles is to just keep your eye out while you are out on the road for a new company or a very interesting type of company or storied companies that have a very close tie to local food. Whether thats reviving a trend, for instance like there’s a BBQ food truck company in Kansas City that was actually the first food tour company to do BBQ tours in Kansas City even though they were quite late to the food tour market. Or you know, there’s a distillery in Minnesota that tried to get everything within 100 kilometers. but they make Gin which uses tropical, botanicals. And so they’ve done some really interesting out of the box things using citrus shoots or like the very first green leaves of the cypress tree to create that citrus flavor. Very random. So whenever you hear about an interesting food thing that might be a good fit for this section in the Notables. So this is a really great to add to your loaded guns.

I am going to pop over to Yankee quickly for Kathy. Alright, so for Yankee this, if you’re not familiar it, is an independent magazine but its a newsstand magazine. It’s quite well known, its been around for decades. It covers the North Eastern part of the US. So they use quite a few contributors and they use several contributors for the front of book. This is a lot of different sections that are great rubrics and so there they have one that’s only in New England which is a regular column by somebody and the best 5 and local treasure. These are very specific rubrics.

The best 5 is a round up of 5 of the best things to do in New England around a certain theme. So, you know, pumpkin festivals, farm ends. These are the types of things that you might travel and see one thing and I have talked a lot about how editors love baskets of kittens. Which is an assembly of, you know, of three to five different things that are all pretty great on their own. But when you put them together and you add another geographic distribution on top of that, its a no brainer for editors. So this Best 5 are a really great back pocket thing. If you go somewhere that has Pear picking instead of apple picking and you’re like “huh, I wonder if anybody else has it” and you have a couple more that might be a really good best 5.

For travel, so you will see that their travel section is entirely around the first person feature. So this great to know, because, often I think people travel in a specific geographic area and they’re like “oh what can I do with this?” and we’re going to look at the airport technique in a second. This is a great thing to keep in mind.

I know that Yankee magazine is a very North East so if I have to go to a family reunion or my husband has a conference and I’m up there or something like that and I find an experience that can be a great feature article. That’s a good for Yankee Magazine.

We’re going to skip over, for a second, and do airports and if anybody else has an airport let me know. Because, I think the one that Joe gave me might be a little hard. But I am going to look it up. So interestingly, I think that the small airports tend to be a little easier to find the airline. A lot of times a larger airport have a lot of different information going on and they just don’t sort of distinctly link to all of the airlines that fly there. There’s a small airport by me. Stewarts Airport that family just flew into for Thanksgiving and I was shocked that they were able to get a flight from Charlotte directly in there and the area is well, Charlotte is an airline hub. So I guess I shouldn’t be too to surprised. You can go check out Qatar Airways magazine which should be available like the other inflights are online and then look through its specific sections. This is Stewart Airport that I was talking about. Stewart Airport is served by Delta connection and so what that means is Stewart can do Delta or American or Jet Blue all of which have great airline magazines. So that if you were to go back to the Delta magazine that I had before knowing now that you can fly the Delta direct flights to Stewart we can take One City Five Ways. So this seems like it only takes really big cities but what can we do in here that has a smaller city? Lets say I was writing something up in the Catskills where the house was. So its out of the city so that cuts out trending. Lets see what else can we do? We can do 5 Minutes With? not so much. Maybe break away? This is the final subsection written by a contributor. 500 words to getting out of the city and in to nature. Perfect, right? So, since we know that they are already looking for things that are outside of the city and we know that they also fly into Stewart which is the airport up in the Hudson Valley. We can talk about Sailing on the Hudson, we can talk about there’s a bridge, there’s a state park around a bridge that allows you to walk across the Hudson.

These are the kind of things that you can worm in often in the front of book section because those are the places where editors are more likely to sort of take, not really a chance but take something thats a little more specific to pitch geographically. They know that they are safe because they are not going to alienate readers by having 4 or 5 pages about a very tiny, tiny island that is hard to get to for instance.

I’m so delighted to have had the opportunity to hang out with you guys today. Literally, it was like crummy when I started talking to you and now theres a beautiful, beautiful golden sunset. So, you’ve all made my day and thank you so much for coming out!

Getting A Spot On A Group Fam or Press Trip Transcript

Download (PDF, 282KB)

Today we are going to talk about how to get a spot on a group fam or press trip. In the last couple weeks we have looked at the fundamental of what are the different kinds of trips and we have talked about how to set up your own individual trip and now we are going to look at what is out there. In term of things that have already been set up by CVB’s which are tourism boards and PR firms to represent their clients and how you get on those.

I think you know now I have talked to a lot of different people via these webinars as well as just people I talk to on the road doing these classes. That there is a perception that most trips are actually group trips that we are going to talk about but a lot of people are out there setting up their own individual trips. If you are new to this, however if you are new to travel writing or you are new to asking for free travel, a group trip can be a good way to start. And not just because it’s “easier” and it’s not always and we are going to look at that in a little bit. But because you will get to see how other established writers go about taking these trips and learn that way. So if you are new to sponsored travel this can be a really great place to start.

Specifically what we are gong to talk about today…the main…like the key to unlocking the lock on these trips. It is very very very simple and I think a lot of people forget and we touched a little bit last week but it is even more important on group trips that you are applying for than when you try to set up an individual trip. And then we are going to talk about where these trips live, so to say as in where you can find them online, how can you find out they are happening, how can you get in the loop. In some cases that is setting yourself up to have them come to you. The majority of trips just like the majority jobs or writing gigs are never listed online they are filled by people reaching out to individuals to get them on that trip. Especially small boutique shops differentiate themselves saying they do everything by hand and what this means for a PR person is that they are going out and checking the writers sites and checking out writers clips and inviting on an individual one to one basis writers onto trips based on the research they have already done on that person.

We are going to talk about how to make sure you get found for those, and then we are going to look at I have pulled up three different trips. Trips that I have been invited on, so like the ones that come in through email, ones that come from conference listing, just because you are going to the conference. If you are new this is the best one to get on to, then I have pulled up trips that have been advertised on sites if you are a writer you can get on and look at these sites.

So I have pulled three different trips for each of these types and I am going to go through these quickly when we get to that part of the call but then I would love to hear from folks who are here what ones they would like to look at more in depth. So as we get to the actual listing that I have taken verbatim of these different trips let me know what you are most interested in and we will take a look at.

I myself have been on—I don’t, I actually travel on my own but over the course of writing especially for magazines I write for when I need to go or do a lot of research in a specific area—I have been on quite a few trips over the years, but I have never had a request to go on a trip be turned down. It is more often that I turn them down. So we are going to look at how you become one of those people to get those tourism boards or the PR boards to say yes to your requests.

Okay before we get this train moving why do people get no’s or why do people think it is hard to get on a press trip in the first place.

I think that one of the things I hear from people a lot is that they don’t have published clips yet, and this I think is kind of out there—well how can you, who would even care about you to go on a trip if you haven’t written anywhere. The simple answer is that you need to go get some clips but it is more complicated than that because the thing is that, if you are a writer who has been published in a different vertical, for instance we had some folks at our workshops over the weekend who are science writers or who different types of writing. If you have a publications track record that still ticks that box for a PR person even if you don’t have a publication track record in travel specifically. But the other thing is, if you line up an assignment that aligns up with the press trip, it doesn’t matter if you have been published before because you are going to publish something from this trip.

Other folks on here have been saying they have blogs and their blog isn’t large enough. I started going on press trips when I was primarily a blogger actually and had my own blog that was small but then what I did was I had several other blogs I wrote for then I also pitched magazines.

Next week we are going to look specifically how to put together a really robust portfolio of places that you are going to pitch for one specific trip but the thing is that if you have a blog that is new or small don’t be discouraged because you can aggregate that you are going to write for several places. That adds up to a larger audience some other things that folks are saying, “the market is flooded and super competitive.”

I really love this, I think often folks don’t apply whether it’s for a trip or pitching a magazine or to a writing gig because they think that there are so many people out there who are better than them—and we have a whole chapter on this in the Six Figure Travel Writing Road Map—but the really stark reality right now (and I have seen this myself personally trying to find writers for the database) the number of people who are great, who get their work done, who get it done well, who don’t spend too much time asking questions, who just do it is very very very small. And even if you don’t feel that you are that person yet, you can become that type of person. When I started, I got this question a lot, people say “oh well I don’t have a journalism background.” I don’t have a degree in journalism, my degree is in literature and not English literature, my degree is in Italian Language Literature, I didn’t even go to school in English my entire University career was Italian, Germany, and Spanish. I barely even wrote in English.

Just because you think you don’t have that background doesn’t mean you can’t position yourself as the type of person who gets these things. Alright so let’s look at what exactly people are looking for to put you on a press trip. So if you read a description of a press trip (and we are going to look at some of these later if you have never seen them before) if you read a description of a press trip and you say, “WOW, that is a trip that is so perfect for me, for my audience, for the places that I write for, whatever it is perfect I have to go on this trip or I have to apply for this trip.” It is clear you feel that moment of shhhhwoop. That perfect glove fit. The thing is that PR people also feel that, if you write to the person who is organizing the trip and you check all the boxes it is very easy for them to say yes to you.

What we want to do, our goal is to make the people setting up these trips feel the same thing we feel when we read that perfect trip. We want to make them read your application, your email and say “Oh yes, of course this person should be on the trip I am just going to put them on the list right away.” The reason for this is that if you get on the category of maybe it can get very difficult to get out and we have looked before at this quote that I just love from this fellow Peter Fish who is an editor at large, or was at the time when he said this at Sunset. Somebody asked him at a conference, how long does it take you to respond to pitches? They didn’t ask him specifically they asked the whole panel of editors and everyone kind of looked sideways at each other, he very vigilantly took the microphone and said, “if it’s a yes, 15 minutes and if it’s a no, 30 minutes and if it’s a maybe, then indefinitely.”

This same thing applies to press trips, if you are absolutely a fit they know and if you are absolutely not a fit then they know, and if they are not quite sure, then it is absolutely going to take forever because they are going to see if there is someone who is better that comes along.

Our job when we want to get on these trips is to show them that there is not someone better. What happens is that when they are filling these trips often trips are posted some number of weeks that you can count on one or two hands before the trip goes out so if you get on that maybe category by the time they have decided exactly who the clear yes’s are and are deciding on the maybes and get around to asking you it might be too late for you to go on that trip.

We have Lenora with a follow-up over here, “what about setting up individual trips after being on a group trip? So many destinations have encouraged me to return any time but I have been afraid to reach out.”

We’re going to talk later about negotiating for extra days on your trip, but in terms of setting up individual trips after a group trip I would go back to the webinar we did last week about setting up individual trips cause I think that comes under the valley of setting up an individual trip unless you are just going to tack on extra days which we are going to talk about.

We don’t want to be in the maybe category, we have decided on that. So how do we make sure we are in the clear yes area, alright, there is only one thing you need to do. That is to make sure that you are exactly what they are looking for. Oh yeah, well how do I do that? Right, we are going to talk specifically about how.

This is literally it, when I was new and I had a blog and I hadn’t written many places, I started going on press trips and I couldn’t believe how easy it was, because I had figured out what they needed, what they wanted, what kind of coverage they were looking for, what would make them say yes and I just did exactly that. It can sound like “Oh well, that seems simple, but how do you actually do it?” The fact of the matter is that the only thing you need to know—there is no golden key—if you write for the New York Times you are going to get accepted on every press trip. Obviously if you write for the New York Times you shouldn’t be going on press trips. There is no golden name that you can drop; there is no specific strategy that works every time except for this.

We are going to look at some ways to do that. Here is the questions, what can you do if you aren’t what they are looking for? Now I find this to be the position more people get into. So you look at the trip, and again we will look at some trips in a little bit, but you look at a trip and they say, I am going to reference that I posted and sent out in the news letter that I sent out recently that looked fascinating it was nearly a week long or more—which is practically unheard of these days. It was a really great trip practically all of Texas and some really interesting high-level things a great diversity of topic areas, and I couldn’t go. So I sent it out to my email list to see if there were some other people but before I did that I asked that the gentlemen tell me exactly what we are looking for so I can send it to our list so they know. He said a design writer or maybe people who have a meetings background. He didn’t say it needed to be a specific publication or a confirmed assignment, but he said some topic areas.

What happens if your background isn’t exactly what they are looking for? You make a pitching plan that fits that trip, you don’t talk about your background you just talk about the placements you are going to work on securing that relates to this trip. The golden rule of thumb here—and I am going to give you a checklist of what should and shouldn’t be in your pitch letter—the golden rule of thumb here is that if it doesn’t matter for this trip it should not be in your pitch letter. If your writing is primarily about local music around the US and traveling in an RV but you want to go on a trip that is in Yurts in Canada. What do you do? Do you say, “Hey I am a writer and I live here and I write about this this and this and here are some clips about that you can find. And I saw that you have this trip and I am interested on going on it.”  No, you don’t tell them all this stuff that you do that isn’t related to the pitch of this trip. You say that I saw that you have this trip covering this this and this I would love to cover that trip in XYZ places. I am a published writer if you would like to see some clips let me know and I can send them. But we only tell them the things that they want to hear that they want to hear that are relevant to the trip at hand.

What if in that trip the initial email or the initial posting they didn’t say who they are looking for? So remember I said with the person who sent this really long itinerary to me the other day, he sent it to me but I wanted to send it to other people. So essentially I had to get from him what he was looking for. That little paragraph that says we want design writers we want people who are going to get a national magazine placement, we want someone with a social media following over 10,000, that paragraph is not always there, and you are going to see that later when we look at individual postings.

How do you find out more than what is there, about what is going to be your secret key to help you get on that trip? Here are some of my little spy work things that I do, first of all if it is sent out by a tourism board, a PR firm, even by a hotel, you can go to their page on their website where they list coverage and see what kind of things they highlight. Then you can do two things, you can say okay they are most proud of this type of clip, their most proud of clips in magazines within the region that are major magazines. They are most proud of clips that are long. They are most proud of clips that are in national magazines. So that is the one piece of research you do. The other piece of research is you see what is missing. If that’s the stuff they are mostly interested in, is there a hole there?  Have they been covered in Midwest Living and Minnesota Monthly but not Milwaukie Magazine or Minneapolis St. Paul Magazine? You look for an area that is missing; you can also do this in a much wider area. So they are looking for national clips, so they have a lot of US national clips. So you say okay, folks often visit this region from Asia or from folks from the UK or folks from Ireland or folks from Australia and I don’t see they have any mentions in Australian, British, Asian print publications. That’s the hole!

The next thing you can do, this is really great for any time you are doing something with a tourism board especially, but the next thing you can do is figure out what are their objectives that they have publicly committed to in terms of secured media coverage. For instance, say you have been invited by a tourism board also known as a CVB or convention visitors bureau and that CVB has a website, on their website if you dig through their About page, you will see who is the staff, what is the mission for the entire CVB. Then you are also going to find some reports or annual objectives. Because these types of organization, because they are typically governmental or non-profit, they need to publicly state for the people who are invested in them, whether it is the government that is providing money or if it’s a non-profit they have donors and they also get funding from other areas. They need to declare what their objectives are and typically in the annual report of that CVB or tourism board they are going to say what their media objectives are and if they have met them and what type of coverage they have gotten in the past. This is pay dirt, it is handed to you on a silver platter exactly what they are looking for in terms of securing media coverage and then you do the same subtraction trick we did with the clips page.

If this is what they say this is what they are looking for, what do you not see on their clips page? What is missing? What have they promised their investors whoever they are that they are going to deliver, that they haven’t yet? With a hotel or with other for profits institutions they don’t necessarily need to be as transparent about this, but there are still some ways to check and so depending on what type of hotel or attraction is sponsoring the trip. Depending on what they are they still probably have some type of annual report that goes out, that you can find. It might not be easily listed on their website, if it’s a large one hotel in a large chain it might be on their parent website. You can look around for things like that, but it works really well when it’s for the local tourism board. The thing is that often these for profit institutions are working with the local tourism board, whether its to set up in a financial setting like the tourism board is contributing some money, or they just work with them on a regular basis. So even if you have been invited by a hotel or invited by a festival you can still circle back to what the greater tourism board is looking at. I am just back from the Food and Travel Association conference in Portland where I was speaking, and one of the other speakers was this woman who runs this event called Feast Portland, she said that their media coverage, even though the trips are essentially for the Feast Portland event, is set up by the CVB.

What if you cannot find any of these things and you see a trip listed on a conference webpage or on a website that lists press trips, what if you see a trip some where but it is not clear who they are aiming for? You get the email of the contact person that you apply to for the trip and you write them and you ask. This is really great for a couple reasons this asking not only allows you to find out what they are looking for but you even get a smaller slice, you get what they are looking for that they haven’t gotten an application for yet. So this can be something really useful to do anytime because they are going to tell you “we are looking for this this and that or we are looking for someone for blah.” They are going to tell you exactly what they need to fill out that trip.

If you have questions make sure you drop them in the side over here. So the order of operations for how these trips go is the following. I have included some steps that won’t happen every time but I want to discuss them with you so you know just in case they come up with you. So when a press trip is announced, that announcement can be via emails that are individually sent to people who have been compiled to invite to the list, it can be posting to a website where these press trips are posted. That can be a lot of different places.

But when a trip is announced that starts phase one, so this is the initial application period. So for you as the writer, this is when you are going to put your name in the hat. Even if you are invited individually by email, you still typically need to fill out some information for them. A lot of the time in order to go on the trip, this is typically when you are putting together the application.

Now the next thing I mentioned, if you are somehow in that maybe bucket, if they see you and you are not an automatic shoe in, then you are going to get into this holding pattern and one of the best ways to get that spot if you’re in the maybe category is to follow up with them regularly like once a week. What happens is that they would rather have someone who is really interested on the trip than someone who is not. Even if the person has potentially better placements because PR people are all about relationships, they want to work with somebody who is going to be placing the trip multiple times. They want the best return on their investment, they want to work with you if you have a clear interest.

If you write them and you don’t hear anything back in a week, make sure you are following up and you are following up regularly and you are being helpful. You ask them if there is anything else that you can get them to help them with the decision, you are asking you know if they are interested in you pitching a story based on this aspect of the trip.

In the follow-ups you are giving them something to work with. Now the next type of follow up that can come from their end is asking for more information on what you have mentioned in your application email. These days this takes a form of them asking for circulation numbers on different outlets you have mentioned, this can be on your own blog or even magazines you are writing for. I have noticed these days PR people have gotten lazy but rather than themselves go to the publications which very clearly has media kits online, they are going to the writers and saying hey can you tell us what the circulation of this this and that place that we don’t know about. So be prepared if you have pitched some names that they don’t know, which is pretty common if you are putting together a diverse portfolio of placements to provide that information for them. Try not to say I don’t know.

Now the next step and sometimes this is going to come with the initial application but very rarely you will see that when we look at the press trip announcements in a minute. The next thing is that the itinerary is released okay so sometimes this is going to happen before you are confirmed on the trip and sometimes it’s going to happen after. I personally don’t put into apply for a trip unless the itinerary isn’t out, I know there are some other people who have been burned by itinerary’s that have been changed or get crummy at the last minute. I really recommend if possible if you are not super new and have some leverage, somewhat established, in the beginning, before negotiations or information even starts exchanging hands ask for the itinerary. They might tell you we don’t have it or we will have it by blah. I often find that you need to push them to get the itinerary in a reasonable amount of time before the trip, so the earliest you can start asking them for the itinerary the better. As soon as the itinerary comes out, and not before you need to start pitching trips, pitching trip articles based on that itinerary. But the second thing is that once that itinerary comes out this is also time for you to give feedback on it.

So if you are already confirmed on the trip you can ask for changes, if you are not confirmed on the trip you can say “Oh well, this looks interesting, the trip would be a better fit for me if it included this this and that, or if we had more time here.” Again, that leverage of saying I would be more likely to consider your trip if this works better if you are more established. If you are already confirmed on the trip though this is where you can say, its going to be very hard for me to get my story if we only have this much time in this place or if this piece is currently on the itinerary doesn’t make it into the final itinerary. So you want to look at these itineraries really closely and keep in mind that until the day of the trip like literally the morning you are going out on an activity, that itinerary is not set in stone. This is really important if you need to have a firm assignment to get on the trip because in those cases if you don’t do the thing that you have been assigned to cover, you are going to get into a bad situation both with your editor which is more important and with the PR people.

I want to go back to a question that someone sent me in advance about what to do if the amount of press that you drum up after the trip does not correspond with what they were interested in. Now the rule of thumb is that you going on the trip does not guarantee publication, it does not guarantee placement. Good PR people should know this; all good PR people with their clients are also drumming in that there is no such thing as guaranteed press. However, there are a lot of not good PR people or people who are not PR people who are in the business of setting up press trips. This is very important to understand that some people that are setting up these trips, are in the position where they are assuming, pushing, annoying you that a story needs to go out or needs to be published the day you are back from a press trip, even when you are still on a press trip. Now if you have a blog and you are in the position to be putting things up that soon you still need to manage this expectation because if you want to place articles about a trip in print and also put that information on your blog you need to make sure that those things don’t cross over so you can post things on your blog right away. You need to make sure that you are pitching stories to editors and working on those print stories, and then only posting what doesn’t overlap on your blog because otherwise you are going to have a copy write issue and you are going to piss off the editor. So unless you are going on a trip only to write about on your blog, it is very important to manage expectations, so on this itinerary negotiations time I find that this can be one of the best places to manage those expectations about what will be published.

What if you don’t have things yet set up to write about the trip? When do you start pitching those? Once the itinerary is out and once you have said to them,  “How firm is this? I’d like to write about XYZ. Are they definitely going to be on the itinerary?” That is when you bust your butt to get the stories place. Now I so often see people say (and this goes back to what we said at the beginning of the call) what if I don’t have any experience or what if I don’t have any published clips or I don’t write for that many places. It doesn’t matter you can still have 10 stories come out of your press trip if you bust your butt and pitch it. Okay this is why we set up the travel magazine in the first place because when I started writing I would find all sorts of random magazines that people didn’t know about. I would do a story about all of the things in the area from magazine to private pilots that publish destination guides. There are so many different magazines that you can do destination guides for, for a little slice of an audience that don’t overlap. You can also do different profiles for businesses you can write about the teahouses in the area for Tea Time Magazine. You can write about the gardens in the area for Birds and Blooms there are so many magazines out there that you can make little slices of your trip go into. So once you have that itinerary it is time to work on those things no matter what you promised in your initial email, because like I said PR people like diversity.

Going back to the timeline… once the itinerary is out, that is typically when they are going to start talking to you about booking flights, if that is included. I see increasingly fewer trips having flights included these days, although they still do and this is the time when we want to talk about days before or after the main trip on our own. You shouldn’t expect them to cover your accommodation on these days sometimes they will offer but this is how you make sure you get your stories done. If you especially have low confidence they are going to stick to their schedule, they haven’t actually given you the schedule yet. Really push unless you have to negotiate with your spouse to watch the kids and they also have to travel a lot. Push as hard as you can to have a day or two in the destination after your trip because this is how you make sure you get your stories done if the time on the trip does not align very closely to the publish itinerary, if things get cut out, or if you are just to exhausted to do a good job with your reporting on your trip, or anything of these things. Make sure you have that day to sweep up in destination to do’s that didn’t get done yet. You can also go in advance and try to get the things related to your story done but I find it better if you use the time in advance that day to get acclimatized to the destination or maybe do some research that’s going to help you get other stories, but the day at the end is really where you have time to pick up the things that didn’t get done yet.

Now some trips are going to have a call, a conference call with everyone that is going to be on the trip to provide background information about the different places that are going to be featured there. If they have this, do try to go to it, I often find that they announce little tiny changes in this call and then they don’t send out the actual itinerary until later. So this can be a really good way to know if those things are happening or know if the focus in the certain destination is not what you think it’s going to be, because often when the itinerary does come out it will say you are visiting X place. But it won’t say you are visiting this place and you have X tour and interview then time on your own to explore. One or all of those things may be what you need but it won’t be captured on the itinerary. So when the final itinerary comes out, you need to do two things. You need to ask questions like what I just said, “Are we going to be touring this place because I’m going to be writing a first person narrative story and I really would like to have the tour experience so I can write about that for my audience.” So you are checking that what you need to have in order to get your stories is on your itinerary.

Then there is a second check that you need to do and this is super important and I just want to read a question or sort of a comment I got just before the call that is really relevant. Some one that has been travel writing for a really long time has said, “In general I hate group press trips with a few exceptions, I have been so exhausted and or ticked off upon exiting one that I was not motivated to write about them.”

This is the thing, press trip itineraries (and we have looked at them on some other calls) are often bonkers. Last week we looked at one where we were scheduled to be somewhere every 10 minutes with no travel time in between. It was just poorly thought out, I have also mentioned a trip that we were on in which we were scheduled to be arriving back for more evening activities around 2AM and be on the bus the next day at 8AM having checked out, eaten breakfast, showered, and slept to go somewhere else. These things are not uncommon and they are there for a reason, these people are trying to maximize the money they have invested to get you to this place. It totally makes sense and that is their MO so you need to as much as possible manage expectations and push your MO, which is to get a story, which is what they should actually respect, as much as possible.

If you see that one-day on an itinerary is just undoable it is just crazy, take a look at it. See what you are definitely not going to write about and then write a very nice email saying, “I just want to let you know this day of the itinerary looks like too much for me to handle. I don’t want to negatively impact my ability to report and research the things that I do need to cover on the trip. I see that there is this portion that we will be touring this museum that isn’t a good fit for my coverage area. Would it be okay for me to sit that out and work on reviewing my notes and preparing for other parts of the trip? “

I see people do this quite often and it’s much better if you discuss that in advance than if you bail out in the middle of the trip which I have also seen happen when people are just too exhausted and they need to stay back for some amount of time. It is much better to know yourself and communicate upfront where these things happen and preferably change it if possible. So even if a trip itinerary is crazy it doesn’t mean you shouldn’t duck out or not consider it, there is this loophole or exit valve where you can ask to just sit out one part that doesn’t apply to you, to make sure that you are fresh for other parts.

Where do we find these trips? The pre-established trips that people are being invited on, like I said there are three types of ways. They go out on a one to one basis and send emails to people; they are posted to sites like Media Kitty and then travel writing associations. We talked a little bit last week about these so IFWTWA (International Food and Wine Travel Writers Association), NATJA (North American Travel Journalist Association), SATW (Society of American Travel Writers), and there are some in other markets as well. There’s the British Travel Writers Guild and there are some other ones in Australia, I can’t remember the ones in Canada, there are some regional ones as well. There are ones in the bay area and ones in the Midwest. So Media Kitty is not a travel writers’ association that you have to apply and it will give you credentials, but it is a membership site for journalists and anybody can get on this. So if any of you guys on the call are not already on Media Kitty make sure you guys go and sign up. So this site I mentioned here at the beginning will have regular listings of press trips that you can apply to. Particularly IFWTWA in its newsletter puts out a very healthy number of these so if you are really interested in going on pre-established trips, Media Kitty and IFWTWA are the two I would really recommend.

Other places you can also find press trips mentioned are in various groups on Linked In and Facebook; Facebook has ones that are particularly for PR people. The ones on Linked In you have to often dig around to find. So these are more places where people are saying, “Hey we are putting a trip together for X. Do you know somebody who could be a fit?” I have gone on press things that I have gotten through Linked In; they are typically more one on one things, they are saying, “if there are any journalists who would like to experience our hotel let us know.” But there are group trips sometimes.

Another place to find these trips is attached to different conferences, now TBEX always has them, in my opinion that is the highlight of the conference though it depends on the destination. All of these associations also have conferences that also have trips however, if you join one of these associations, you will not only see listings for trips but when you go to their association conference you will also have the option to go on pre and post, often both trips as well. Also, Travel and Words is another conference that is about travel writing. Unlike TBEX it is about print travel writing and that also has trips after the event. The International Food Bloggers Conference has also starting adding tours, they are more single day tours and also the Women in Travel Conference has a couple. But again they are shorter tours, for a proper multi-day press trip these are really the place to look guys.

Now if you want to get trips to come to you, there’s three main ways. So I very rarely touch my personal individual writer’s site so I don’t have a ton of my clips on there but I do have something up there that I wrote for Dallas Morning News and maybe something vibrant for USA Today. I get people all the time coming to me because of that one clip and like these clips are old and people still come to me about them. If you get one high profile, household name brand clip and you put it on your website the PR people are looking for these and they will find you that way.

But the other thing is that you can work on your SEO, we are often Googling for travel writers for various reasons ourselves within Dream of Travel Writing and I can tell you that the people who come up on the first few pages I see them on the first few pages of every results that has to do with travel writers we have a lot of different search queries that we use. It’s not even the best sites; it’s not the ones that have the greatest and most up-to-date bells and whistles. They are often ones that put up in 1999 and in many cases they were and they don’t have 5,000 clips. Like I said I don’t have a ton of clips on my website, but they are optimized for certain key words. So if you write about travel and you live in Utah, you want to make sure that your website is optimized for that. Unless you live in Utah but you write about travel in Italy, then you want to have your website optimized as travel writer Italy, Italian travel writer, travel writer about Italy. You want to think about these things because this is how those people send out the majority of press trips invites via email to people who have identified. That is how they are going to find you.

The third one is probably the easiest one on here, networking with PR people and CVB’s. Now we talked last week about how you can just walk right into the office of the tourism board and walk around and introduce yourself and get to know them that way. If you were in a destination, just for a weekend with your spouse or they wouldn’t be there on the weekend. But if you are there for a different reason you can network and set it up yourself, you don’t need to be going to conferences, you don’t need to be going to networking events for this to happen. But the other thing that you can do without going in person, you can look at the place that you want to go and you can look at some of the hotels in the area or the tourism board or some restaurants in the area and you put those names into Google along with PR and see which PR firms covers those places. Then you write the PR firm and you say, “Hey, I’m X and I write about this. I am going to be going to the area in the near future. Can you put me on the list for any press opportunities in that destination?” They will, they might ask you some questions but they will at least put you on the list. That is how you find out about these trips that aren’t publicized.

Let’s look at some real press trip invitations. So like I said, you need to do a little show of hands over in the chat box about which of these invitations interest you. First I am going to just go through the three different categories and the three different ones that I have for each one. Then you let me know which ones we should workshop.

The first three are from Media Kitty and these are the same ones that I put out in our newsletter and on our blog today. So you might have already seen some of these. I take it back these are from my email not from Media Kitty. Okay so this one I received that she had written to somebody else and that person wasn’t able to go and recommended that she invite me instead. This happens, okay and like the one I sent out in our newsletter recently is a good indication of this. So if you have other friends who are bloggers or travel writers create a little network like just write eight or ten people and say, “Hey guys, why don’t we pass around the trip invitations that we get that were not able to go on.” So this one is in Puerto Rico and it is a hotel trip the hotel was recently renovated. Here is another one, this is a culinary trip in Colorado, and it is a multi-day trip focused on celebrity chefs. The next one is hard to read, I hope if you are on your laptop you can read it though. This was a really interesting long one that I got via email. She said there is one more slot left, so great you are saying that you’re reaching out to me because you need a spot to fill and because people on your original trip didn’t go. That makes me super likely to go, but this likewise is a very hotel oriented trip, it’s around the Marriott collection.

Okay, here are some trips from conference. So we have one coming from NATJA, the next one is from the Travel and Words trip in Oregon.

Now Media Kitty ones, so these are the ones I sent out in the blog today. We’ve got one in Montreal on the occasion of the 375th anniversary. We’ve got one that is hotel specific trip for a single hotel, not a hotel chain that also includes a rodeo and livestock show. Then we’ve got one for Walk Japan and they don’t say if they include flights on here, which is very interesting because they are reaching out to North American people to go to Japan.

So this Walk Japan. So for this trip I found this today on Media Kitty and I think it is actually live, they are still accepting people so this is a great one to go through and I am glad you are interested in this. So let’s look at some important little pieces here that jump out to me. So they keep saying qualified then they say what qualified writers are, I have worked with the Japanese government in the past to set up trips. I know some things about Japan and I worked with them about docs checking but they also have no idea how it works here. The fact that they say they want qualified US journalists then they say what that means is really interesting because they clearly are the person organizing this trip. Walk Japan has talked to somebody about what kind of coverage they want and they have set up this specific thing. If you don’t fall into what they have declared as qualified then there is no point of even writing to them. Okay there is no amount of talking them into or conjuring that will work here they’re really clear about what they want. So lets look a little more about the trip then I am going to look at this paragraph about qualified writers and really talk about what they want, oh it does say they have airfare, great!

Okay so they say they want US journalists with targeted outlets for their upcoming trip, they want healthy active journalist, high distribution city or national distribution. So this is interesting right, they say they want high circulation but that doesn’t necessarily have to be national magazines. So this is great, this means that you can be doing a Minneapolis St. Paul Magazine or a Midwest Living magazine or a Los Angeles Magazine or a 5282 Denver Magazine, this doesn’t mean that you need to be fighting off the hordes to be getting a clip in Travel and Leisure. Okay you can go to places, which are much easier. They have an active international traveler in mind, 35+, and they are going to be booking like I said direct flight to Japan cities. So how do you figure this out? There are all sorts of airlines that might have direct flights to Japan.

What I would do in this case, I would go on Kayak; it is my favorite search engine. I would search, what? Right, how do you make sure like it’s going to certain cities? So whatever city magazine you are thinking about doing or regional magazine I would put that city in and put Tokyo, all the flights go to Tokyo. I would search on Kayak, and I would click non-stop only. So this is only if you have a specific city in mind. But what if you don’t? Then I would go and I would open up United, American, Delta, A&A, JAL, these are the 4 main airlines that are going to be flying direct routes. I would open up all 5 of those websites, I would go to their route maps and I would click Tokyo. Then I would see what little arrows they have that go to other cities, those are the cities that they are going to care about. All right? Then I would take those cities and see what the high circulation magazines are and I would see who would potentially cover a trip like this. Who is going to do a first person article? Who is going to do a round up? Who is potentially taking a story about this kind of trip? Then I would look in here again. They say with their targeted outlets on upcoming press trip to Simon Stories will represent high circulation, high end outlets with reliable syndication. Preferences given to those with confirmed assignments for airline magazines or large daily papers or magazines.

They are saying preference is given for confirmed assignments, but they are not saying they will only take you for confirmed assignments. So what I would do to apply on this trip is that I would make my little list of the regional magazines and newspapers. Then the airlines magazines, like I said go through and figure out which ones would actually take this story and then that’s going to be my hit list. I am then going to write to them and say that I am so and so I personally have experience with Japan. I am going to say that I have covered Japan in various ways and forms for 10 years. I noticed that you had this trip up, but I don’t currently have an assignment connected with this story because I cannot get a confirmed assignment until I am confirmed on this trip. But I would be looking to pitch stories on this trip to, and then I would put in my list of places.

We’ve talked in the past about the confirmed story conundrum. That they want you want to have the confirmed story, how can you get a confirmed story because before you get on this trip you look for things like this that don’t require a confirmed story and you give them a list of places that you are thinking about pitching.

Next week we are going to spend more time in detail this portfolio of different places that you are going to pitch but I did one you know, how to do it for this trip. I am going to send them my list of the places that I am thinking about pitching and then they say send pitches, queries, and links to clips. Now I didn’t know what pitches and queries means so what I might do is send the email as I said and then at the bottom put some links to other places that I have written about Japan. Then say you also requested pitches and queries, I am not quite sure what you were looking for in that way. Please let me know what else I can send you to help facilitate getting me set up on this trip. So that is how I would apply to this trip.

Okay let me look at some other ones, Japan wants high end, high circulation what if you are just getting started Jill asks. It doesn’t matter if you are just getting started, somebody in the Pitchapalooza class who also came to the Ideafest workshop doesn’t have travel clips and she is working with Delta on a piece. It doesn’t matter if you are just getting started, you can still get these placements. The other thing like I said is that they say they want high end, high circulation but they also say they want regional, right. So regional high end, high circulation is very different then you know Travel and Leisure.

Okay so somebody wants hotel trips, hotel trips to San Antonio, Colorado, Munich, and Japan. Okay so I am going to go do one of the hotel trips, this is Montreal. Let’s do this one, I know it is a little hard to read but it has more information. So she is reaching out on behalf of the Marriott convention and resort network, they are doing a press trip in Hawaii to preview four of the hotels located on different islands to give media a first hand experience of how those hotels execute and facilitate meetings. So let me just give a caveat, I do and have done for many years a lot of stories on meeting magazines on destinations specifically for meetings travelers and group meetings. That is why I have this meeting oriented one, so she said we have one spot left please let us know soon as possible if you are interested in joining.  She has said assigning someone to join the trip on behalf of the media outlets you contribute to. This automatically signals that they’re looking for exposure, okay they are not necessarily looking for a specific story to come out of this. This is really a straight fam as in a familiarization trip this is something where they just want to get in with somebody that writes regularly for meetings or meeting outlets and show us something. Then she’s got a list okay, she lists the different things, she’s got team building activities on surfboards or paddle boards, so this very active. Then she’s got a brand new spa, then we’ve got the resort has a recently opened restaurant, then she is saying that there are different types of events that they can do. She is also talking about technology for digital scavenger hunts, she is talking about a beachside juice bar, she is talking about fitness activities, she is talking about again visiting local farms and markets with the chef from the hotel, she is talking about taking your meetings outside then it has gotten cut off on the bottom. But there is one about doing coffee tastings so Kauai coffee, so like I said in this context she has invited me because I already have a meetings magazine background.

Lets pretend I forwarded this to one of you, to say hey I can’t go on this trip but would you be interested? So what I would do in this case, is I would look over and see what are the themes are, so she has this board meeting things about activities on paddle boards surfing, she has got a lot about activities that people can take while they are having a meeting or while they are doing a corporate event. There’s a lot of outdoor stuff, then there is also food stuff, there’s either food classes or coffee tasting or visiting local farms and markets.

What I am going to do, somebody that is not already writing for all these meeting magazines but who wants to go on this trip, I am going to say okay, I need to find a magazine or multiple magazines that would be interested in a story about active meetings like outside or food focused meetings. Then I am going to go online and there are only so many meeting magazines. So I am going to say who has covered active meetings or food centric meetings already, but hasn’t covered Hawaii. I am going to say what are the big meeting magazines? I am going to get those names. I am going to go into Google and put in the name or the website specifically of each of those magazines, then I am going to search Hawaii. I am going to see what they have covered for Hawaii and I am going to search active meetings. Then I am going to see what they’ve covered for active meetings and then I am going to look for where is the hole. Who is interested in food centric meetings or active meetings that hasn’t covered Hawaii? Then I am going to say, “Hi I am a writer based in blah, blah, blah. I often cover active vacations and food trips I would be looking at pitching this story to this, this and this meeting magazine. You know this about this hotel thing and this about these hotels. Would this be of interest to you for this press trip?” So that is how I would angel the pitch for this particular one.

All right, we are right at 4:30 I am going to just do one more just a short hotel one. If I can find it, then I am going to go through the rest of the slides. But if you have to go you can catch the rest in the replay lets look quickly at the St. Anthony Hotel this is one that has passed it was in February of this year.

But it was also from Media Kitty, okay so this is what often comes when I get hotel trip invitations. It is very brief and it is very unclear what they are covering. So she has given me a bit about the hotel, she say they have a press fam trip around the festival which is the rodeo and the livestock show. The hotel is one of the main sponsors; they will also have other activities during the weekend. But they won’t let us know until weekend, so what does that mean? That means that there is different people paying for this trip, were not 100% sure who all of those people are.

I assume the rodeo and livestock show has thrown in some money and the hotel has thrown in some money and then I would go check who this PR person represents and does she represent the CVB or does she represent only the hotel or does she represent some of these other parties as well? So then I am going to say, whose back needs to be scratched here? For her it’s the hotel but she also clearly is trying to get other people in on this so you can write her and say what other activities do you think will be on the trip? Hopefully she will get back to you but she might not.

But then what you can do is you can go to this hotel’s website and you can see what other activities they recommend in the area, you can see where it’s located, she says it’s historical. You can look into the history of San Antonio and how you can pitch a story that fits the hotel into the history even if it’s just about the hotel. Then you take that little list of story ideas, then you go into the travel magazine database or you go into Google and start searching who would be interested in that story.

Then you put together that little list of the places you are going to pitch, you write her and say, “I understand the press trip itinerary isn’t 100% confirmed thus I can’t be getting 100% confirmed assignments for these things but I am interested in this trip and these are the pitches that I would look at placing for this itinerary.

Let’s look very quickly at what to have and what not to have in your pitch.  So you’ll see the first thing I have is brevity that is for a reason because there is a huge impulse that I see in people either writing pitches or writing pitches to go on press trips to include a lot of other information that is not relevant to the person reviewing this thing to get you on the trip. You need to cut that out because it does two things, first of all it clouds the sharpness of purpose of what you really need to tell them to get on that trip. Secondly, it also makes you look unprofessional and makes them less likely to want you on that trip and that’s even more important.

Now the other thing I don’t see so many of these outlining in a very clear skim-able form like bullet points, exactly what they are looking for placing. Especially people for blogs tend to put a lot about what their blog audience is and their readers are like this and their readers are like that. But the PR person doesn’t really need to now that much, if you have a food blog that also covers travel in the Southeastern US that’s all they need to know about it. Along with your numbers, okay.

Those are the two things. If you are pitching for publication then you don’t need to be putting the numbers in there, but it might help to put it in there up front if it’s a place they haven’t heard have. Then you need to make sure that there is clear indication of whether you already have an assignment which I have already said is hard/you shouldn’t if you aren’t on the trip yet versus if you are going to be pitching. We talked about the right way to couch that if you are pitching and I gave you some scripts on how to do that. Another thing that you can do is say that you regularly contribute somewhere and thus are likely are able to place the story. And that is very valuable, to say that you regularly contribute to publications on X, Y & Z.

Then like I said you want to give them a very clear plan on what types of stories and this is really important as they are putting together the itinerary they don’t ax anything that you need to get your stories done. Then this is the real kicker that people don’t put and if you put it you are absolutely out of the maybe and into the yes category, you want to mention in the past I went on a trip to blah, blah blah and make it as similar to this one as you can and here are some examples of the coverage that came out of the trip. So you are not just giving them some of your clips to look at but you are saying that this is the type of story I produce from a press trip, that to them is gold. It helps to paint a picture to them about what you will do with your trip. So if you haven’t been on trips before, obviously you won’t have that in there but if you have whether it was for your blog or publications make sure you have that in there.

Now when you are writing that little letter, that little email, I am going to emphasize little, you want to check as many boxes as you can, that you are a good topical match for this trip. Sometimes that topic can mean destination, in the case of Japan I was saying I had a background in Japan and I would put that in there to help them see that I can get a lot out of this trip because I already have a grounding in the subject mater, in the history and geography of the place. You are going to put your track record of previous coverage, this might be that you contribute regularly to blah blah blah, blah blah blah, and I run a blog with this readership have published my past work. This is where you show them that you are professional and people might say, well what if I don’t have this or don’t have that. You are really going to use this paragraph or this sentence to show them that you are not an amateur that you have editorial experience, and if you don’t, don’t say that you don’t. Don’t put that paragraph in there; don’t put that sentence in there.

Now another box to check if you can is guaranteed coverage, like I said it is hard to confirm an assignment if you’re not confirmed for the trip. So one of the best ways to do that is to say you write for somewhere regularly and you will be able to find a place for that story and also high profile coverage we look at this Japan trip, which says it, wanted it specifically. But a lot of times they don’t, a lot of times it’s a small boutique hotel and they would love to have that but they are not going to only accept people who do that. But if you can mention that or name drop that you will be pitching or that you have previously written for a place that is going to go for a lot to put you in the automatic yes category.

Now also we are going to talk about this more next week, diversity of coverage is very important especially for smaller places because for them it is a huge bang for their buck to get one person who is going to do multiple stories whether than one person who is going to do one story. So they will pick you over the one person automatically.

Now does social matter, this is a great question that someone asked. I am not always sure that it does. So if a PR firm or destination is looking for people for a trip and they say they are looking for journalists, that’s what they are looking for. If they were looking for influencers or looking for people to be tweeting and posting to Instagram and posting to Facebook they would go out and look for that. So they have decided they want journalists, they want print coverage, so in that case I would mention it only at the end as an I can also make sure that I am blah blah blah posting to my 80,000 Facebook followers. However if it were a smaller place, I would mention it because to them it can make a difference. Similarly to how large publications don’t want your images because they have professionals doing that, a PR firm that is reaching out to journalists want the journalists working on their stories because they have other people coming to do that.

I have a big long list of questions from Minora, I am going to start and go through them one by one. What if it takes two years after your press trip to send the links to your publication person, to the PR person, like what if things don’t come out or you haven’t gotten around to writing them?

Actually PR people, some of them really push you to get some links to them and some of them don’t, some of them just expect that it will or it won’t go up. I definitely wouldn’t worry about it being two years before you post something and I would still send the links to the person in that case.

What about if the PR person you work for worked with on the trip is no longer with the company?

Then I would send it to the person who is handling that account now or somebody who is directly who is actually at the destination.

What do you do if you are on a trip where the host lack experience/common sense and is over committed and ends up dragging you from pillow to post for two days?

I talked about a couple examples of this, it is great when you can ask in advanced if we can do fewer things on this day or can we make some decisions so we actually get to visit places on this afternoon instead of just rushing through. What do you do when it’s just crazy on the trip? I try to rally the troops, then to at least go around the crazy PR person to the person above them to explain that there is an issue here and that we are not getting as much out of this trip as we have been brought to do. So there is two things you can do, if you are on the trip and it is crazy. Talk to some other people on the trip, everybody else on the trip if you can, get everybody together to chime in and say, “I really need to see this.” “I really need to see this.” “I really need to see this.” Then you look at the schedule for the next day and collectively decide what to cut then you go to the PR person with this cut. You say, “Look we are not able to get good stories right now, so tomorrow we need to take this thing out in order to spend more time with the places where we do need to be which is X, Y & Z.” If the person is just intractable and thinks they are doing fine, doesn’t understand what the problem is, then you go back and look at who else has been cc’ed about the trip and find someone above them. It might be that you are being shepherded around by a PR person but the convention visitor bureau has been looped in. Then you go to them and I typically would send these emails in the evening, so that they can get it and work on a solution for the next day. Then I explain to them that it is not just me, I have talked to other people on the trip and we just really need this to be handled better to get more and better coverage. You always want to circle back to the quality of the coverage because that is what you are there for. I would say, ‘”Can you have someone from your office join us and help to manage our stop so we can stay on our time table?” or something like that.

I used to get a pretty continuous stream of unsolicited invitations to press trips but the flow has changed in the last couple years. One factor I believe is that with so many people basing their business off models on free and sponsored travel perks in exchange for mediocre coverage. Are you seeing the same trend? I typically pay for my own travel so that I can follow my own drummer, but how can we get back to going on these press trips?

I think that I do get a lot of invitations and I always have, but this is a good point that there are fewer invitations these days in a way. The ones that I do get seem to be coming closer to the times when the trips are departing and I think that circles back to what I was saying earlier though. I think a lot of people are going on more individual trips than group trips. I think in a way that is a good thing, but it also has something to do with the fact that I said, there are separate trips for bloggers now. There are separate trips for people who are tweeting and posting to Instagram and posting on Facebook rather than people who are journalists. You can get invited on both, but they are handled separately. For instances, if you want to get on trips as a blogger you can go on Blogger Bridge, there are a lot of trips listed there for bloggers and they are very clear what they are looking for. The professional bloggers association also handles some and you will see them attached to conferences such as TBEX. The fact of the matter is that the main thing that I see is more trips these days have become familiarization trips rather than clear press trips whether than clear press trips with an assignment attached which is great for people like Lisa if you don’t have clips, if you can show them a clear pitching plan and approach them like a professional it is much easier to get on the trips that do exist now simply because people have switched taking individual trips. So I know that might not have been a complete answer to your trip question. I hope that sort of answered it.

Okay so I don’t see any more questions, but I will stay on for a couple more minutes. Thank you guys so much for joining us today!

How To Become Part Of An Editor’s Stable Transcript

Download (PDF, 349KB)

This week, we’re going to be talking about how to become part of an editor’s stable. And if you read the email newsletter or the blog post about this week’s call, the thing about being part of an editor’s stable, and I’m going to talk more specifically about what that means, but it’s really the key to having recurring income writing for magazines as a freelance writer.

When I say it’s the key, what I mean is this is the answer to the problems that so many of you have with feeling like you write pitches and you don’t hear back. Or like you write for a magazine once for this much money, and it takes you so long to get the pitch together and the article together, that the rate is horrible for you. Being a regular contributor for an editor is really the answer to a lot of those problems.

Specifically what I want to talk to you about today is what the stable is and why you want to be a part of it. Oops, sorry. I didn’t do the second one. And then we’re going to talk about the different things that you can do to make yourself indispensable to your editor. And then we’re going to talk about times that you should not become part of a stable for a certain editor. So, the warning signs that this editor and this magazine is not a place for you.

We’ve also got the Travel Magazine Database. And I’m going to mention this a little bit later because the whole reason we started the Travel Magazine Database is because editor’s biggest — any editor, no matter what they edit, the biggest complaint of every editor is that they get too many pitches from people who aren’t familiar with their magazine or who don’t understand their publication and are pitching something that could never appear there.

We really started the Travel Magazine Database to help people understand what magazines are looking for from writers. So, I don’t have a journalism degree. I think I get a lot of sort of feedback from people when I’m telling them, “Oh, do this, do that,” but they’re like, “Oh, well, Gabi, that’s easy for you. You’ve been doing this forever,” and I haven’t. I don’t have a journalism degree. My degree is in Italian literature.

Literature is very different than journalism and a whole other language. So, you can learn this stuff. You can learn how to write journalistically. You can learn how to work with magazine editors. It’s not rocket science. And the funny thing is they actually don’t teach this stuff. They don’t teach how to freelance and how to build these relationships in journalism school.

If you feel like you don’t understand how to do all of these things, I have a lot of people in our Pitchapalooza class, for instance, who’ve done journalism classes and also don’t understand how to do these things because they’re just not taught primarily, which is why we teach this stuff. So, I’ve been on both sides. I’ve been a magazine editor, and I’ve been a frequent contributor for quite a few different magazines in different parts of the travel industry.

I’m going to talk to you from my own experience today, but I’m also going to sprinkle in a lot of direct quotes, and also anecdotes from other editors all around the country and around the world, honestly, about what they look for in their own words. So, before we get started, what do I mean by stable? 

So, I got a couple different — some people haven’t heard of it. A list of go-to writers. Catherine, great to see you. That’s a great way of describing it. So, a lot of editors use this term. It’s just kind of the industry term, and I’m not really sure how it came up.

It doesn’t sound super attractive, if you think about it. But an editor’s stable is the writers that they have worked with in the past that they know that they can turn to for, somebody else said this, the reliable list of go-to writers. Exactly. For reliable copy, and copy, if you’re not familiar with that word, means text. So, a lot of people these days ask, “Oh, should I provide photos with my pieces?”

This is an ongoing discussion that’s changing as magazine budgets shrink and more photos are available from online services like Getty. A lot of magazines get their images from Getty. So, if you thought about going into stock photography, that’s a really good way to get your photos in magazines as well. But magazine editors really think of their writers as writers first.

And if you are able to provide images, that’s a perk. And we’ll talk about some other things that you can do like that to help with your editors later on. But one of the really important things for distinguishing yourself as part of the stable is that you are a reliable source of copy. So, what does that mean? It means not just that you are able to turn in a clean copy. That’s another word that editors use a lot, which means that it’s not just it’s grammatically correct or it’s free of errors.

It means that they have to do very little work on it. So, the structure of the article is good. The structure of the sentences are good. The level of detail, the amount of reporting. And I know that every so often, I say things like, “Oh, the amount of reporting,” and people are like, “Well, I don’t know how to do that.” But what reporting really is, and what editors really just need in that way is they need facts.

I was re-listening to some recordings of conference sessions that I’ve been to recently in which editors, either in a panel or individually, talked about what they want from writers. And one of the editors was saying, essentially, it wasn’t don’t make things up, but it was basically if you have written something down in the field, check it. Make sure that that is right. And Tim Leffel said very, honestly…

Listen to your guide, as in don’t be on your phone posting pictures to Instagram, but also know that your guide might not be telling the truth. Not because they’re trying to mislead you, but they just, in their training or somewhere, heard a story that’s an anecdote or a fact that they didn’t check. So, part of being in the stable is being reliable, is turning in a copy that is factually accurate, that is easy to read, and that requires few revisions.

Another part of that is editors knowing that you are there when you need them. And we’re going to talk about some different ways that that works in a couple minutes. But first, for a second, because in order to understand how to become part of an editor’s stable, how to work with them regularly, I need you all to pretend that you’re editors to imagine what it is like to be an editor. And I just realized I didn’t put this quote in.

But someone had asked in the Facebook group for a Pitchapalooza Program recently. “It looks like a magazine bases a lot of its issues on themes. Should I write the editor and ask for an editorial calendar?” And I pulled up a quote from the editor from Coastal Living, which is a pretty major U.S. publication. Regional, but one of the newsstand publications you’d find in most parts of the country.

And she said, “Do not ask me to do things for you. I am an E.R. doctor, and I have seven gunshot wounds, and you are asking me about a cold.” Now, this sounds pretty harsh, right? And somebody who has a blogging background, but has not written for print who attended the session at TBEX left and told me, “Oh, my God. Everything she said made me think, ‘I never want to pitch this woman.’” But the issue is that if you want to write for big magazines, this is what editor’s lives are like.

She’s an E.R. doctor with seven gunshot wounds. Don’t ask her about a cold. And I so, so often in various Facebook groups or in emails that I get see writers who have these enormous — I don’t want to say psychological because that sounds like I’m saying you need a psychiatrist, but enormous kind of emotional issues they have created around a piece or around an interaction with an editor. But an editor is really not thinking about it that hard.

They need them from you, they need something from you, they say it. Sometimes the way they say it doesn’t sound very nice, and you read into it, and so on, and so forth. But literally, every month, especially the big magazine editors, but also small magazine editors who today tend to have to edit more than one magazine. These editors have to achieve perfection over an enormous amount of content, over a book-length amount of content and photos.

And there are so many players, so many pieces involved in that process that they have to interact with. Well, at their office, they aren’t just sitting there either reading their email and fielding pitches or editing your piece. They have to make decisions about issues that are months from now. The issue they’re working on now, issues that have already gone to press perhaps, and now have had some issue come up in which there was a factual error, and now, they have to run around and change all the things of the copy.

They might have a photo that just doesn’t work anymore that was supposed to be on the cover, and they’re scrambling to find a cover photo because the issue needs to go out. They have so many fires that they are trying to put out, and you, as the freelance writer, especially as a freelance writer who doesn’t have a full slate of work, have so much time to read into these emails that they write you. And I’m not just saying that you need to not do that.

I’m saying that as you are interacting with editors, you need to put yourself in their shoes and think about how much stuff they have on their plate, and what you can do to make their lives easier. This is the number one, number one, number one thing that I want you to take away from this topic of how to become part of an editor’s stable. Is that the best possible thing that you can do for any editor is to make their life easier. Now, people who are afraid of pitching tend to think that their pitch is an inconvenience to the editor somehow.

They think the editor won’t have time to read it, or what if they just don’t like it, or why would they read my pitch, I’m a nobody. If you have some other things, chime in. I’ll mention them anonymously. But there’s a lot of different ways that writers think that they are bugging editors by pitching them. But the fact of the matter is why do editors bother to read pitches from writers they’ve never heard of, right? Why would they take that time, if they have all this stuff to do?

Why would they ever bother to do that, if it wasn’t important for them? It is important for them because editor’s lifeblood is ideas. They need those ideas from you, from new people, from new places, because they have been covering this same thing forever. They might have something they would love to do a story on, and just they’ve never found a writer who knows the area, or lives in the area, or has access, or whatever it is.

And you are finally the person that they have been waiting for all this time. Or perhaps they just have a hole that came up. One of their regular writers got in an accident and can’t do a piece for them, and they have this hole, and they need to fill it with something. But that something isn’t just anything. That something needs to be geographically balanced with everything else that’s in that issue and in that section.

And that something needs to be something they haven’t run recently, and that they don’t have on the slate to run the next month. And so, even though it needs to be kind of anything, it needs to fill a lot of specific checkboxes. And so, what you’re sending them might be the answer to exactly what they need that day. And so, this is really important to keep in mind with an editor.

Is that the best way to become part of their stable, to become on their good side, to become somebody whose pitches they accept, or even just read in the first place, is to show them that you understand what they need. Okay? And we’re going to talk more about specifically how to do that in a couple minutes. But sometimes people complain that it’s hard to break in to magazines because the editors are only working with people in the stable or people that they already know.

I hear this a lot. And, in fact, I just kind of — I didn’t end up going to this session, but I just died of laughter because during an editor’s panel at a conference in the Pacific Northwest, the editor of Seattle Magazine, in response to a question about how to pitch her, said, “Well, I’ve basically made it impossible to pitch me. I’ve said on our website, ‘Don’t send me pitches.’ I have a bunch of writers that I work with, so I don’t get too many new pitches anymore, thank God.”

And she was teaching that session on how to pitch an editor. So, my point in saying that is that editors can sound like they are negative about pitches, but that’s because they don’t want pitches that suck, quite honestly. They don’t have a lot of time, and they need to spend that time on the fastest route to getting their magazine published. So, a lot of editors choose to primarily or as much as possible work with writers they already know because it feeds what we talked about in the last slide.

It keeps them on all of their other tasks. They’re not triaging new writers. They’re not making sure that the copy is correct or in line with their style. It just saves them time. But does that mean that you can’t get in? No, it doesn’t. And here’s why. Because every regular contributor to a magazine is one of us, is a writer, who has things that they’re interested in, other tasks on their plate, other things going on in their lives, other ambitions.

Maybe they want to write a book, or they want to write a guide book, or they want to move somewhere else. And so, they don’t stay forever. It’s really rare for a writer to have been writing for the same magazine for like 30 years. And especially not to be doing multiple pieces a month for the same magazine for 30 years because people’s interests change. People’s availability changes. All sorts of things change.

In the vast world of magazines out there, and the couple to dozen or 20 plus sections in each of those magazines that are available to freelancers, there are always sections, always magazines where there are turnover, where there are regular contributors who are on the way out, or need to leave, or should be pushed out. And I’m going to tell you a couple stories about those in a little bit. I just had a couple of things over here.

Oh, someone was saying, “Speaking of editors, did you enjoy it when you were?” That’s a great question, Michelle, actually, and I’ll answer that because I think it’s really pertinent to what we’re talking about here. So, when I was an editor, I was an editor of a wine magazine, and my publisher, so my boss had the opinion that — no, he didn’t have a journalism background, and most publishers don’t. Most publishers understand very little about publishing and much more about sales.

This is very common, and this is often why editors will give you crazy directives that contradict what they told you in the first place. So, my publisher was of the opinion that people who didn’t know wine, who didn’t work in wine, didn’t get it, and shouldn’t be writing for us. And so, we didn’t have very many people who were proper writers writing for us. We had a lot of one-industry people.

What that meant was that every single issue, I was effectively writing/rewriting every single piece in the entire magazine in addition to making decisions on layout, and photoshoots, and going to events, tasting wine, and helping the tasting director write up his wine notes so that he didn’t say acidity 35 times in 50 different wine notes. So, this is a good example of the type of things that editors are dealing with that you have no knowledge about.

You think that you are writing the best piece that you can and worry what the editor thinks about it. But the editor doesn’t even think about that. If your piece comes in, and it’s usable, and they can fix it up on their own, then that’s just like a check off their list. And it sounds harsh, and that’s why some people were like, “Oh, my God. I’m never going to pitch that mean, mean Coastal Living editor.” But this is the reality of the situation for editors.

And the sooner you come to terms with that, the much better off you’re going to be both on your own psychologically in these interactions, as well as being successful in these dealings. So, I just pulled this out of the database. This was a piece, a database article, that just went up this week or very recently. So, I remembered when I was editing this, and I edit again now. So, if you have questions about what it’s like now to edit, I can also chime in on that.

But I remember looking at this piece and just being blown away by the number of frequent contributors that this magazine has. And so, I just wanted to show you because this is really common that the front-of-book sections, which we think of as columns, like somebody has a column in a magazine or in a newspaper. Those are things that are really easy to assign to one person every month because they tend to be very specific.

They tend to have a certain structure. They tend to have a certain focus, and the editor knows that they have to be there every month. So, for an editor to have to find a new person every single month to write those sections is God awfully annoying. And so, it’s a really big relief for them to know that that is going to be taken care of.

This is a really extreme example. I think there’s like 22 odd sections in here, but of things being written by frequent contributors. But I’ve worked with a lot of magazines, and in the trade magazines, this is super common where the front-of-book sections are predominantly written by the same people every month, even if it’s not officially a column that’s out in their name.

I’m going to talk later about how having a specialty, which is really the case here, is one of the best ways to break into the stable. But I just — I’m going to minimize my thing so I can see. But I just want to point out to you here how specific these are. So, this is — so, Gourmet Traveller is a big magazine in Australia, and this is their wine publication, which is separate. And I don’t have it in front of me, but I believe it comes out every other month.

In this — in their front-of-book, and again, if you’re not familiar, front-of-book means the section of the magazine before the feature start that tends to be composed of smaller or page-long, or sometimes even two or four page-long pieces that tend to fall into predetermined categories. So, in the front-of-book of this magazine, you’ll see. And this is also something common. It’s a wine magazine, but they’ve got a craft beer section and a spirit section. Okay?

Many times, magazines will be about one thing, but they’ll have sections in the front-of-book or in the back of the book, which is what comes after the feature, which also has many predetermined sections which are often short and shorter than the features. In those two sections, they might have recurrent section that happen every month that are about something that’s not — that’s like gently related to the magazine, right.

In a lot of airline magazines, there’s a front-of-book or back-of-book section that is a science section. There’s a business section. There’s potentially a politics section. Okay? So, these kinds of sections are the things that editors aren’t necessarily getting pitches about, right. So, this wine magazine might not be getting tons of craft beer pitches. They might not be getting like this Asian perspective.

I don’t even know exactly what that means, but it’s probably not something that they’re getting a consistent amount of pitches every month. Right? So, when you identify something like this that is probably hard for an editor to fill, that’s a great spot, it’s a great candidate for you to become a frequent contributor to help though. So, we’ve talked about how working with frequent contributors save tons of time for editors. What it really does for writers as well.

There’s two main advantages as they’re broken down into a couple different sections for you as being part of the stable. And I just want to say I didn’t even mention here the money. Okay? Because these things both flow into money. So, I never use this phrase, but it’s so true time is money, right. But I like to think of it more like everything is trade-off between time and money. So, for instance, I have a non-profit background.

In non-profits, so much stuff is done by volunteers. I have worked with non-profits where everybody is a volunteer, where they have absolutely no paid staff, but they have a budget in the six figures, and they put up like seven or eight theatre productions every year. In non-profit, it’s all about using time instead of money. Okay? And so, when we look at freelance writing careers, and I talk about this a lot when we do our freelance travel writing master classes, you start by figuring out what is your hourly rate.

But when you look at your freelance writing career, the single most important thing you have control over is how you spend your time. And most people who aren’t earning what they would like to be earning are spending a very small amount of their time on revenue-producing activities. They’re spending time on their own blog, on social media, on researching magazines, maybe on writing pitches, but very little time on actually writing pieces of writing for which they’re getting paid.

Or the flip side is sometimes people are spending a lot of time, too much time, on pieces of work that they’re being paid for, but their income is still too low. And that means the hourly rate is too low. So, when they talk here about how the biggest advantages of being part of the stable are saving marketing time and writing time, this is because having to spend less time on these two activities means you have more time to make money.

And when you’re part of the stable, you might be pitching an editor ideas. Sometimes they’ll be pitching your ideas, but either way, you have that in already. You don’t need to send a hundred pitches to get a couple editors to get back to you, or a few editors, or 20 editors. And then have five, or one, or however many of those eventually turn into a piece, which eventually pays you.

You can have five editors that you work with every month, or pretty much every month, and you know that when you send each of them a list of pitches, something on that list is going to get assigned. So, just think about it. It’s one, two, three, four, five pitch emails that will get you some number of thousand dollars versus a bunch of pitches or a bunch of time on social media that might get you $0, or $20, or $200.

In terms of saving you pitching time, I think the biggest blackholes in terms of time sucks for people in doing their pitching is the following. Or people skip them all together. But learning the magazine style. So, this is when you start reading the magazine, and you’re just reading, and you’re reading it, and you tell yourself that you’re figuring out what the magazine covers, but you’re really just reading it to get a feel for it.

Now, checking what the magazine has covered in the past, this is something that people ask me how far they should check. But you should always do this with your pitches to see if what you’re proposing has already been covered. But the thing is that you also need to check. Not just how they covered Puerto Vallarta in this section on cruise ports. You also need to check how they’ve covered Puerto Vallarta somewhere else in the magazine recently. Have they covered this region?

Have they covered somewhere nearby? Have they covered Mexico too much recently? And so, as you’re doing that triage process of has this idea been done too recently in these different forms, you’re spending a lot of time not reading the magazine for style where you’re actually reading articles. But you’re spending a lot of time sort of doing a cursory skim over recent issues of the magazine, over past table of contents, over the website, and things like that.

That’s a big-time investment. And how much better is it for you to do that, get an assignment, and then the next month you’ve done it recently enough that you can remember if Vienna river cruises, or Danube River cruises rather, were also covered recently because you just spent a bunch of time looking at these things. Now, understanding the magazine sections, this is something that not enough people spend time doing.

And I really recommend that you start doing a little bit every day, if you’re not already doing this. So, if you have the Travel Magazine Database, it’s very easy because from the Travel Magazine Database, we take the magazine, and we break down every single section. And the ones that are open to freelancers, we talk about exactly the word count, if it’s in first-person or second-person, or third-person, what’s been covered in the past, the structure of the articles.

But even if you don’t have that, you can spend a little bit of time every day going around on Zinio or Magzter, which are two-way street magazines online, or your bookstore and the pile of magazines you already have, and looking at the structure of the magazines. So, not the content, but the structure of how it’s put together and why. How many front-of-book sections does it have? Are they part business, part science with only a little bit of travel? Are they primarily longer sections?

Are they primarily written by frequent contributors? Are the features balanced geographically? Are the features balanced in terms of style; that some are interview and some are narrative? By understanding how the magazine is put together, you understand not only where the section that you are trying to pitch at this moment fits into that. But also, what types of ideas you can offer the editor if that pitch doesn’t work, or if that pitch gets accepted, and then they assign you another idea.

Somebody asked what were the names of the magazine sites that I mentioned. And I’m going to send this to all of you. It’s Zinio and Magzter I believe are the two main ones we use for the database when we need to find magazines. But I believe most of those two are paid, but Magzter might be free. So, let’s talk about writing time now. How many of you get an assignment for a new-to-you publication, and spend an amount of time writing that article that you’re kind of embarrassed by?

Like, you know it’s just too long, or that your hourly rate is in the tank, or that you are just spending too much time perfecting it. I was just talking with somebody that I coached the other day about — she says she spends a lot of time just staring at the computer and not doing anything. And I said, “No, no, I doubt that. What are you trying to do when you’re staring at the computer?”

And she says she’s trying to figure out how to start, or she’s trying to figure out what’s the right way to say something, or she’s trying to choose the right word. How many of you find that this happens to you, primarily with places that you’re writing about new versus places that you write for regularly? Great, thanks. So, yeah. So, I think the thing is a lot of us, at this moment, if you don’t already have magazines that you’re part of a stable of, most of what you’re writing for tends to be new-to-you publications.

And then you don’t necessarily pitch them again, right? Let me know over here in the chat box. Do you — yeah, yeah. Stephanie had a great answer. When you write for somebody regularly, it’s automatic, but new assignments give you pause for multiple reasons. I love that answer. So, I’d also like to know. Do you find when you are writing for a publication for the first time if you do get a number of doubts about it, especially if you run into some things in the email exchange of the editor after you turn it in, or something like that?

How often are you pitching a new idea to somebody after you file that first article? We’re going to talk more about this in the next couple slides, but I’d live for you guys, as many of you as can, to chime in about that in the chat box. How often do you pitch again after you file the story for a place? Okay. So, in terms of saving writing time. So, I want to break out the couple different ways that writing for a place regularly helps with that.

And keep chiming in on the side if you pitch again after you’ve written a piece for a place for the first time. So, one of the big ways that you save time is these little things we were talking about of being not sure, right, being not sure what the style is, being not sure what the structure is, being not sure what the editor wants. So, when you are writing for a place for the second time, or the third time, or the fifth time, you have a certain level of confidence that you’ve done it right because the editor gave you another assignment, right.

But you also know because you can look at the piece that you published with them previously and see what changes the editor made. So, you actually not just have this kind of anecdotal approval, but you can actually see what they let in, and what they changed, and what they didn’t let in. And so, you can know very factually what works for them and what doesn’t. And you also know the submission style.

There’s often magazines that have very stringent and specific requirements in terms of how you should be sending information about your sources or fact-checking information. I wrote for a magazine one time, horrible experience. So, don’t ask me which magazine it was. But I wrote for a magazine one time where it was really difficult to get the contriving of the writer’s guidelines, and then I finally got them the day the piece was due, and because it was due that day, I had already drafted it.

And they had like a two-and-a-half-page, like two-column list of words that you can’t use. And it was a food magazine, and so, it was kind of like words that they thought were overused by food writers. But it was crazy because I had to go back and rewrite the whole piece because they were so strict about the word choice. So, knowing the style of the submission from the get-go, and being able to write your piece in that way, because these busy editors aren’t always sending us their submission guidelines right up front.

Usually, we just file a piece, and then they say, “Oh, we need all this fact-checking information. You need to go back and annotate every other line with the link to where we can find this information.” So, knowing that in advance helps you write your piece much faster. But one of the most important things is having a rapport with the editor, so that if you aren’t sure along the way, you feel confident that you can just — oops, sorry — that you can just write them and ask.

Sorry, I was trying to check the chat box. Okay, there we go. So, now that we’ve talked about what the stable is and why you want to be part of it, I want to look at how you become part of it. Now, I have a couple notes here. First of all, this is in all caps, and that’s not a mistake. And on the bottom, I say, “These are in order of importance.” And you’ll notice the one in all caps is Show You Understand the Magazine.

These five things in this slide, these are the basics. These are not the basics just in terms of content, but these are the basics in terms of getting your foot in the door in the first place. So, these are the ways that you get the editor to assign you a pitch. Oh, God. Sorry, guys. That the way that you get an editor to assign you a pitch in the beginning. And I’m just going to go back up to Stephanie’s question.

Earlier, she asked: How do you query an editor when you don’t have enough for the type of guidelines they’re looking for? Surely, a compelling query can catch their eye. And this is the answer. So, the way to get an editor’s attention, first and foremost, is to have a good idea. But you’ll notice have a good idea is actually the third one on here, and that’s because part of the goodness of the idea, the quality of the idea, is how well it fits the magazine.

And when I say part, I really mean that’s one of the major, major parts because if you see that a magazine has a specific section that they haven’t covered the specific place in the past, and that that specific place is similar to, but different in a fresh way than these other places, that is solid. And so, I say, and you may have heard me say, and a lot of editor’s say. A place is not an idea, but if it is a recurring section in a magazine like a sort of city guide or something like that, then the city is the idea.

It’s sort of this weird catch-22, but what makes it an idea is that you are pitching the city for a specific column in the magazine. So, you’re pitching the city as a guide to what is new in Reykjavik, or what is new in Berlin, or what is new in Houston. So, you’re not just pitching Houston. You’re pitching a city guide that is 800 words that’s a roundup with seven sections for Wow Magazine’s City Guide. That’s what you’re pitching.

Showing that you understand the magazine happens through the quality of your ideas. And one of the editor panels that I went to recently that I was re-listening to, the editor from Coastal Living, she said she wants to see the word pitch and your topic in the subject line. And this is the way that I always teach people to write subject lines. As a lowercase-word pitch, so lower case word pitch; and then the title of your article, and then the name of the section that it’s for.

This is a signaling mechanism to editors. It helps them understand right off the bat that you understand the magazine because you are pitching to a specific section, and that’s very attractive to them because I would say at least 95% of the pitches that most editors get don’t pitch a specific section of the magazine. So, you’re immediately catapulting to the top of their what is this list by having that in your subject line.

Now, showing that you are not crazy. This is number two on the basics here. Okay? Because when I say 95% of people aren’t pitching to a specific section of the magazine, I then want to say that probably 60%, yeah, I think that’s about right, of the pitches that most editors get, and I’m talking about globally, all editors, different levels of publications, from the pays $20 to the pays $2,000. At least 60% of the pitches that these editors get, they could never ever use, and they just don’t even understand why the person has sent this.

It’s somebody sending a mountain story to the editor of Coastal Living. It’s somebody sending a beach island story to the editor of Mountain Living. It’s somebody sending a story on Botswana to — let’s see, I was going to say U.S.A. Today, but a story of Botswana to the Denver Post, which only covers regional things in the Rocky Mountains. And that’s the low level of the off-base stuff they get.

They get things from people who are saying, “I’m writing my memoir, and here’s an excerpt of it. That’s a perfect fit for your magazine. Your readers will love it. Please publish it.” And then there’s the people that are really like batshit crazy. My favorite thing is an editor said one time that they had somebody who pitched them something and then called them every day for like two or three years and like every Thursday at 4 o’clock or something to check in on the pitch.

Showing that you’re not crazy. Again, it’s after understanding the magazine because this is something that’s a little harder to show. But showing that you’re not crazy is also one of the most important things that you can do in your pitch. And part of the way to show that is these other sections. So, now, when I say show you have good ideas, I talk about how part of the good idea factor is related to how much you’ve understood the magazine.

But you’ll also need to understand what is an idea. And this is a huge thing that people struggle with that it’s fundamental if you want to write regularly for a magazine. So, how do you understand what’s a good idea? Can I even tell this to you in one sentence? Because we have whole weekend workshops around that. The Pitchapalooza spends a lot of time on this.

It’s one of the biggest things that I spend time teaching, and we do query critiques and coaching. So, the simplest way to know if you have a good idea is to tell it to somebody else in person, live, and see if they want to hear more. That’s the simplest, simplest way. In terms of coming up with a good idea, that’s a whole other story, and we have a lot of webinars on that, and I can talk more about that some other time.

But it’s really fundamental for the editor, before you’re writing, ahead of your writing, to know that you have good ideas. The editor of 5280, which is the Denver City Magazine, was saying, “If you have a good idea, I can help you with the writing, but if you’re just a good writer, but you don’t have anything to write, I can’t help you there.” So, having a good idea goes a long way, but it has to also fit the magazine.

I’ve had some really nice rejection notes from really big newsstand magazine editors before where they said, “I love this idea. I don’t think we can use it right now, but let me know where it ends up. I would love to read it.” So, that’s the kind of thing where even if you didn’t get this part right somehow, you have a good idea. You can still ingratiate yourself with the editor. So, these are all ways you can ingratiate yourself with the editor, but if you want to become part of the stable, you really need to have the whole package.

Now, showing you’re a professional seems like it would go part in part with showing you’re not crazy, but showing you’re a professional goes further. So, showing you’re a professional means using these signaling mechanisms like the subject line that I talked about. And somebody asked me what it is again.

And if you check out on our website, on the blog there’s a post about writing pitches in 15 minutes, and we have a whole sort of fill in the blank thing about how to put together your pitch in that blog post. I can’t get it for you right now because I’d have to X that over the slide screen. But if you look up 15-minute pitch on the Dream of Travel Writing Blog, then you’ll find it, and that has the headline formula.

And it’s also — if you have The Six-Figure Travel Writing Roadmap book, it’s in there as well. The headline formula. So, part of showing you’re a professional is using these signaling mechanisms to show that you understand how journalism and how magazine publishing works. So, one of the signaling mechanisms is to put the word pitch in your subject line, and to put the topic.

Another signaling mechanism is to keep it short and to the point. One of the biggest mistakes that I see from people who — it often happens with people who are used to writing their own blogs or writing for other online outlets where space is not so much of a premium. But they write very, very long pitches that have a lot of information both about the article and about the writer. And print editors are used to everything being very short.

Their emails are short because they don’t have time for long emails. Their word counts in their magazines are short because they don’t — because it costs more to print longer articles. Everything is really short for them. So, part of being a professional is showing that you can get to your point quickly, and that you know what your point is. And this flows into the next one. So, do people want to see your clips?

This depends. It depends on the editor, and it depends exactly what they’re looking for. Resoundingly, never ever, ever just put your portfolio and your pitch. I’ve started seeing this going around, and I think there must be some travel writing courses that are teaching this, but never just say, “If you want to know more about me, here’s the link to my portfolio.”

Don’t do it. And especially don’t say, “And if you want to know more about me, you can read some of my writing on my blog.” Don’t do it because — I can’t see it right now. Sadly, my notes are on another slide. But the editor from Coastal Living said, “If you do that, you’ve missed an opportunity because I won’t go there. I just don’t do it. I’m not being mean, but I just don’t have the time.”

Editors are not going to go to your portfolio and dig around. If they want to see your clips, then you will send them specific articles. And I really liked the way that the Coastal Living editor outlined it. She said — so, this is if people ask you for clips. Don’t put this in your query letter. Okay? “If people ask you for clips, you want to include a narrative clip, a clip that shows a sense of place, and a service clip.” Okay?

I’m going to send this out to all of you. So, these are the three types of clips you should send if someone asks you. Now, the second part of this though is that you should also — if you are sending clips, you should also send clips that are related to the type of article you are pitching. This is very important. Don’t just send them your best clips if they show a style of writing that is not what the magazine needs or what this particular article needs because that doesn’t matter to the editors.

It doesn’t help them decide if they should assign this particular piece of writing to you. Okay. So, let’s get into after the pitch. Once you’ve started working with the editor. How then do you help show that you should become part of the stable? Now, I just want to preface this by saying that it does not take long to become part of the stable. Sorry, I’m chronically dehydrated since I got to Iceland. Just give me one second.

I asked an editor point blank the other day in a workshop: How long does it take for people to become part of your stable? How many assignments, how many months, whatever? And I’d love for you guys to guess how many months he said. Just chime in in the chat box. So, this particular editor was doing a session on essentially how to work well with editors, how to work with them on an ongoing basis, how to become part of the stable, more or less.

He talked about pitching, but he also talked about the ongoing relationship, and he talked about his own frequent contributors, and frequent contributors for other publications, and he also manages more than one publication and has been an editor of a different publication in the past. Oh, hi, Lenora. So, a couple of you got it. So, two to three months was what he said.

I see a lot of five, six months. One person said one month. It can happen, but it’s usually two or three. Two or three articles or two or three months. Okay? So, that is not that long, guys. Somebody asked me the other day: How long does it take you to set up a recurring income as a travel writer? And if you’re doing something on contract like content marketing or getting writing gigs online where they’re going to assign you a certain amount of stuff every month, it can be much faster.

You can put in your — you can set up your whole income in a week, if you bust your butt marketing. With magazines though, you can definitely spend a month pitching a bunch of different places, and then get some assignments, do those assignments, figure out which editors you don’t want to keep working with. And we’re going to talk about that at the end of the webinar as well, which ones you don’t want to keep in your own stable.

And then after two or three months, have a brand-new set of editors that you are working with regularly that you like, and they like you, and you have your work. You have your work planned out for the next year. So, this isn’t something that takes forever to set up. If that’s too long for you, and you need an income more quickly, I recommend going the content marketing route, but this is not the type of thing where you have to wait two or three years.

Sorry, Donna, ask me that question again at the end of the call. Okay? Because it’s not quite relevant to what we’re talking about right now. So, let’s talk about a couple different ways to become part of the stable. So, again, I’ve put these kind of in order. The order isn’t quite as clear as earlier where one is infinitely more important than the next one. So, you can do a combination of all of these different ways of being part of the stable. But some will get you there faster.

Having a specialty the editor desperately needs is one of the things that’s going to get you there faster. So, I’m going to tell you three different stories about this, and they’re all slightly different situations. So, the editor of Northwest Travel and Life, which like Sunset or Coastal Living, is a major regional publication, but primarily in the Northwest. So, you won’t see it on newsstands if you live anywhere else, but it’s kind of the major regional travel publication there.

He was looking for somebody who could cover basically architecture, but something a bit specific. So, it was like someone who is very familiar with the architectural history of the Northwest. So, not just architecture, but of his area and of specific types of buildings. So, this is not going to be something that every writer who pitches him has the reporting where I’ll potentially do this. He wanted somebody who already had a familiarity.

He had spent a while kind of waiting for pitches to come in or grooming one of his writers. That wasn’t working. He went on a website where you can put out a call for writers. He got a lot of people back. He had tried to work with some of them. It didn’t work out. He even went so far as, I think, to post on Craigslist or something that he was looking for a writer who could work in the specialty.

He still couldn’t find anybody. So, part of the story is how all these people didn’t work out. Why did these people not work out? We’ll get to that in one of the next couple slides. But what he ultimately had to do was he had to cruise the table of contents of other magazines and find somebody by poaching them from another magazine that was what he was looking for, and write to that person and ask if they would be interested in writing for his magazine.

If you have an area of specialization — I mentioned this when we were talking earlier about the Gourmet Traveller WINE Magazine. If you have an area of specialization that is hard for the editor to get enough articles in that area, you are golden. The editor might have spent ages looking for this person, and you just have no idea. And you can often use that area of specialization not just for editors who are desperate because they don’t have a writer, but for editors who are desperate because they have a writer who is not working out.

And I think I have a specific quote from this editor in a couple slides. So, I’ll just tell you the short version of this. But the editor who lead the panel on how to work with editors and how to build relationships with editors, one of the magazines that he edits is about boating. And it’s about boating in a specific geographic area. And so, some of the sections are more travel-oriented, and some of the sections of the magazines are more technical. And so, he really needed people with that background.

And he had somebody who had been working with the magazine for a very long time, longer than he had even been there, and this person just started essentially to flake. And he had to say to the guy one day, “You’re just — your heart is just not in this anymore, right?” And he was like, “Yeah, I just am not really interested in doing this anymore.”

And then he had to find somebody quite suddenly, but it turned out that one of his other writers had said, “Oh, by the way, I also have this background. In case you need something for that section. I know so and so is writing it right now.” And so, he was able to turn to this other writer that he had worked with that he didn’t use for this specialty in the past, but who had it, and immediately give that writer that column.

I’ve had a similar situation where I was writing for a couple magazines that were under one editor, and he also had a magazine that was about meetings, about sort of people who plan conferences and things like that. And I had been writing for some other magazines about conferences for some time, and had developed quite a Rolodex, so to say, of contacts, and I knew the industry very well.

And my editor at this other publication had kind of asked me if I’d be interested in, writing for the meeting magazines, but I had a non-compete, so I couldn’t do it. And then somebody who wrote several columns for him was going on maternity leave. And so, he basically said, “Look, I can give you two columns for the next this much time.” And I said, “Okay. Well, like I guess I can do that. How long is it going to be?”

And I got that all figured out. And then what happened was that I had so impressed them slash done better, had more knowledge of the industry in the time I had taken over those columns, that when she came back from maternity leave, they rearranged to give her some other stuff so that I could keep those columns. So, if you just know something very, very well, and again, it can be architecture, it can be technical boating aspects, it can be having the right contacts, you can warm your way in into these things, even if there is already a regular contributor there.

So, this is what I was saying. Even though editors prefer to work with people they already know, you can still get in there, guys. You still can. So, don’t be crazy part two. Now, I just told you about this boating guy, right, who basically had stopped turning in his work, or he had started turning it in later, later, later. So, this is one type of crazy, but this isn’t the crazy that I want to talk to you about. Don’t be crazy after you get the assignment as to supposed to in your pitch letter means don’t start telling the editor your whole life story.

Don’t start telling the editor, “Oh, I’m so sorry, I didn’t respond to your email within one hour. My dog is really sick, and then I got a call from the hospital because my grandmother just had surgery-” It is not only not the editor’s business, it is unprofessional, and the editor who is strapped for time will be like, “Why is this person sending me these emails that I need to read to see if there’s actually something important at the end because I have an assignment going on right now? I would rather work with somebody else who isn’t sending me emails like this. Okay?”

I have one person who writes for the database who I think might even be on here right now. There she is. Hi, Vanessa. Who is fantastic. We met in London the other day, and she’s going on I believe it is a long like five-week trip or something to Costa Rica to go scuba diving because she’s a certified scuba instructor as well. And she’s just going to leave all her work. She’s just going to figure out when to do it. I do the same thing.

I’m in Iceland right now for a conference, but I’m doing this call. And I have another writer who will tell me, “Oh, I’m going to be in such and such place between this and this day. I’m going to be in such and such place between this and this day. I’m leaving on this day to go blah, blah, blah.” And I’m like, “I don’t care. You have your work, and you have assignments, get them done and tell me when you’re going to give them to me. I don’t need to be remembering your travel schedule. I need to know when I’m getting these articles from you and know that they will actually come in on at that time.”

Crazy seems like a bit of a strong word here, but oversharing might be another word. But essentially, don’t be unprofessional is really what it comes back to. Keep the personal out of your interactions with your editors, unless they have very gently opened that door to becoming slightly more friendly. Now, part of this being professional thing is remembering that you are on the same team, and that you have the same goals.

And when you start talking too much about what your personal challenges are, or other deadlines you have, or anything like that, you’re talking about your own goals, and not the shared goals that you have with the editor. And so, these times when an editor emails you an edit, or asks you if you can change something, or any other request like that, that you take as an affront; an affront to the quality of your work, to some agreement that you believe that you had, what have you.

You have lost sight of the mutual goal, which is to put out a clean, interesting article for the editor’s publication and focus on your own personal goal. And this always leads to bad things. Okay? It’s the same way as you if you have a significant other or a spouse, or if you ever have had a significant another in your life, and you’re having a spat about something.

These spats tend to escalate once people defensively retreat into only caring about their own interests. So, when you retreat into caring only about your own interests, what keeps the editor from doing the same thing? What keeps the editor from just saying in the middle of the assignment, “You are too much of a pain to work with. I would rather get somebody reliable in my stable who is just going to say, ‘Yeah,’ and turn this around in two days to do this than continue dealing with you, even though you have a good idea and we agreed that you would do this assignment”?

Don’t put the editor on their back feet, so to say. Don’t make the editor defensive by being that way yourself in your emails, or in your tone, or anything like that. So, related to that — I’m going to switch to the next side and come back. Related to that is say yes. Okay? Now, I’m going to talk about the caveats about those particular types of saying yes. But I popped in some quotes here from an editor panel that I wanted to share with you.

“Nothing should ever be a problem for you that we ask you to do.” Again I’ll talk about caveats about this later, but this is from the editor’s mouth. “The editor is always right, even when they’re not. Don’t tell them you’re too busy, you have another assignment, or don’t have time for them.” Now, I am super the champion of writer’s rights. So, like I said, I will talk about the times that you should put your foot down about this in the back or later in the call, but this is how the world is for editors. Okay?

This is really important to know that if you want to be part of the stable, this is how you need to appear to them. You can go complain to your significant other, or your spouse, or your friends about how crazy this editor is, and so on, and so forth, but in your actual correspondence, if you want to have a relationship with them, this is how you need to appear. I had an editor who, again, like I said, you don’t tell them when you’re going on vacation.

I was actually going to be not on email for a while. And so, I told an editor that I’d literally email like every other day. “Look, I’m gone this time. I’m not going to take assignments. I’m gone.” And he had a whole feature fall through in one of his publications, and he wrote me, and he was like, “Look, I know you’re on vacation. Do you have anything, even something you’ve already written for another magazine that I could just rewrite?”

Literally, this is how desperate he was. He was like, “Do you have anything? Like anything at all?” And I felt bad, and I didn’t just want to give him something horrible. So, I went and hid out somewhere, and I wrote him a piece in a couple days, a whole feature based on something I had already done, but I had to rewrite it. So, that’s the kind of thing that will make an editor love you forever.

And I’m not saying that you should interrupt your five-year anniversary to write a feature for an editor, unless it’s a really, really lucrative and valuable relationship for you. And then it might make sense. But there’s smaller versions of that, right. There’s like, “Can you — do you have photos for this? I know we didn’t ask you for photos, but it turns out we couldn’t find the ones we needed, or we couldn’t get a photographer,” something like that. “Do you have them?” Okay?

These are the kind of things that coming through for an editor, like I said earlier, making the editor’s life easier, is the single biggest thing that you can do because there’s a human psychological tendency that if you help someone, they want to help you. And just getting your work done, just doing the assignment, to an editor doesn’t insight that. That’s not helping them. That’s doing what you have been paid to do. But going above and beyond does.

It does insight the tendency in them. So, related to this though, this is the flip side of going above and beyond that often people miss. I’m curious. How many of you guys, before you file a story or a piece, check, double check that your assignment letter and that your pitch letter actually corresponded with what you ended up writing, what you ended up filing?

You go back and you double check that every single thing you said in your pitch that you were going to include you’ve actually included. Great. I’m so glad to see at least one of you doing that. Oh, good. Good, good, good. Because this is a really easy thing to forget. You might have said in your pitch, “I’m going to mention this, this, and this,” and then as you were researching, you found this other thing that was interesting, or the real story was really this.

So on and so forth. Or you just really liked this story from a particular angle, and that angle just didn’t include this thing. And then you go to turn it in, and the editor is like, “Well, where is blah, blah, blah?” So, write what you were assigned, in part, is did you write what you told the editor you were going to write. But another part of this is are you and the editor both understanding what you said you were going to write the same way. Okay?

This is actually the much tougher part, and the part where a lot of us run into problems. So, I’ve seen a lot of people in different Facebook groups that I’m in say — I just saw a sob story about this today actually. That say things like, “I wrote this piece. I sent it to the editor. They weren’t very happy with it, and they wrote me back with all these questions and all these changes. And I did those, and then I sent it to them, and now, they’ve sent me back even more.”

I know exactly why this happens, and in fact, when I do rewrites of things that are massive rewrites, I always need to go back two or even three times. And that’s why I have a rule with the database that when I’m doing trial assignments, which are paid, but when I’m doing trial assignments with writers, if that first version that comes to me, if I see it and I know that I will have to do another round of edits after that, they’re out because it’s this rabbit hole of edits.

And so, editors don’t do this with you because they’re not interviewing you for long-term assignments in the same way. They just get the assignment from you, and then they decide not to assign you something again. But editors can see when they get something from you if it’s one round of edits away from what they wanted, or if it’s multiple round of edits away from what they wanted.

But you don’t know that because the whole reason it’s that many round of edits away from what they wanted is because you didn’t understand what they wanted. And this is a really, really tough thing to start to get in line with. And so, I highly recommend if you and your past history of writing have had this happen to you where editors come back with what seems to you like an unreasonable number of changes, take a couple minutes later today, or tomorrow, or next week, to look at your pitch letter.

And to look at what they asked you to change, and see what the relationship between those things was because I really bet you that the editor thought they were getting something else from you from your pitch than what you ended up giving them. And what you gave them was in line with your idea of the piece, which may have been formulated before you even picked up this magazine, before you even saw this section of this magazine.

And it may have been your idea of the story, and you just didn’t mold it to that magazine enough, and you just wrote it the way you originally imagined. So, a really clear thing on this, like I included this quote here. “Don’t send a 3,500-word story, especially past deadline, when I’ve commissioned 2,000 words.” This is a big editor pet peeve to write over word count. I’ve also heard people say you should always write 10% over word count so they can cut whatever they want and have it then be in the word count.

I’ve also seen people ask do I get paid based on the word count I’ve turned in. No, you are always paid based on the word count that was assigned. But this is a really big one. Okay? So, sometimes you realize that the story does just need to be longer. Then you need to bring that up to your editor, and especially if the editor has asked you for a bunch of new stuff. I see this happen a lot.

If the editor has asked you for a bunch of changes, then you need to say, “I can’t incorporate this new information and stay at the same word count. Do you want to make the word count longer, or would you like to take something out?” And this gets to my next — hopefully, my next point. I will come back to that. Trust and communication. Literally, everything in the editor-freelancer relationship, whether you are writing for a magazine, or a website, or just doing content marketing, comes back to these two things.

All professional relationships come back to these two things. The first step is to build trust, and the second part is to maintain it with communication. I have found unilaterally that everything freelance relationship that goes bad happens because this is broken, and once the line initially become tenuous, once it becomes frayed, it’s not fixed with communication, and it snaps.

And you could never put does threads back together. So, all of these different little things that I’m talking to you about are all related to this. Okay? They’re all related to building trust, or maintaining trust, and the types of communications that flow into that. So, we’re over time. So, I just want to redo this quote, which is related to what we were talking about before about showing that you have ideas and showing that you can step up.

This is the editor quote that I was telling you about earlier with the guy that flaked on him after 30 years. So, he said, “I definitely have a stable, but I have few people that are difficult to work with and kind of annoying, but the stuff they do is specialized, so I put up with it. Some regular people send in great stuff all the time, and then they send me stuff I’m not super stoked about, but it’s like the free one you give away to keep the relationship going.”

What he means here is I’m not going to dump somebody just because they sent in one story I didn’t like. But he said with the boat guy it became — there was a word missing here. I couldn’t figure out what it was. It became that he was like the Monday after deadline. Then it was a week before the issue went to press. Then it was the Monday of the week that the issue was going to press. Then it was the day before the issue was going to press.

And then he missed a deadline. And that was when he put his foot down. Now, this is really generous that he let this go on for like six weeks. And a lot of times, people come to me freaking out because they missed a deadline by like a day or two, but it’s really important to see here that when you have the trust, you can do that, and it’s ok. But to go back to what we were talking about here, if the trust is already frayed, you can’t get away with that.

You need to keep the trust strong with communication. And in this case, the communication was that the guy had been writing for the magazine for 30 years. So, there was a history there. Okay? So, let’s talk about times when you are thinking that this just sounds so too easy, and you think that you’ve done all these things right, and it’s just not happening.

Like I said about going back and checking your pitch against the thing that the editors came back to you about, if you are having trouble with all of these different things that I’ve mentioned will help you to build a relationship. It probably means that you have conceived them differently than the editor. And that’s why there’s a gap. Because it really is just that simple. I hear editors say all of these pieces of advice time and time again, and if everyone was doing them, they wouldn’t have to keep saying them.

But the thing is that the people aren’t, like I said earlier in response to Donna’s question about can you really still pitch those editors if they’re so attached to their stables. People in stables stop doing all of these things that we talked about. I told you about the boating guy, right. Or you’re just better than the person in the stable, and the editor realizes that, and they replace the person.

It’s all about building the trust and maintaining it with communication. And as people who were already in the stable break those various things, you have a way in. Or like the gentleman who needed the architecture person, there might be a hole in the stable that the editor is really trying to fill. And as long as you can check these boxes, as long as you can be reliable and say, “Yes,” and step in when needed, you can be there.

I told her I was going to talk about sometimes when you do not want to be part of the stable. And when I talk about the timeline of building up your own stable of editors, I’ve talked about how you send a bunch of pitches, you do the first round of assignments, and then you figure out who you want to keep working with. Okay? Because you don’t want to make your own stable with any editor that will have you.

And not just because it sucks, or they pay low, or whatever, but because it’s infections. The bad feelings that you feel about an editor who’s mistreating you will seep into your other relationships. They’ll draw away your desire to work, or your desire to pitch, or your interest, and it’ll have a negative impact on everything else. So, if you have one assignment, or even if it’s your eighth assignment, or fifteenth assignment with an editor.

If you have an assignment that really puts you off, that really makes you feel like that trust is broken, and that the communication is not fixing it and is not keeping it up, then that means that that editor does not have a place in your stable. So, I’m just going to go through this quickly cause I know we’re over time. So, one of the ways is they have a crazy contract. Condé Nast is famous for having a contract where they buy all book and movie rights to your ideas, and you aren’t allowed to work with any competitive magazines for the next year.

That’s crazy. Don’t do it, in my opinion. If you really want the clip, you can do it, but in my opinion, a crazy contract does not make a long-term relationship. Similarly, and this is me. You can choose to go the other way. But publications that pay on publication. So, that means they don’t pay you until the issue with your article on it comes out, and you have no control over when that is because it might come out in a different issue than they’ve mentioned in your contract or in your assignment letter.

You basically have no idea when you’re getting paid. I don’t deal with that. I don’t think you should either. There’s plenty of publications that pay on acceptance, and the ones that pay on publication know it sucks for writers. I have heard this from the editors. They know that they are doing a disservice to their writers. So, don’t put up with it. Only write for places that pay on acceptance, especially for people on your stable.

If you want to write periodically for people who pay on publication, fine. But in terms of your stable, you want to know what day that check is coming, especially if you’re waiting for it every month. Now, if you have filed a story, and we talked about how busy editors are, they aren’t necessarily going to write you the next day and say, “Oh, this is great,” or the next day and say, “Oh, here. I have a couple questions.” It might be two weeks, it might be two months, it might be four months, and you have no idea.

But if you feel like it’s been a long time, and the date of publication that you discussed is coming up, and you haven’t heard from them, and you write them, and they don’t write you back. They just say, “Oh, I’m sorry. I’ve been busy. I’ll get back to you when I can,” that’s a red flag. That means that that editor does not belong in your stable because they just don’t care about their writers. Okay? And the reason I say that you’ve written them and you followed up, this is important because sometimes things happen.

Sometimes there’s fires that need to be put out. Okay? Or sometimes it’s just not on their schedule to be editing that piece right now. So, if in your initial story with an editor you find yourself in one of these situations, don’t add them to your stable. Likewise, if with your first assignment you find it really painstaking to be paid by the publication, and I don’t just mean like in terms of the timeline. I mean the time when they’re supposed to pay comes up, and you write the editor, and you write the editor, and you write the editor.

And on the third writing they get back to you and say, “Oh, I don’t know. Accounting has it. You’ll have to ask them.” That’s not something you want to be dealing with every month. So, that’s not somebody you want to continue to be writing for. So, it goes too far outside of the scope. So, what the scope means, if you don’t know, the turn scope. Scope is kind of the breath, the outline, the parameters of the agreement. So, if you have agreed that you will write a piece that is 1,500-words, and you write it.

And then the editor says, “Oh, can you also do a sidebar on this? Oh, can you also do a sidebar? Oh, can you also do photos?” And they just assume that you’re doing all of that for the original rate, that is outside of the scope. If you haven’t discussed photos in your initial discussions when the editor said the price range, and then they come back and ask you for photos, then you say, “What is the fee for these?”

And if they say, “Oh, there’s no fee. All of the writers have to provide photos with their pieces, then you essentially say, “Screw you,” and you provide the photos for that time, and then you don’t write for them again. If they say, “Oh, this is not…” then you say, “Okay, great. Thanks.” And you decide if you want to work within that rate. Okay? But don’t let them just presume that they can ask you — no, sorry, that they can expect you to do something else they didn’t ask you about before without asking you if it’s okay.

If the editor says, “Oh, our photos fell through. Do you have photos we could use this time?” That’s different. That’s doing the editor a favor, and that can help you later on. Now, if they change what they want after you turn it in not because you didn’t understand the assignment, but because of something like a crazy publisher or an editor above them that they can’t control, that’s not something that you want to deal with every month.

Those are the times that you don’t want to work with the editor. But why if I didn’t mentioned something on that list, and you just feel like you have no idea what’s going on with an editor, with the assignment with your general interactions with the magazine? Like you just — when you’re confronted with that publication or those emails, you just kind of feel a little lost, and scared, and out of your depth.

That also means that you shouldn’t add them to your stable. People should only be in your stable who are easy for you to work with and make you happy. You enjoy the interactions that you have with the editor and the pieces that you’re doing. Not just because it’s nice or it’s fun, but because that breeds longevity, that breeds happiness with what you’re doing, which brings better work. Okay?

Those are really the criteria for you to decide if somebody should be in your stable as opposed to for the editor to decide if they should put you in their writer’s stable.

If you’ve got any questions, you can hit me up at questions@dreamoftravelwriting.com. And I’m so pleased to have seen all of you guys this week. It’s really nice to be back seeing you live, and interacting with you, and having questions.

On the topic of questions, I know there were a couple that came up that I missed during the session. So, feel free to drop those back in the chat box, and I’ll get to them now. Thanks so much, you guys. So, Donna asked: When you’re writing a pitch, should you say I would like to propose a, name piece for a magazine, or should you say article?

I think the question is should you say piece or article, and that’s totally interchangeable, but in terms of — I think this is the line that I use at the close of the magazine because I would never start a pitch saying, “I would like to propose.” I would always start a pitch with the lead of the article itself. So, something interesting; an interesting fact, or an anecdote, or a scene. The second paragraph, I do say, “I’d like to propose a thing.”

This might be the second paragraph. So, I typically would say the name of the section. So, let’s say like a piece for the — I’m trying to think of — for connections that’s like the intro of the front-of-book in Hemispheres. I would say like, “I’d like to propose a 500-word piece on the food scene in Adelaide, Australia for connections.” I wouldn’t say the name of the magazine in that middle paragraph there. I hope that answered your question.

Carrie. Do you have a structure layout sample I could look at and use as a guideline? Structure of what, Carrie? Is this for the pitch? For a travel destination article. No, I don’t, but I — in Pitchapalooza right now we’ve got some people doing some really nice article breakdowns. If you want a structure layout sample, I would say go to like AFAR. Their features are usually pretty clear in terms of layout.

I would say go to AFAR and take a couple of their features, and break them up into quote, background, history destination info, something like that, and do a couple of those, and you’ll see the structure emerge because it tends to be pretty standard for features. If you want to know something more like a magazine section, those it depends entirely on the magazine and the section itself.

That’s why I don’t just say, “Hey, everybody. Here’s how to write a travel destination article,” because it’s different for every magazine, and you should really hone yourself to the structure of that particular magazine uses. But for general destination features, AFAR is very kind of literary.

A lot of people that write for them teach writing on a literary level like for NYU and things like that. So, that’s a good one to look at to learn feature structure, I would say.  Okay. I think I got all the questions, or if so the people who have asked them, and they had left and not reposted them. So, thanks so much, you guys. I’ll catch you all later.

How To Break Your Trip Into The Maximum Number of Articles Transcript

Download (PDF, 376KB)

This week I’ve got a lot of slides for you. I went a little crazy on slides. It’s because I find this to be one of the most important topics in terms of pitches. What I find is often that people they’re having trouble coming up with ideas or rather they don’t say that they’re having trouble coming up with ideas. They say that they don’t pitch or that they don’t have enough work. When I dig into why, it’s typically because they aren’t pitching enough of the right ideas. They tend to pitch a trip as if a trip is a story and I know we’ve talked on past webinars about how one trip is a home for many stories and some different ways to look at your trips and some different ways to look at pitching. I want to really dive in today about how we parcel out those trips into different very thin slices of angles and why we need to do that.

If you saw the email reminder today about the webinar, you saw the story about a travel writer that I had chatted with recently when I was in London for World Travel Market and he’s a former PR person. He’s not scared or shying away from pitching like a lot of people do, but I was still really impressed by the number of stories that he gets from every trip. So he told me that he aims to have ten to twelve stories from each trip that he writes when he first gets home, not even eventually down the line, but right away. I’m going to talk about the numeric reasons why you really need to be doing that and how many pitches you need to send to do that in order to be a sustainable freelancer. Then we’re going to talk about three different ways to break down your trips and then I’m going to take three trips that are all from if you have my book there are itineraries in the back of the book and you can also get the handouts in the handout section and we’re going to go through those.

So it always boggles my mind when people tell me that you can’t earn money freelancing because my answer is essentially “well I’ve tried and I’ve earned money, so have you tried?” It’s always the people who haven’t tried because they’ve just been told that you can’t earn money or they’ve been trying sort of the wrong things. So on all of our webinars we love to talk about how to do things differently. Now I’m not going to say the “right” way because right is different for everyone, but how to do things in a way that I’ve seen for myself and for other people that leads to sustainable travel writing income.

What does sustainable travel writing income mean? In my book I have (and I’ve just pulled these right out of the book, so if you have my book you’ve already seen these) I have three different ways depending on what is important to you to earn six figures as a travel writer. So six figures breaks down into $8,333.33 and so on and so forth per month. For the purposes of these breakdowns I’ve rounded that up to $8500 a month, which seems like so much if you just look at it as this big round number. The things is that when you break that down into a number of things, like a number of tasks completed, a number of projects pitched, it doesn’t actually seem so bad as long as you’re keeping your rate for all of those things pretty high.

That does seem like a little bit of a road block to anybody who’s used to earning $25 a blog post or something like that and you can reference the first webinar that we did on six figure or high income travel writing for some more ways to boost you’re travel writing income if that’s something you’re struggling with. For right now, we’re going to assume, or rather I have data on this, but we’re going to go off of the notion that it is possible to get paid well for your travel writing and these are some ways to do it. If you want to earn a high income, you value your freedom, then it’s good to have different copywriting projects or content management projects that you’ve booked in advance that you can do on your own schedule. If you’re really interested in trips, you can do that with a mix of content marketing, doing things for a tour company, as well as articles.  Now we’re getting into articles, which is what we’re going to talk about today.

If you want to earn six figures and you’re writing primarily for small publications, you’ll see that you still need to do seven articles for $500 a month, including this other type of content work. Now if you only want to get published in magazines, you have to do higher income articles because otherwise, the time that you spend writing and researching articles and pitching just doesn’t work out. So obviously, in order to get these big numbers, and in order to have this many clients on retainer if you’re doing content marketing, or in the case of articles, to have this many articles every month, you have to really hustle. That means two things.

On the one hand, you have to be confident. People who hustle, who pitch regularly, who put themselves out there, know that what they’re doing has value to the person that they’re trying to sell it to. This is something that a lot of people struggle with when they’re starting out. Either they are offering something inferior. For instance, you think that you have the perfect article idea for this magazine, but it really wouldn’t fit anywhere in that magazine and so you have a confidence problem in that you have an inferior product that you’re too enthusiastic about offering. Whereas what I’ve noticed a lot of people do is they have great ideas and they’re very astute and very observant and have done great research for their trips, but they don’t really think that the magazine would buy it, even if it’s perfect for the magazine. Especially this time of year when people are doing annual reviews and things like that (and we’re going to cover that on the blog next week) this is a really great time to figure out where you are on the spectrum. Are you too under confident in your hustling, or are you over confident about pitches that might be off the mark? Because these are two things that can contribute to you not getting the number of pitches accepted that you’d like.

If you want to be like this gentleman in London that I mentioned and have a really solid number of articles that you’re assigned for every trip, you need to have a pitch pipe line. What this means is that you need to go backwards. What I showed you earlier were some breakdowns that said how you can hit six figures with your travel writing through different types of writing. The thing is that, depending on who you are and what type of writing you want to do and what type of magazines you want to be writing for, you’re going to have different numbers in those numbers of course. Those are just very very general calculations. I’m going to go through a couple different breakdowns depending on pitch success rates and different types of desired incomes and show you approximately how many pitches you need to be sending for different types of articles in terms of price range in order to hit your numbers.

Here is, for example, I’m assuming somebody sort of new. They’ve done their homework, they’ve learned about pitching, they know a little bit about magazines, but not so much that they have a lot of clips. So we’re going to say that they have a 25% success rate. Before you tell me that seems really high, I’ve seen a lot of new people have a higher rate than this if they’re pitching properly and not because they’ve pitched before, but just because they’ve learned the process. So we’re going to say a 25% success rate and this person is new and they are just trying to replace their income from their previous job they worked in a second or third chair market and a sort of soft position so like marketing or advertising or something like that. So they’re looking to get $4,000 per month. 

When you do the math of what you need to aim at if that is your success rate and that’s the income you want to earn, it means you need to be pitching at and you need to be aiming your pitches at this type of income in order to hit your desired income with the percentage success rate you have. So you need to pitch at $16,000 which sounds super scary, but the reason I’m showing you this is to go back to that hustle point that you can think like “Oh I’m pitching enough”, but the thing is you really aren’t. If this is your success rate, this is what you need to be aiming for in order to hit your desired income. Of course if you hit more, that’s fantastic, but this is what you need to aim at. So if you’re new and that’s your success rate, if you are only pitching $100 assignments, and I’m totally discounting the $50 and $25 blog posts here because obviously they’re not going to help you make your income if you look at this. So you need to be pitching 160 pitches at a $100 rate to hit this goal. Or, $300 which is a very normal rate for small niche magazines or regional magazines that are quite small for their features and correspondingly these also have a higher assignment rate. You need to be pitching 53 of those. 

If you’re pitching a $500 article which would be like a department or front of book column in a larger magazine, you need to be pitching 32 of those.  If you’re pitching $1,000 articles which could also be a department that’s a bit longer. So you know those sections in the front of a magazine—they’re profiling a restaurant—those sort of things in a large magazine that would be about $1 per word for 1,000 words, so that’s $1,000. You need to be sending 16 of those pitches. 

If you have a 40% success rate, this is somebody who’s mid-career, they’ve been traveling for a little while, maybe they’re doing it full time, but they’re not at the income that they’d like yet. Then you need to be doing, and your goal for this is $5,000 per month. You need to be pitching at $12,500. You’ll see that this is quite a decrease from our last slide with the new person who had to be pitching at $16,000. As your success rate of pitching goes up (which is what we’re going to talk about when we talk about breaking down ideas) as your pitch success rate goes up, you need to be aiming at a much lower number in terms of the income. If you’re trying to get $5,000, which is more than the last slide, but you have a better pitch success rate, you’re pitching at a lower dollar amount. It’s very cool how this works out. I promise I double checked this math. In this case, you need to be pitching at 42 of these $300 features for regional magazines or niche magazines or 25 $500 assignments or only 12.5 so say 13 pitches for $1,000 assignments. So now this is starting to look a lot more feasible.

Now we’re going to look at the experienced successful sustainable freelancers. I’ve put this even higher than a base six figure income. This person is looking to earn $10,000 per month from their travel writing. Now most people would say that’s just insane, but it’s really not. In fact when you look at these numbers, you’ll see that if you have a high pitch success rate, even though I’ve doubled the desired income from the last slide, they still need to pitch less than the last slide to make the percentage.

This is why making your pitches more accurate is simply the most important thing you can do to grow your travel writing income. For this person they only need to be pitching at $11,111 of assignments. That can be done with 37 pitches for these $300 assignments, but I’m assuming somebody with this income and this success rate is not pitching at those. So if they’re pitching at $500 assignments, they need to try 23 pitches. If they’re pitching at $1,000 assignments they need 11 pitches, but these people are probably pitching at $2,000 and $3,000 assignments, so they’re actually not writing that many pitches per month, which is the interesting conundrum, that when we do our travel writer focus groups and when I chat with travel writers, you often find that the more experienced people are, they’re pitching less and not just because they’re better at it but often because they have the confidence.  Like I said earlier, it’s about confidence to pitch for these higher level assignments.

How on earth do we come up with (11 in the case of our 90% success rate experienced freelancer to 160 in the low-end case of our newbie) solid pitch ideas every month? There’s three ways that I like to do this. Now I know I told you that I was going to explain three different ways to do this and I’m going to go through each of these the first two a bit quickly and the last one is the method that we are going to use to do our full breakdowns later on.

Again, if you haven’t already downloaded the handouts on this, make sure you grab those because we’re going to get to those soon. The on-the-road pitch specific note taking thing, I’m going to show you a picture of what mine looks like in the next slide. This is when you’re already on a trip and as you go around and you see things that look interesting you either put them in an Evernote file or you email to yourself or you just jot them down in your notebook to say I think this is an article idea.

The second one is post-trip mind mapping and this happens post-trip when you get home, but you can also do it a little bit pre-trip. Mind mapping around each activity on your trip all of the different ways that you can pitch it. You’ll see the difference in these two is that the on the road pitch is specific note taking you’re doing in a way that focuses you on one avenue, one format, one audience per idea. The point of the mind mapping is to take each experience from your trip and blow it up into as many different places you could send that one experience as possible.

Now the third one that we’re going to go through together is—I don’t have a good name for this so I called it the chronological itinerary breakdown—and this is where you walk through activity by activity, stop-by-stop through your whole trip and write every single place you could possibly pitch each of those moments.

This is a screenshot of a service that I’m using and I just started, but if I like it I’ll tell you guys about it more later, but essentially what you can do is you can email from your email account to this service which is called Ray and you can tag it a certain way and it organizes your ideas for you. You can put a date on it if you want to remind yourself to pitch a certain day. You can also tag it to go to a certain magazine or things like this. So this very random list of stuff is just the ideas that I sent myself when I was on my last trip. So just a bunch of random notes and inside the notes they also have sometimes quotations or I’ve also started writing the introduction or some additional notes on magazines that I might send it to. So this is the on-the-road note taking method.

The pro of this is that when you do it in an unstructured format like this it’s more of just a capture than the very strict spacing of the mind map that we’re going to look at next. There’s a lot of room to write notes and quotes like I talked about and even just to start writing your whole story. I do this sometimes with essays. When I have an idea for an essay, I’ll just be literally like walking across the street and I’ll just start typing an essay on my phone and then when I hit a snag like I’m just not sure what to write anymore, I stop and I email to myself for later.

The cons of this are—and this is why I told you if I like this Ray tool that I’m using, I’ll tell you about it later—that it’s hard to organize these notes if you just have them in Evernote or in your email or something like that. You can tag them and so on and so forth, but getting them to be lined up with a particular magazine or just this is profile versus this is a service or how-to piece, it’s not quite so easy in this sort of ad-hoc note fashion because note taking tools aren’t pitching tools. They’re note taking tools. They’re not organized in a fashion to make us know on a certain date when this magazine is ready for pitches and we need to go and pull up this pitch and send it to that magazine.

I said that we’re working on a solution on here because if any of you were with us on some of our focus groups, we’ve talked a couple times about something that we’ve playfully called the Pitch-O-Matic which my Editorial Director has told me we absolutely cannot use that name. The concept of the Pitch-O-Matic is that you take these notes while you’re on your trip and you email them to the Pitch-O-Matic, and then when you get home you, at a pre-determined date, you say I won’t be ready to pitch these until two weeks after I get back. You start getting your idea that you wrote up matched with magazines in your inbox with a partially written pitch for you to fill out. So that’s something that we’re working on and we hope to have available for you in the near future. In the meantime, if I like this other service I will let you know because it’s a bit expensive, so I wouldn’t recommend it unless I know it really works.

The next option, this is actually from, this is a photo. It’s horrible because I took it from my cell phone, but this is a mind map that somebody made during our Pitchapalooza retreat at the Catskills Retreat Center in November. So for this breakdown, Kathy had gone on a trip to Cape Cod.

Note:  I’m going to also include in the handouts another file which had this breakdown in here. Actually I’ll just send it to you after the call because it’s easier to do that. 

These breakdown your trip sheets. Essentially what you do is a version of what we’re going to do in the chronological breakdown later. You take every experience from your trip and you write it in the middle. In this case an experience might be the amazing dinner that you had with a host family, it might be a hotel that you stayed at. It might be a desert safari. So experience is a very broad category in this case. It’s anything that can be broken down into further slices for your pitching. You write this experience in the middle and then all around the sides you write different slices of that.

In this case, Kathy put a destination. That’s why her mind map is very full because she even has if you look straight down in the middle, she has a number of reasons and then she starts to tick them off here. Her mind map is very full because she didn’t put a thin enough slice here in the beginning. If instead of Cape Cod, she had put afternoon at the beach café or something, then she could have coming off of this like a personal essay about watching her kids play in the sand and thinking about when she was playing in that same sand when she was young. She could have a round-up of the best beach cafes on Cape Cod to spend the afternoon. She could have a service piece of how to make sure you get the waterside table at the beach café and so on and so forth. So when you do this mind map, you take one experience, one location, one moment, and you blow it up. The pros of this are the mind map (which is the point of all my maps) forces you to take one already somewhat narrow idea and break it into many many other related ideas, which is the whole point of what we’re talking about today in terms of slicing your articles.

This is one of the reasons I really like mind mapping. If you just sit there, and I’ve heard in many writing seminars that you should always make yourself sit for ten minutes because if you just go for one minute or two minutes or three minutes, and you think it’s full, you’re going to miss out on some of the really great ideas that come at minute seven. So you’ll sit there for three minutes and write down a bunch of stuff, then you’ll sort of mull over it and you won’t write anything for a little while. Then after a little bit you’ll suddenly start writing again and that’s when you’ll often get some of the really great ideas from minute seven through ten. When you do these, really force yourself to sit with each mind map page or mind map for a little while.

The cons of this—though like I said in the case of Kathy’s breakdown that I just showed you—is that space can be a factor. If you write down something in the middle of your mind map that is too broad, then you’re not only going to find yourself running out of space, you’re going to find your thinking limited by the fact that you’ve run out of space. That means it’s really easy also to get pigeon-holed into overthinking one part of your trip and not thinking about other ones.

Say that you made a mind map, not like Kathy did for all of Cape Cod, but like I suggested for this afternoon at the beach café. If you had made a mind map just for that afternoon at the beach café and you really got a lot of ideas from that, you spend ten minutes on that, then you might think “ok I’m good. I don’t need to do anymore now” and that’s a shame because we really want to get as many ideas from our trip as possible. So because mind mapping is a bit intensive, you can sort of feel not just like ok I’m done I don’t want to do anymore, but also like I’ve got a lot of ideas about this already and I don’t need to think about any more things on my trip. Like I said, one of my favorite things to do is combine different methods of these three.

This next one, the chronological itinerary breakdown is something that I like to do almost as a check step or as something before the mind map that I talked about.  The process that I use is that I use this chronological itinerary breakdown that we’re going to go through now before I go on the trip, especially if it’s a press trip I’ve been invited to and I’m thinking about accepting it, and then again after the trip. From there I make a list of things either to my map or just sort of informally make article ideas on and then in addition while I’m on my trip, I’ll use that on-the-road note taking method.

When I do my post-trip itinerary breakdown, I’ll match up those things that I wrote down on the trip to the itinerary and then make sure that I’m also putting them through a process like the mind mapping to break them down into as many things as possible. The one issue with the chronological itinerary breakdown is that like mind mapping, but in a different way, it can be time consuming because you have to really create a moment where you can go back in time. I’m often asked what I’m writing about when I’m traveling and I’m almost invariably writing about somewhere else. It’s very rare that while I’m in a place the writing work that I’m doing is related to that place because you need a bit of time to think and digest about what you’ve seen before you write about it to have the best results.

I really like to do this while I’m on the airplane, do the chronological itinerary breakdown. I’ll sit there and almost diary style, I’ll go through what happened to me on the trip and a particularly effervescent experience that really just stands out, especially the ones that involve people that I don’t typically capture on the itinerary. I’ll list them all. The things is that I love doing that on the airplane because you don’t have email, you don’t have phone calls, you don’t have anything else that you’re doing and so you can really do that time travel step, where you go through your itinerary and you relive it in your mind and make sure that you’re really capturing every single opportunity. Of course the pro of that is like I just said, you make sure that you capture every single opportunity, but in order to really do that effectively, you need to give yourself the mental space to do that time traveling completely because if you try to rush it, then you’re going to miss out on things.

Like I said, I like to do a combination of these, but I think that for newer writers or for writers who feel like they aren’t publishing as much as they would like, this is a really fundamental tool that should be the one that you focus on. Like I said, it’s time consuming, but it’s time consuming because it gives us more ideas.

Note: Let’s start now to go through, if you haven’t downloaded your handouts, grab those now. I just want to say in the meantime while you guys are pulling those up a couple things. While you are, hold on I think I might have missed a slide, oh yes ok. 

When you are trying to find the maximum number of article ideas, it really really helps to know what magazines are looking for. What that means is that if you are not reading magazines regularly, you’re going to have a very hard time doing this and you might think that you’ve come up with some good ideas, but the thing is those ideas will not be publishable. They’ll be blog posts. They’ll be something that doesn’t have a home. 

I always encourage people, especially newer writers, but really everybody, to not think that they have an article idea if it doesn’t have a home because the thing is this—if you pitch something that doesn’t have a specific section of a magazine that it belongs to, even if it’s a wonderful idea and it’s a really interesting story, you’re going to get a no from the editor. I’ve had a ton of really lovely no’s, not a ton, but a handful of really lovely no’s when I was starting. They’re kind of nice because the editor will write you back and they say they’d love to see the story later, but they’re always kind of sad because the story’s not getting published. So it’s great that the editor wants to see the story later, but you need another editor to buy it, right? In order to save yourself from those pleasant no’s and get an even more pleasant no where the editor says “Oh my God that’s such a great idea, I just assigned that to somebody else. What else do you have for me?”

You have to make sure that the idea fits into the magazine. To do that, if you’re not already reading regularly, then you need to either start reading more magazines regularly or start reading a resource like our Travel Magazine Database or like some of the other things out there that tell you what magazines are available to get yourself a wider mindset on what magazines publish. I’ve pulled out some things and these are all from entries on the Travel Magazine Database that we featured in I think about the last three weeks or so. I’m just going to quickly run through these so that you can hear some of the interesting (and perhaps things that you hadn’t thought of before) types of things that magazine editors not just are looking for, but really need to find every single month, something that fits in this very very specific category. These are the kind of things that if you don’t know in advance, you won’t look for them when you’re on the road, and then you won’t be able to pitch that story.

This one I found very cool. This is a British magazine I believe and they take 1,000 word articles, so a really great length about the home or hotel of a notable person that you can stay in. These are the kind of things that are super easy to double check for in every town that you’re visiting.

Here’s another one quite general, Trendwatch, which is about recent trends in the travel industry, 500 word article, but this is for Conde Nast Traveler UK, so that’s going to be $1 or $2 a word so that’s great. There’s cannabis tourism in the United States. We all know about that, so there’s these types of ones are super easy to look out for.

Here’s another one that I thought was really cool that was from Conde Nast Traveler: Snapshot, it’s a first-person description of an encounter with a person in an international location. So all of those little tiny moments that you have, like the family that invited you home for dinner when you met them in their shop or something like that, are great for this Snapshot.

Gourmet travels, this is in Food and Travel, which is a British publication. So this is two articles that have a bunch of side bars about different food or a region. Like how many of us can’t come up with these when we’re traveling somewhere with a great food heritage?

Another one, now we moved on to another food specific publication this is from Saveur, so Eat the World, this had a bunch of different small sections. Some of them are not so small. I think 1,200 words is a really great length. They’re about sort of unusual foods, so ice cream in Cuba or I think beer in Brooklyn is kind of a known thing, but he does it in a very specific way. Long Form, this is another thing in Saveur, offers a lot of opportunity. This is five to six great length articles that look at something quirky about a food that we know well and love. In the one that we’ve highlighted here “In Cod We Trust” this is about Cape Cod, so it would be a great fit for Kathy’s breakdown that I showed you guys earlier. You know another one is the best gin from a Finnish distillery.

These are a lot of things that you can get ideas from even if not from the itinerary from the press trip, but from press releases on the tourism website of the city that you’re visiting. You know I think a lot of us don’t like press releases or we find them annoying when they come in our inbox, but when you’re going somewhere it really pays to hop on the tourism board’s website and see what’s new. A lot of places to put together a monthly things telling you what’s open and I’ve found some really really great new original article ideas from there. I found one that I want to say it was Minnesota. There was a distillery that was aiming to have everything from 100 miles nearby and they were making gin which needs things like citrus and different botanicals. So to replace the citrus they found that spruce tree tips, like the buds of the spruce tree create the same taste as oranges in the gin. So like you really never know what you’re going to find and what gems are hiding in between the lines in those press releases.

Once you’ve become familiar with things like this, you know the previous one Snapshot and the one at the bottom of the page A Meal to Remember, those types of things are going to be completely based on what you find on your trip, but a lot of things like this long form that I talked about, are things that you can find out about in advance and pitch as a peg both financial and to help you get things set up on your trip in advance. Just a couple more here.

This is from Eurowings, which is a European airline magazine. This one is really quirky and I just love it. The questions of the month and there’s several of these about sort of interesting thought provoking trends. Why does my mobile phone always land facedown? This is my personal favorite: How much work do digital nomads really do between coffee? What do Cuban cigar rollers listen to as they roll? These are again you could potentially find out in advance you could find out about them and decide to research them when you land or you could find out about them when you’re there and then pitch them afterwards. Get some business cards so that you can make some phone calls and follow up with people to do additional research after you get back.

I can’t remember where this next one is form Notes From a Farm. This one is a great thing to do, I mean this one is US based, but you follow an ingredient all the way from farm to plate and if you are on a press trip that’s agri-tourism related, this is a great thing.

The next one Best, this is very general and this is the kind of thing that you can easily find somewhere in a press release in advance or in an itinerary and pitch.

Now that we’ve looked at some of these sort of unconventional or very specific rubrics that magazines have, let’s start to go through some itineraries.

Again, I hope you have your handouts ready. We’re going to start with the very first one, which is the Northern Japan itinerary. I’ve copied the whole thing in here because this one is a little shorter I could actually do that. The thing about this trip is it was quite long. I think it was two and half weeks and I actually don’t have a detailed itinerary because our person never gave us one. So this is an incredibly perfect example of why it is very very dangerous to pitch article ideas in advance of your trip. From a financial perspective, it seems great to pitch article ideas in advance of your trip. You know what income you’re going to have after your trip, at least a base, so you know if it makes sense financially for you to go on that trip. However, the problem is you never really know what is going to happen when you go on a trip. I don’t mean that in terms of there could be a natural disaster. I mean that in terms of having complete faith in the people who are organizing your trip, in whatever fashion that may be, that what they have promised you will actually come to pass in order for you to get that story. So it’s incredibly common on press trips, and this was not a press trip, this was actually a private tour company, which you would think would be a little more reliable, but no matter what the setting is it’s incredibly common for an individual stop on the itinerary to be altered or even more so for something that the person planning the tour thought would be of interest to you, to not really be cool enough to work out as an article.

Because of what we’re talking about today as how to break out the maximum number of ideas that you can turn into articles, I want to really draw your attention to this because you might look at an itinerary and see a lot of things that look cool in the same way that when you come up with an idea it sounds like a great idea to you, but to an editor it just looks like a blog post. If that idea, if the Penis Festival, I did take that from the slide so anyone who’s not looking at the slide, if the Penis Festival isn’t actually as cool and intriguing as you thought it would be in advance, that’s not going to make a great magazine article. So one of the things that we’re going to look at as we go through each of the itineraries is not just does this sound like a cool place/activity/meal, but is this a magazine article?

I’ve highlighted some things on here and as we go to the next slide you’ll see some of the ones I’ve pulled out. First, not just because it’s salacious, but because it’s first on the itinerary, there was the Penis Festival and then another one that I had highlighted was the Tsukiji fish market, which is the big famous fish market in Japan and it’s supposed to be closing and moving to a new location. Another thing that we were promised on the itinerary was to sample regional Japanese specialties in Tokyo, to picnic under the cherry blossom trees, and then we were going to move to a different location and go to this ridiculous festival in which people ride, for lack of a better word, a 40-60 feet long tree trunk downhill very dangerously. Then there’s the renowned bathing snow monkeys, the town of Sendai, which is known to be one of the culinary capitals of Japan, local distilleries and breweries in Sendai, and how the local residents there are recovering from the disaster—that was the area that had the tsunami and the nuclear I guess disaster nuclear spill.

And so to sort of the “untrained eye” each of these sounds like it could be an interesting article. The problem is that these aren’t articles. These are just topics. Let’s talk about what really happened here.

The Penis Festival, I have to say, was really not that interesting. It was more or less just a parade of some you know giant phallus sculptures and some rather sillily dressed people. So would I recommend people go to this? I’m not actually sure. This is one of the things that you can get into. If you’ve pitched something in advance, and you go and it’s just not that cool, you find yourself questioning, do I really want to write about this? This is something that I’ve heard a lot of experience writers complain about, that they kind of wish they didn’t have to write because they pitched something in advance. Here are some ways you can spin that: If you go to something that seems like it’s really interesting, as in people will probably want to read about it just for the name…you know shock value like Penis Festival, you can write the sort of contrarian article like is it worth it to go to Japan’s Penis Festival? You can also turn it into a service piece which is more like how to go to Japan’s Penis Festival and actually have a “good time” because it’s not quite as cool as it seems or something like that. So if you have an experience that you’ve pitched in advance, you can sort of turn it in some of these ways to sort of save face, so to say.

Now in a similar somewhat disappointing note, the world famous Tsukiji fish market, in order to visit that, you have to essentially stay up all night on a very cold and wet concrete floor where you wait for like five or six hours in the cold. Not the most pleasant experience and certainly not the exclusive tour experience that most people would imagine. Then when you do go in, no one translates for you, nothing is in English, and you only get to be there for fifteen minutes and they pretty much discourage you to take photos because the main claim of the fish market is for people to sell the fish, not for tourism because they don’t charge you. So yet in here you could write is it really worth it to go to this, but I think with something like this, it’s more important to take the experience and take it away from the visitor perspective and turn it into more of a human interest or informational piece. So in these cases, you know you wouldn’t really know this in advance. 

This is back to why it’s difficult to pitch things in advance, but after the fact, you could take this experience and you could pitch it as a longer form piece about the men who do these auctions and what you know—what their life is like, based on the experience of what you had with all this time sitting there. You can talk about the conditions and you can talk about the frenetic pace and things like that. You can also turn it more into an atmosphere postcard piece. This is a really great thing to do if you don’t really want to have a service element, service things how-to, because it’s not technically something you want to recommend to people. You can essentially make it an armchair travel piece. You can write it as a postcard that’s quite short where you show somebody what the experience is like so that they don’t have to go there themselves.

Another one on here, sampling regional specialties in Tokyo. So I’m not quite sure that this worked out as the tour operator hoped, but if I were to pitch this in advance, I would do my own research and I would go around and I would see what are all the different regions in Japan that are represented in Tokyo and how you could pitch this as a roundup of fifteen places to have take-out all around Japan within Tokyo. You could pitch like what I was talking about in Saveur, they have those food pieces that are not too short. They’re like 1,500 words I think. And you could pitch this as how Tokyo represents all of Japan through its cuisine. So you can take a couple different tacks on this. But even if something like this didn’t work out in the end, it’s broad enough and you’re able to do your own research enough that you could fill that in.

Now picnicking under the cherry blossom trees. This is the kind of thing that if you see something like this that’s very very experiential on an itinerary in advance, you have to naturally think of it like what I was describing as an atmospheric postcard piece, or a feature or something like that. You can also do this as an interview. You can think about finding somebody while you’re on the ground that’s done this every year for 25 years or something like that and interview them about their experience. You can profile the guy who sells, you wouldn’t know this until you got there and looked at the pictures, but in order to picnic in the cherry blossoms, the Japanese have these elaborate tarps that they put on the ground to sit on as they have their picnics. So you could profile the person who sells the tarps and how he got into this business and you know, what he’s seen over the years and the most extravagant cherry blossom picnics and things like this.

For the Onbashira festival, this is the one I was talking about where the people ride the tree down the hills, if I looked at when I looked at the itinerary in advance, I definitely thought that would be one of the richest areas of article ideas and it was, but not necessarily for the reason that you think. So the festival is very crazy and you can easily pitch an atmosphere piece, a long narrative about why they do this from a historical perspective, a narrative about your own first-person experience doing it, a narrative that’s more service oriented, but long explaining in a second-person way how to do it. You can do a round up about other festivals like this that only happen every six years around Japan. You can do a roundup of other festivals to do in that area if you’re coming a year when the Onbashira festival isn’t working. You can do a food oriented round up on the places to eat at the Onbashira festival. You can do an interview with someone who has organized a stall selling food at the Onbashira festival for the last or I guess four five instances in the six years of the festival about their experiences. But there are so many different places that you can take this. 

I found when we were on the ground, that I would never have thought to pitch in advance, is that it’s next to impossible to get into this thing. So despite the fact that we had a tour guide who had planned this in advance, we didn’t get in the first day. Thankfully the festival goes for three days and we were able to go the next couple days, but the first day we just sort of got pushed out of the door. Not because you need tickets, but they have somewhat of an arbitrary tracking system of how many people they allow in and so this led to a more advice oriented piece about how to make sure you get in to the Onbashira festival.

Then the second thing that I would not have known until we got there, is that it’s also very very difficult/next to impossible to actually see the thing, the thing being the part where they actually ride the tree down the hill. There’s quite a lot of other stuff going on at the festival. They carry the tree trunk with this elaborate pulley system pulled by hundreds of people down the less steep slopes of the hill before they get there and in the end, it takes three or four hours for them to actually push the tree trunk over the ledge for the actually very dangerous sliding down part, and so during the many hours in advance of where the tree actually reaches the ledge, people fight over these coveted couple of little spots to see the actual final tree push. 

You can write a service piece that’s oriented around how to get the perfect photo for a photography magazine, or how to have the best seats in the house, or what I would not have known in advance. And this is the kind of thing you would have to do in post-trip pitching: is you can write about how to ride on top of the tree trunk. When I was there, I was just trying to take pictures, actually I was trying to take a video of the people pulling the tree trunk from very far down low and a guy grabbed me and put me on top of the tree trunk and let me ride it for like five minutes and it’s actually not that hard to do. I saw a lot of people do this later, getting on top and taking photos because during the part where it’s moving very slowly, they’re very happy to let you hop on top. So there’s often how-to things that you don’t know until afterwards and with how-to stories, I really recommend holding off on pitching those until after the fact, because unless you know in advance (like if I had done more research I might have understood that it would be hard to get in to the festival) unless you’ve done really deep amount of research, and you know in advance that there’s something tricky or that you need insider knowledge for the experience you’re about to have, the best how-to material really comes during the trip and that makes sense to pitch later.

For this next one, this is a bit general, right? Sendai being the culinary capital of Japan. We talked before in the sampling Japanese in Tokyo part about some different ways that you can spin food stories and so the reason I have both of these in here is that I really found some amazing experience in Sendai that are not the type of things that would be in any guide books. We went to this sushi bar every day for breakfast in the train station, where people wait in line for like an hour and a half and you have this guy make sushi in front of you. It was the quality of some of the top sushi restaurants in Tokyo for a third a fifth the price, but it’s standing out just in a train station sushi bar.

Another one was a whiskey bar that we went to where they only let in about six people at a time, no large groups, and the owner has a stock of incredibly rare hard to find whiskeys from the Royal Scottish Whiskey Society that he not only lets you taste, but he’ll just give you free shots of things that he thinks fits you. So you’ll end up having three to five shots of whiskey for essentially 15 US dollars and remember Japan is not a cheap country. Often in an area that’s less well-known, so for instance Tokyo I could have done a lot of research in advance and pre-pitched some things about the Japanese specialties, but if you’re in area that you’ve sort of heard anecdotally is really great for food, that’s the kind of thing where you often want to wait and do your research on the ground and then you can spin out these stories. You can do atmosphere stories of the two places that I just mentioned. You can do round ups of the best under the radar spots. You can do narrative pieces. So food in general is a really great specialty within travel to have, but it’s also very very rich even if you don’t specialize in it because you know we all have to eat one two three, however busy you are meals a day when we’re on the road and that’s the kind of thing where you can do sometimes a little research in advance, but often times the best stories come from finding people on the street or asking tour guides or asking taxi drivers where to eat.

The next one—local distilleries and breweries—Sendai is an area known for having a lot of these Japanese whiskeys that have become really famous over the years and we went to one of the breweries and this was actually something that I thought about pitching in advance and I’m really glad that I didn’t because tastings, as in like when you go to winery and you have like a tasting, in Japan function very differently than in the US. So we expected to go there and be able to taste very rare things that you couldn’t find anywhere else and probably even buy some bottles, but they don’t have that much in stock. It ended up being a sort of a poor tasting experience and also pretty poor purchasing experience and so I’m not sure that I would recommend people go there for that. However, the distillery tour itself was quite interesting, and so I could write a narrative walking people through, again for the armchair travel angle, the tour of the distillery.

Now in terms of how the local residents are recovering from the disaster, this was another thing that I really wanted to pitch in advance and I’m glad that I didn’t because what I found out is that people are very tight-lipped about it and people talk a lot about how the Japanese government has really controlled the news about the nuclear disaster, and whether it’s still an issue and so on and so forth. Even if you’re trying to get the Japanese people to talk about it, they themselves are very tight-lipped. So you know I could have written an essay about why that is and how it’s a cultural thing and so on and so forth, but it wouldn’t have had the angle that I originally had in mind.

We’re getting close to our time, so I just want to go through this next couple of slides quickly.  So as I went through step by step on the different points of interest in this itinerary, I talked about a couple different articles ideas. So I spent a little bit of time on this, I mean not a little, I spent a while on this last night trying to make sure that I had really covered a lot of different formats because the thing is that when you look at a lot of lists of different magazine ideas, they tend to tell you things like human interest story, food story, as if that’s a different article format. The things is there’s not really so many different article formats.

You can write a profile, which can be hopefully…but doesn’t have to be…based on interviews about a business or a person.

You can write a postcard which is this atmospheric short that I was talking about, which is kind of like a mini version of the armchair travel experience where you focus more on creating a sensation on what that experience was like than necessarily giving a lot of details.

The narrative feature would be the longer version of the postcard. You talk about several different anecdotes of your experience that add up to a point about it. For instance, if I was going to write something like I was saying about the nuclear disaster how people don’t talk about it, I would have a couple different experiences where I had tried to talk to Japanese people about it, especially if I had encountered some of the effects. I would have three of those and at the end I would sum up with this point about how we’ll never know how deep this disaster has hit people, or something like that.

A service piece, like I said, that’s a how-to thing that explains how to do something and it’s really best from a publication stand point, like I said earlier, to pick something that has a snag, that has a challenge because when you’re trying to pitch these to magazines, there’s many fewer how to sections in magazines that there used to because a lot of information is found online. So if you’re going to pitch a service piece, it has to be something fresh, something new and original. It helps if it’s linked either to a specific trend that’s something up and coming that people are asking about or to a specific destination.

A round-up, you can use these in a lot of settings. You can use these for activities, you can use them for hotels, for places, for restaurants, and editors love them. I’ve talked on previous calls about how a lot of editors call them “baskets of kittens” because they should be composed of a lot of different things that on their own are very interesting and useful, but when put together are irresistible.

The next one is interviews, which are different than profiles in that like I said you have to actually to have to access for the source for this one whereas in profiles you don’t. The thing about interviews is that you should always keep in mind that when you’re interviewing someone you shouldn’t just ask them generic out of the box questions unless they are dictated by the magazine. This is one of the things that came up during the Pitchapalooza retreat. We had somebody who had found a really wonderful person, a BBC photographer who had discovered an animal that people thought were extinct off of this beautiful island in the Philippines. She was really jazzed about interviewing him, but she hadn’t necessarily thought about what type of interview to do and she kind of had some ideas related to his project, but the thing is that a lot of magazines do have a format and sometimes that format is the esoteric. 

So we found one magazine that seemed like it would be a great fit for this interview, but a lot of their questions are really about how a person travels. I’ve seen a lot of food related interviews where there have very specific stock questions about that person’s favorite restaurants in other cities or that person’s favorite dish to cook at home and things like that. So when you’re doing an interview, you might think when you’re on the road you can just ask questions and then write that up later, but this is a case where it’s really important to go through the different magazines like I was talking about and see what their interview formats are and what questions they ask and maybe make a list of the different couple questions of the places that you hope to place the story and make sure that you ask all of those so that you have them just in case.

Now the news brief, this is something that you can technically write without going there, but if you can write the news brief without going there, the editor can probably write it without assigning it to you. So it’s really best to pitch news briefs about very exclusive news that you have information about.

Similarly, a short is somewhere between a news brief and a postcard and it can even be a short round-up or short service piece. Shorts are these articles that are incredibly succinct and detail-filled at the same time. They have them in the front of magazines like Travel and Leisure. That can be a really great place to look to insert things that happened on your trip that were interesting that you think that people might want to check out, but that don’t have a full story with an arc and a point around it. We have a lot of coverage of those on the Database, but the way to find those on your own is to grab the magazines you have lying around or go to the bookstore and flip through just the very first pages after the table of contents and the mast head and see which one of those are not written by staff and those are the places you can pitch these shorts to. And again, there are some different specific formats that different magazines use for shorts. Sometimes they’re going to be a comparison.

I just saw one in a magazine that one of our writers is working on which has sort of like three different ways to do destination. There’s an adventure travel focus, a foodie focus, and a history focus. So often these shorts have a rubric. This is again where it comes in handy to familiarize yourself in advance, but you can also do this during the post-trip pitching phase. If you just go through the magazines with your mind map in mind, you’ll see where the places that you’re interested in fit in.

On the previous slide, I talked about how you can do profiles, or postcards, or narrative features. They’re all a bit related or some postcards and narrative features are a bit related. The thing is that a postcard is very atmospheric, right? So if you’re writing a postcard for an independent traveler about what they’ll experience, that would be different than a group traveler. Likewise, if you’re talking to an adventure-seeker versus a family, the type of details that you would highlight are different and you need to have those in mind when you’re doing your research on the ground, but you also need to hold those distinctions in mind when you’re writing your pieces and when you’re pitching. What this means is that you might have the experience like the meal that you had when the family invited you to eat at their home, but you can actually write a different, and therefore things you can sell multiple times, articles for these different audiences, even if you’re writing it as a postcard for each of these things.  You can use different details and a different tone to write that same postcard piece for all of these different magazines.

Alright, ok so if you’ve got your worksheets, we’re going to go now to the next one which is Terre De L’Ebre, I can never say this right it is such a Spanish tongue twister. Ok so that itinerary which is really done in a quite lovely way and I have to say this is one of the few press trips I’ve been on where we actually went to every single thing on the itinerary and spent an appropriate amount of time there. It was very enticing in the beginning, and it’s funny because even now as I look back through it, it doesn’t—there’s  nothing on it really that specifically stands out, except for the tuna that I have up here at the very top. There’s just not a lot of sort of showy type of experiences on there, but they were just really lovely experiences. That made this trip a little difficult because when you look at something and you know that it has potential for some great atmospheric or narrative or profile pieces, but you don’t have a lot of information about them, then you typically can’t pitch in advance, which was the case with this story or this trip.

The swimming in the water with the largest tuna in the world. I have to say that was pretty cool. I don’t know that I would say that it was the most standout adventure sports experience ever or anything like that, but it’s definitely something that you can do a how-to piece, you can do, it’s quite controversial actually to swim with the tuna. So you can also do an essay or a sort of pros and cons piece angle and that’s also something you can have pitched in advance and do some interviews on the ground with people to support that. You can do a profile of the person who runs the eco-friendly company. You can do like I said a service piece about the best way to swim with tuna or the way to make sure that you get the best video and photos. You can do an atmosphere piece, postcard about what it’s like to swim with the tuna and you can do a narrative that goes to this whole experience of when you get on the boat and you’re swimming with the tuna and how it feels and how you felt afterwards and incorporate the history of the tuna fishing profession in the south of Spain, and the environmental controversy. So there’s a lot of different angles that you can take with this experience. In part, because it’s kind of got that flash like when you see it you’re like oh my God swim with the largest tuna in the world, and so that naturally lends itself to a lot of angles.

Let’s look at the next part, which doesn’t seem like it naturally lends itself to a lot of angles. This is really just like a straight destination. When you look at it on the itinerary, you just see the Ebro Delta and they describe some of the geographic attributes. Now this is a place that, in all my years of traveling to Spain, I had never heard of and I never really knew anything about it, but my God, not only was it stunning, but it was very unique. In travel writing, I think that especially people who are moving over from blogging for themselves, to blogging and writing articles for pay, this question of what is unique is not always appropriately answered. You have to really think about not just what is unique to you, in comparison to the travels that you have been on, whether they are a lot or not so many, but also what is unique to a reader and especially to the readers of the publication that you’re pitching. 

So I can’t tell you how many times I’ve been on a trip and especially an eco-focused trip where they really wanted to show us a mountain or a waterfall or something like that and we got there and it was just not that outstanding. So I’m kind of like what am I supposed to do with this? I have a picture, but you know not even super usable and I wouldn’t want to write about this. But this is one of these cases where we went and the pictures of course are amazing, but it’s the kind of place that I really want to tell people about. So because this is something that I would really want to tell people about, and they don’t already know about it, that lends itself to some interesting articles because there’s not so much coverage on this already, which obviously gives you space to write about it, but also it means that you have to specific. Just because it’s a big area that has a lot of interesting things, doesn’t necessarily mean that you should just write a general article about it. You still need to slice into the sand dunes and how to visit them or the lagoons and how to take the best pictures of them, or the bays and how to do the best nature spying there. You can’t just take the whole area and write this massive inclusive article about everything there because you’re going to lose the reader. 

So when you find an area that’s off the beaten path, but very interesting, it’s really important to still keep this slice mentality in mind, because just because it’s got a lot going on, doesn’t mean that all of that is of interest to every reader. So this goes back to what we were talking about before about the different audiences and to make sure that when you’re slicing your articles, you’re slicing them by audience. So in this case, like I said before you can do something from a photography perspective, you can do something from a nature perspective, you can do something from a history perspective. It’s really important to have these different audiences in mind when you look at a destination, especially if you’re looking at a destination and thinking that the destination itself is the idea.

This next one I thought was going to be really cool. It’s a place located over mussel and oyster farms and the thing was is that they didn’t really allow us to experience it when we were there which was really a shame because I’ve never been to a mussel farm before and I would’ve really liked to know more about how it worked and things like that besides just in the tasting. In advance, I thought that we were going to have more of an immersive experience here and so if I had pitched something in that vein like how a mussel farm really works, then I would have been screwed. So thankfully, like I said I didn’t pitch things in advance for this trip because I didn’t really know what it would be like and so I ended up with some really great photos and I was able to ask a couple questions and sort of extrapolate about how the mussel farm worked to create sort of an atmospheric piece, but in advance, I would have struggled with this.  

This is the kind of thing where if you’re in an off the beaten path destination, where they’re not accustomed to tourism, you have to be very careful about what you expect, and so this is one of those times where, no matter how interesting the things are, you want to a) really a check your expectations and b) do some research yourself in advance so that when you’re on the ground, you know the questions to ask, so if your tour guide isn’t forthcoming with the information, then you know what to press and not what buttons to push, but you know what questions to say “no no no, I can’t leave quite yet. 

Can someone please explain to me how to do such and such?” When I first started taking a lot of press trips, I really noticed a lot of the experience journalists, like the people who write regularly for major national newspapers would do this sort of thing. The tour guide would give their spiel and it would be very cursory because the tour guide wasn’t experienced and then the person would say “ok sorry can you answer a couple questions?” and they would ask all of the questions that all of us really wanted and needed to know that our tour guide wasn’t actually talking about. Especially if you’re on a trip with a group and the tour guide isn’t really doing their job. Don’t be afraid to dig in and ask those questions, whether you’re doing it in a group setting or you take them aside and do it later.

Now the other thing that we had on that itinerary in the first place that I thought was pretty interesting, but they didn’t do a very good job describing it, was this olive orchard so to say for a lack of a better word. This they called, it was really poorly translated, but I think they call it the Centennial Orchard or something like that and it ended up that these trees were all a thousand years old and it was a little hard to get the photos because these old craggily olive trees can be aesthetically pleasing or not. I have to say that getting the stories from people who live there and talking about how the olive trees have changed over time ended up being some really rich material that could translate into, again atmosphere pieces. You can profile the family that keeps up the trees. You can talk about their new tourism initiatives in a news brief. So there’s a lot of different avenues in terms of formats that you can get out of things like this that are unique and not very well-known outside of the area, but again, you have to make sure that if you don’t have a good tour guide that you’re digging in and getting those questions answered.

Now, after I went on this trip, there were a couple things that seemed really interesting that I didn’t know about in advance. So the tuna that we talked about before, obviously that’s got some great story material.

Something that I didn’t have on the first list was the Apiarian Center. That means a beekeeping center. So I was kind of like “Oh bees, people know about bees. You can visit a beekeeping place in the US. What’s so special about this?” They really had an amazing interactive interpretation center that really taught you a lot about different types of honey, why there’s different types of honey, what the different types of honey taste like, what the propolis is, what the royal jelly, what the queen eats is made of and why the queen becomes a queen is in fact the royal jelly. 

This is something that I actually used in my book as an example of to break a trip into multiple story ideas or how to break an experience into multiple story ideas because at this particular Apiarian Center, I had the opportunity to ask the staff their favorite recipes for cooking with honey, to get as I said information about the different types of honey, why there are different types, I was able to talk about the experience of visiting the bees themselves and how to do that safely with your kids and all sorts of different things like that. So it’s really hit or miss if you go to something like a museum what stories that you can get out of it and I have to say not every museum or interpretation center like this is going to hand feed you all of these great story ideas. So this is the kind of place where doing some research in advance or knowing the topic area can really help you extract some more stories, but also just digging when you’re on site, like really taking the time to go through the exhibits. If they’re good, or to ask questions of the staff, can help you come up with a variety of different angles, whether it’s profiles, round-ups, recipes, you know service pieces, different interesting facts that can go in a news brief, something like that.

We’ve talked about the Delta and the mussel farm, but another thing that really struck me on this trip, which didn’t seem super interesting at first, was the basket weaving museum. What really made this place stand out was that it was a community initiative that was absolutely thriving that was trying to preserve these ancient basket weaving techniques, and again interpretation at this museum was just fabulous. They had in addition to people showing us how to do the weaving, they had demonstrations and they had videos that had the I don’t know the right to say it but the Elders of the city talking about how they weave their baskets and different types of baskets they made and what they use for with translations. They had newer designs that they were making to be more marketable and they were explaining how they were interpreting the ancient techniques in these newer designs. 

So there’s a lot of different topics there and you could even take that as a style sort of piece. You could even talk about the jewelry from the newer designs, you can use it for more of a human interest story to talk about how they’re reviving the tradition and so again like I was talking about with the Apiarian Interpretation Center, this is one of those places that could go either way. Museums can be a total bust. They can talk about things that you can learn anywhere. They can have rather poor exhibits that again, don’t really give you a picture of the location, or if they have an appropriate interpretive experience that can really give you a lot of article ideas.

Now, again we talked already about the olive trees, but the Temps de Terra is another place like this. It was listed on our itinerary just as a lunch, and so obviously you know you could think in advance well I can pitch that as a restaurant, but they had described it as a very special agricultural collective. Now, I do a lot of agriculture coverage and so again like I said, when you know an area well, you have to think about the experience of the readers and what’s going to be special for them, and so in this case I kind of was thinking ok well it will be cool, but I didn’t know if it was going to be very very special. When we got there, they had a wooden oven, outdoor stove, that they had set up that they were using to cook all of the food and my friend who runs a food tour company and I just spent like probably half of the meal over there just shooting video of them cooking the food because it was a style of cooking that you don’t see very often anymore. You don’t see it in the US because it’s not allowed, but you don’t even see it in Europe that often because it’s hard to scale. 

This place had no importance on scale or pricing or what have you. They were just keeping things the way that they had been for a very long time for the joy of it, for the taste of it. For the importance of revitalizing these traditions and they had a packed house every weekend for their brunches and their lunches and you know it really showed in their success. What that means is that a place like this can really lend itself to talking with the chefs for recipes or doing profiles, for doing a round-up of other places like this that also exist in Spain and around the world, but it also lends itself to business-oriented stories. I know that we, most travel writers don’t think of themselves as business writers, but the fact is that whenever you are profiling a hotel, or a tour company, or a restaurant, you’re writing about a business. 

So once you have the experience and the chops and the eye for detail to write these business profile oriented stories, you don’t have to only write them for travel magazines. You can also write them for business magazines. You can write them for the magazines in the vertical, the industry in the thing that you’re writing about. You can also write them for the business edition, sort of the business class magazine for a lot of airlines as well. Whenever you see a business like this, that’s in the tourism area and doing something a bit different and doing it successfully, it’s always worth digging into whether you can turn that into a more business-oriented story.

I just want to quickly go through this Dubai trip because I didn’t actually go on it and even when I looked through the itinerary to set up these slides for you, I was like “Oh it looks kind of fabulous. Why didn’t I go?” This goes back to what we were talking about why an editor will accept a story and it has to be something special, as in something that other people haven’t already done, something else, but also something special in terms of that you can add something special to the story. So if it’s a destination that you haven’t gone to before, that you don’t have a lot of background knowledge about, you have to really ask yourself “If I just experience this once, even if I do a bunch of research and you have to ask yourself how much time do I have to devote to that research, what can I bring to the story that someone who’s already been to this destination that specializes in this destination hasn’t already done?”

For the Dubai trip, one of the first things that really struck me, now add that this was over Thanksgiving and I would’ve had to miss Thanksgiving to go on it. There was essentially two and half days of this rather short activity that didn’t have anything involved. To me, that’s usually a really big red flag that the person organizing that trip is not super concerned with optimizing your time getting stories. This is the kind of thing that you can sort of correct yourself by adding in some other activities to do on your own, but you never know if you’re going to land and then people are going to spring things on you randomly. So if you’re looking at an itinerary and deciding whether or not to go, or to add some buffer time of your own to research your story, this is a really great thing to notice. 

So typically in these cases, if I had gone on a trip like this, what I would have done is I would have researched some other things that I was interested in doing that I thought would be good story angles and I would tell the PR person “Hey I notice that you don’t have anything in these places, do you mind if I do these things, can you help me set them up?” If you’re looking at an itinerary that looks a little light on the type of things that you cover, that can be a really great way to make sure that you have some stories and these are things that you can pitch in advance because these are things that you’re going to do research and know that they’re going to happen and will definitely come out of that trip.

The next thing on here was the desert safari, that sounds kind of cool and a private dinner at a desert camp, definitely like the fodder of honeymoon magazines. Then the Madinat Souk in the city and the fort with the Dubai museum that has a great pearl diving exhibit, and I’ve actually written about pearl diving in the Emirates several times before. Then crossing the creek by traditional boats. That could be a very cool atmospheric piece and then visiting the gold souk.

Do we have another slide on this? Yes ok, so what would I pre-pitch here? I could probably pre-pitch the desert safari, I think, but I would really need some more details on it. I would need to know from them specifically what we would be expecting to see on the desert safari. If you’ve ever been on a safari, they’re typically very careful about what they promise you you’re going to see. In this instance, I would want to get a very very clear spelled out expectation from them about what I would see, so that I would know what types of promises I could in turn make to an editor. I would definitely, if I was pre-pitching this, I would definitely say that I could write some sort of atmospheric or narrative piece about the desert safari even if it didn’t work out that we saw anything because you know like I said that’s often the case with safaris. It would be a true tale of how to still make the most out of your safari even though we didn’t see anything. That’s something that I could pitch to an editor, but with that caveat.

Now the private dinner and desert camp. This is the kind of thing that goes back to what I said about this Dubai trip is that what can I add to here? What is special? A private dinner in a desert camp is again totally honeymoon magazine fodder, but how much has it been covered? If I wanted to pitch this, I would have to do some digging to see is this done to death?  Have people already written about having private dinners in desert camps in Dubai? It seems like it’s probably a pretty common add-on that a lot of luxury publications and luxury hotels would offer. I would need to look around and see is this something new? Is this something special? What kind of magazines have covered it before? Have they covered it too much?

I had, for instance, a really wonderful experience, not in Tuscany, in a very un-visited part of Italy called Le Marche that was a truffle-centric trip and this is an area where you can get truffles for something like a fifth of the cost in most parts of Italy. They really just give you so much truffle oil in all of your pasta and it’s really the kind of experience that somebody who wants to eat truffles, that’s where they should go. They shouldn’t go to the other places that people typically go to and yet when I went to pitch it to editors, even though it was a twist on the truffle experience, what I heard from a lot of people was oh we’ve already done truffles too much recently because this is the thing that happens with editors. Even though you think your story is different, not just think, but you know that it’s different, their hands are tied in certain ways. If the magazine has covered desert safaris in other destinations in the last year and a half to two years, they probably aren’t interested in covering this desert safari in Dubai, even if it’s new. I’m sorry, not the desert safari, the private dinner in a desert camp. So this is the kind of thing where, if you want to pitch it in advance successfully without having the unique atmospheric or profile oriented or service oriented information that you’ll get after having gone on the trip, you really really need to dig in and dig around and see what’s been covered in the past.

This is especially the case with this souk that they mentioned to me, in fact both souks, the gold souk and the Madinat Souk. These are the kind of things that I bet every single person who goes to Dubai who is not there just to visit the palms is going to do. They’re going to go to these souks. In these cases, you would have to really dig around and look for what I was talking about before for service pieces with a hook. Look for that challenging hook that made it difficult for people to experience these places. Look for the thing that a lot of travelers ran into as a difficulty and then pitch a service piece about how to overcome that difficulty. Again, if you’re pitching a service piece like that in advance, you have to know that you’re going to be able to figure out how to surmount that difficulty. This is the kind of thing where you’re going to need to line up interviews in advance, according to your assigned article to make sure that that happens.

Now the next one, the Fahidi Fort, which houses the Dubai Museum is the kind of thing to go back to what I was talking about the Spain trip. It can be really wonderful, but it’s hard to know that before you get there. Now if you want to pitch this in advance, there’s a lot of great ways now, especially for a museum like this which I imagine is quite large and very well-photographed to dig around online and look through photographs of the exhibit and see how extensive, detailed, interesting, and unique they are. So if you’re going to pitch something like this which is a single destination attraction in advance, which is a museum, which is purported by tourism people to have very interesting attributes, this is how you want to go about it. 

Go on TripAdvisor, go on their own website, go on the tourism board’s website, do a Google image search and look and see with your own eyes as if you were there, how good it really looks. Then make your pitches accordingly. If I had gone on this trip, this is the type of pre-research that I would’ve done to validate these type of pitches about these activities before I sent them to Editors. Then, once I had done that pre-validation, I would go through this process that we talked about before. I would look at it in terms of different article formats, and in terms of different audiences and then I would go back through something like the Travel Magazine Database or just through my own pile of magazines and I would see what are the specific formats that the ideas that I’ve now generated could fit in to? Then I would hone the idea further into precisely fitting that format. So when you have one that I just talked about that has a city through three different perspectives, the adventure seeker, and the foodie, and the family, then I would take you know for instance, the souk and I would talk about in my pitch how I will find different aspects that fit each of those travelers, but I’ll have to find a couple in advance to tell the Editor. So that’s stuff that I will either do by circling back with the PR person, or just by doing some internet searching.

Alright, so I’ve gotten through now the end of my slides finally thankfully. I’m so sorry that this went too long. I won’t make so many of these slides next time, but I really appreciated that pretty much all of you have bared with me through this. So, again fore-knowledge, going through the magazines or the Database, or something like that in advance of the different types of very specific types of angles and rubrics that magazines are looking for makes all of the difference in these pre-trip breakdowns or post-trip breakdowns, because otherwise you’re going to end up with an idea that’s more of a topic, that might be something that an Editor has already written something too closely in the past or that they could never publish in their magazine. It’s incredibly important that you don’t just rely on what ideas you think are cool or interesting or fun from your trip, but you really double down on what magazines are actually publishing about trips like the one you’ve gone on.

To be prepared to pitch, make sure, as much as you can, that your trip will follow the established itinerary, whether it’s a trip that you are planning by doing extra due diligence using all of these you know train connections and visiting a place on Sunday, that all of these things are actually possible. Then if you’re going on a trip that’s been planned by somebody else, make sure that you really do that digging that I was just talking about on the Dubai trip, to make sure, not just like I said that things are possible, that they’re interesting and to find what the interesting angles are in advance, so that you can make sure that you see them while you’re there, that you talk to the right people while you’re there, and also to make sure that, for instance, you’re doing an interview that follows a specific rubric, you’ve done the research of what those questions are so you can ask those while you’re on the ground. This goes back to researching magazines and specific formats, but not only when you’re trying to pitch in advance or you’re doing your post-pitching, but while you are there you are on the lookout for as many details that fit as many magazines as possible.

If you have any questions about this or anything else or if you thought of some ideas while we were going through the call today and you want to check with me if they sound like a good idea or if I know some magazines that might be a good fit, or something like that, send us an email at questions@dreamoftravelwriting.com and I’m so glad to have had another webinar with you guys after the long delay and I hope that you’ve enjoyed as much as I did. Ok have a great night everybody.

How To Build Serious Business Partnerships At Travel Conferences Transcript

Download (PDF, 271KB)

Very exciting week this week. I’m calling you from the side of the highway between TBEX in Huntsville, Alabama and a workshop we’re doing in Atlanta. And we’re going to talk about how to build serious business partnerships at conferences.

So, this webinar idea came out of some emails I got, and some emails I didn’t get, and some conversations I had at a string of travel conferences that I’ve been at in the last week. So, I’ve been at three before now, and now, I’m at TBEX, and I’ve been at some writing conferences, some blogging conferences, some that are just for women, some that are in the U.S., some that are in Europe.

It’s been a very wide variety. And while obviously there are cultural differences and adherence in all of these different locations and different types of travel media, there’s certain things that are the same. And there’s a lot of opportunities that I feel a lot of folks are missing out on. So, that’s what we’re going to look at today. How to make sure you are best taking advantage of the opportunities that you have set yourself up for when you have spent this money to go to these conferences in the first place.

All right. So, specifically what I want to talk about is what are the different travel conferences that you can go to and what you can get out of them because this is a question that I really get a lot. Sometimes people say, “Should I go to TBEX, or what’s the best conference to go to if I want to be learning how to write better or how to pitch better?” And so, I’m going to talk about the spectrum there.

After that, we’re going to talk about the before part. So, some of you have probably just come from the Women in Travel Summit. Some of you are on your way to TBEX, which starts tonight. So, people might be in different places. Or it might be that you had gone to a travel conference last year, and you haven’t really followed up too much, and you’re wondering what you should do about that. Is it too late? Can you still reach out for those opportunities?

And so, we’re going to talk about how to prep, and then we’re going to talk about the follow-up formula. So, I’m not going to give you a specific template for this because it needs to be quite personal, and we’re going to talk about that as well. So, let’s get going.

So, When I talk about conferences today, I’m not talking about very small sort of intimate writing things. I’m talking more about large events and also expos we’re going to look at because those are big things that I know a lot of you guys are missing out on. And some folks are wondering if they should be going to these. Oh, Naomi, how interesting that you’re going to the Adventure of Travel Show.

But I myself, it’s kind of a joke with another friend of mine who goes to a lot of conferences, who goes to more. But in addition to going to a lot of conferences for travel writing, I go to a lot of conferences for small business and for freelancing.

But I also cover conferences for magazines. So, I’ve spent the last couple years writing for magazines for people who plan meetings and conferences. So, I’ve also spent a lot of time writing about the best practices for people who are looking to create conferences and make sure that you have those opportunities. So, I have a lot of insights both from the high level as well as from on the ground. So, before we dive into the specific conferences to look at, how to prepare for them, and how to follow up on them.

Why should you be going to these in the first place? Because I definitely know that while I’m obviously meeting people at conferences, when we are searching out for people to invite to different events that we’re doing around the country, there’s a lot of people who don’t know about a conference that might be in their backyard starting that very weekend.

If you aren’t already making space in your budget and time in your schedule to be attending these kind of events, why should you look at doing it? So, I really think there’s four main reasons, and these can also help you evaluate whether a conference is the right opportunity for you personally because I think often we’re in the position where we might go to a conference because it’s near us, or as travel writers, because it’s in a place where we want to go, and we want to go on the FAM trips, right.

That’s a great reason to go to a travel conference; because you want to go on the FAM trips. And there’s just a lot, and I’m going to show you on another slide how many of them there are because you might only know a few. But there’s a lot of these conferences. So, how do you decide which ones are worth it for you? I think there’s four main reasons to go, and you need to make sure that any conference that you’re looking at investing in is going to check at least two, if not three, or preferably all four of these boxes for you.

The first one is connection. Whether you are working already full-time as a freelance travel writer, as I know some of you are, or you are looking at making that jump, connection is one of the big, big reasons to go to these conferences. In fact, my husband always asks me because I always complain about TBEX, and how I don’t really like the sessions, and things like this, or how it was very poorly organized. And he says to me, “Why do you keep going?”

And I say, “It’s because all of my travel friends are there. I know that I will go and I will see everybody in one go.” And he’s an academic, and he has several conferences that he goes to every year, whether he has a paper in it or not, because those are the places where he is going to see all of his colleagues every year. And so, this is really important. Being part of a community, we can do it online, right.

In fact, somebody at the TBEX Speaker’s Party last night was joking, “We shouldn’t have people’s names on their badges. We should just have which Facebook groups they’re in because that’s really how you know them.” And the thing is, though, that those connections that you make online are cemented in person. There’s this maxim that people don’t do business with businesses, people do business with people. And that’s very true.

But the other thing is that making connections with people can allow you to leap — oops, sorry — to leapfrog — oh, no, where’d we go — to leapfrog a lot of steps in terms of setting up partnerships. Whether that is with other bloggers, or with brands and destinations that you would like to be blogging for, and writing for, and doing social media for. So, the power of that in-person connection is huge.

I say unquantifiable, but the meetings industry, the associations for meeting planners, have put a lot of effort into quantifying this in light of the fact that after the financial crash, the government was penalizing finance companies for all sorts of expenditures, and one of them was on travel for things like incentive trips. And an incentive trip, if you don’t know what this is, it’s a really quirky thing.

It’s when people who work in sales for a big company exceed their goals. Their price that they get, like their reward, is that they get to go on these really awesome trips to really fantastic places around the world, or in the Caribbean with their family, and there’s shopping, and there’s casino nights, and there’s all these things. And so, on the one hand, you can look at going to travel conferences as a place to network, and that the connection is for a networking reason.

On the other hand, it’s also important to spend time, like these finance companies that I just mentioned, enjoying yourself with your peers. This is really important, and this is where the best connections are made. It’s not just because you’re at a networking event, but it’s because you’re on a trip with somebody before the conference, and you guys are enjoying a tour together, or a meal, or something like that.

This connection, what kind of benefit does it have for you, right? People think of networking and, “Oh, I have to network,” but what do you actually get out of it? Because this is the really important part, not just in deciding which conferences to go to, but also who to reach out to while you were there, and how to follow up with them. The types of connections that you should be making are a couple-fold. You want to be looking at three different types of people.

You want to look at people who are above you, but not too far above you. You want to look at people who are on the same level as you. And you want to be looking at people who might be a couple steps behind you. So, these are the three types of people that you want to be looking at connecting with when you’re at conferences. So, when I say people who are above you, but not too far above you, here’s the reason for that.

Is that you can go to a conference and go to a talk by a big person, and maybe say hi to them afterwards, and maybe follow up with them on email, but the chance of having a lasting connection with somebody who’s quite a few steps ahead of you in their own travel writing business is much slimmer, unless you’ve really had time to make — spent hours, and hours, and hours with them. And that’s often hard to do because these conferences are very busy.

But the thing is if somebody is just a little bit ahead of you, and you guys connect over something, like you both went to school in Italy, it’s a lot easier to build a strong relationship there. Or that person is going to mentor you, and send you leads on business opportunities, and connect you to people that they know. People who are on the same level as you, this is what I was saying about you might be in a lot of Facebook groups.

But having a beer with those people and sitting down and getting to know them makes you become the person that they refer when they can’t go on a trip, and the person organizing the FAM asks them, “Is there somebody else that you know that we can invite?” So, even if you know a lot of peers in a loose tie sort of way online, getting to know them in person is what makes you become a go-to person.

Whether it’s when someone asks them for a recommendation, or if they’re looking at doing something, like they’re looking at setting up a blog or group that will work together with destinations to go on FAMs. Now, what about people below you? I think this is one that people often miss. So, even if you think that you are relatively new to travel writing or to blogging, it’s really important to cultivate relationships with people who are a little bit earlier in their trajectory than you are, and to help them along.

And the reason for that is two-fold. First of all, it’s really great for them, of course, to give them information, but the other thing is that teaching is a great way to cement what you know. And also, to help you feel confident about what you know and where you are in your journey. So, helping answer questions, or if somebody — if you’re both waiting to speak to a speaker after a talk, chat somebody up.

See if there’s somebody that you can introduce them to, to help them leapfrog much faster along in their journey. So, possibility. Now, this is a really interesting one. When I was doing our freelance travel writing master class in New York this week, one of the attendees really aptly said that she had come because she wanted to see the possibilities of what she could be doing with her travel writing career and income specifically that she didn’t already know about.

And I thought that was so great because I think that people often go to travel events whether it’s a conference like TBEX or an expo in particularly like World Travel Market and ITB. And we’re going to talk about those. And they leave with this concept of, “Oh, my God. I had no idea how much was out there. How many opportunities there are. How many destinations I want to visit. How many places I hadn’t thought that I could be writing for.”

In my opinion, one of the best reasons, and one of the things that will make you move forward the fastest about going to travel conferences is to imbue yourself with a sense of possibility of where you can take your career. Because that’s often going to be the thing that pushes you to leave the job you already have, or if you do a lot of different types of freelancing, like if you also freelance in the medical field, or do science writing, or technical writing.

This can be the thing that shows you that all these years, you thought, “Well, I’m going to keep doing technical writing because there’s just not that much travel writing that I could be doing,” that shows you that there really is, and that your skills are transferable. Now, education. This is an interesting one, and I think it was April earlier had said which are the best conferences for travel writing.

And this is quite interesting because a lot of the conferences that folk go to aren’t actually about travel writing. There’s very few that are. And I’ll tell you which ones are good for that. But the thing is that the education component of a lot of these events is something that you need to make for yourself. In some cases, the education comes from networking with other people.

But in other cases, especially expo events like World Travel Market and ITB, there are so many different things going on. There’s press releases. There’s thousands of booths that you can go to. And there are education sessions, but they’re easy to miss. So, this is one of the reasons why I said these are four reasons to go to conferences, but you’re not always going to go for all of them because education is very important.

And it can be a really great way for you to do what would’ve taken you six or eight weeks to learn in two days, but not every event offers it. And so, if education is a priority for you, you have to be really picky about which events you’re going to because, like I said, they don’t all cater to that. But going to a conference is really one of the best ways to really fast track your learning about travel writing, about travel writing business. Now, a cold hard opportunity.

This is an interesting one because I think a lot of people don’t go to conferences specifically with this in mind. They might think, “Oh, well, I’ll go to some speed dating appointments, and hopefully, something will come of it.” But they don’t think, “I have a spot in my client portfolio that I need to fill with a travel company that I’m going to be blogging for at least four times a month, or at least eight times a month.”

And going into an event specifically looking for an opportunity like that and specifically evaluating which events to go to based on whether or not those opportunities will exist. And this right here is the one that I would say, above all of these other ones, you need to have as at least one of the things that drive you to go to conferences because a lot of people go just for this. They go just for connection. And like I was saying, that’s great.

It can help you with business partnerships, and it’s also an important reward for your hard work. But the thing is, if you aren’t actually doing paid work, you don’t get to do the connecting just for awarding purposes yet. So, what I recommend is that if you are fresh, if you are new to travel writing, if you haven’t gone to any events yet, look for ones that are going to help you with education and possibility, and hopefully, also opportunities.

If you’ve been doing it for a while, don’t worry about this one. Don’t worry so much about this one. But look for the opportunities that have the best connection to people that you already know from online that you can meet in person, as well as new people you can meet, and the best opportunities. So, let’s look at the different conferences. There’s really three different kinds. And I mentioned expos, and I’m going to show you what I mean on the next page.

I have a big, long list of all of them. But expos are essentially events that are not for travel media as a goal. Travel media are there to cover the event and to get exposure for the destinations. But expos are primarily for buyers and sellers. And so, what does that mean? People who buy and sell travel might be people who are travel agents, people who do group bus tours, people who do bookings for companies. All sorts of people who are buying travel in large amounts.

And then the sellers would be hotels, they would be tour operators, they would be airlines, all sorts of people. So, when you go to an expo, it’s a crazy experience, and there’s tons of stuff going on. But the real meat of it, the real heart of it, is one to one meetings between these buyers and sellers that I just explained getting their business done, getting their rates, getting their sales, getting their packages put together for the rest of the year.

For us, that stuff doesn’t matter, but it’s important to remember that that is really the goal of these events. That is what they are set up for, and those are the type of goals they are targeting. And if you want to go as media, you need to understand that to get a free pass, you need to be somehow functioning in that setting. So, what that means is if you want to go — like I said, the two big ones are World Travel Market, which is in London in the Fall, and ITB Berlin, which is in Berlin in March.

If you want to go to one of those two things, you need to be showing that you are going to be covering the things that you learned there. Not that you are just going to do business for yourself because then they are going to want you to buy your own ticket. So, this is important to remember about expos. However, the flip side to that is that expos are the single best way to get that possibility download that I mentioned before to see the sheer number of tourism boards, of travel companies, of travel tech startups, of things that are out there that need your writing.

If you have never been to one of these, I highly, highly, highly recommend it. There are also some smaller ones around regionally. There’s one that’s on luxury, and again, I’ll show you more of these in the next page. The second type of event is, like I mentioned, ones that don’t have so much education, but are very networking-oriented that are for writers specifically. And these often have press trips attached that are before and/or after the event.

Those tend to be ones that are attached to travel writing associations, but there are also ones for travel bloggers. So, TBEX, for instance, is a good example of that. Now, the next bucket here, and this is probably the smallest bucket, is education-oriented events. And these are going to be the types of things where you can go and get like a master’s in travel blogging or travel writing over the course of the weekend.

Not officially, but essentially. So, this is pulled from my book “The Six-Figure Travel Writing Roadmap”. This is a huge list of all of the different — and, in fact, there’s probably some that aren’t even on here, but all of the major events that would benefit travel writers in some way, shape, or form. So, some of these, like I said, are going to be association events. And there are some on here that are expos. I mentioned ITB and World Travel Market. And then there’s also the International Luxury Travel Market.

So, some of the good ones for education purposes, specifically about travel writing, the top two that I would recommend are one is not on here because I just found out about it this year, but it’s one that I just came back from.

It’s called Travel and Words, and it’s typically in the Pacific Northwest. But the other one is the Book Passage Travel Writers and Photographers Conference. Now, this one I don’t always recommend to everybody because the event itself is pricey, and the hotels there are pricey, and it’s not in the most interesting location. And there’s also not trips associated with it.

It’s not necessarily going to be the right choice for all of you. But another one that’s similar in terms of focusing on travel education that’s not on here, like I said, because it’s new, is Travel and Words, and I’m going to put this over here so you can see it. And this is my new favorite recommendation if you are looking for a conference about how to be a travel writer. They have panels of editors that are telling you how to pitch them, what to pitch them.

They’ve got freelance writers from all different parts of their career who are telling you different types of magazines you want to be writing for and how to write for them, who are telling you how to set up your business, all sorts of things. So, that’s really great for how to be a travel writer. Another place where you could pitch people is Travel Classics. It’s kind of an interesting event. It’s a very small group but there’s a lot of big editors.

But I’ve heard from people that the editors will let you pitch them there, but then they don’t actually necessarily follow up on the pitches. So, this is also going to be another one that’s quite expensive, and I’m not necessarily sure if it’s right for the price tag. But pretty much all the other ones on here as media, you’re able to go at a very reduced, if not free, rate.

For instance, the Eye on Travel Conference, which is going to be about sort of advances in travel, New York TravFest is another one where you can go as media if you’re going to be covering the event. And somebody on this side had mentioned that they went to that. That has all sorts of panels about all sorts of things. It has responsible travel. It has disable travel. It’s very both trend and panel-oriented.

It can be a really great place to learn. World Travel Market, as I mentioned, is the one that’s in the Fall in London. And then there’s a lot of ones in blogging. So, there’s Traverse, which I just went to, which for the education component, was really, really great. There’s the TBEX conferences, which now have some new conference instructors, and they’re really working hard on their education.

The different association conferences that I mentioned which are good for FAM trips and for networking, but not necessarily so much for education, would be the Society of American Travel Writers. There’s the North American Travel Journalists Association. Another one that I don’t have on here is the International Food, Wine, and Travel Writers Association Conference, and there’s some in other places as well.

If you specialize in a specific area, like if you’d like to work with more tourism boards, DMAI is the association for tourism boards in America — and actually North America, I think. And so, at their annual convention, there’s going to be a lot of tourism boards that you can network with. And if you’re interested in doing different types of marketing, content marketing, for businesses, it’s important to not just go to the conferences that are for travel writers.

But go to the conferences that are for the clients that you want to be working for. So, if you want to be working for tourism boards, like I said, DMAI is a good place to go. If you want to be writing for travel tech companies, which pay well and always need content, Eye for Travel is a great place to go. If you want to be writing for luxury travel companies like tour operators, Luxury Travel Market is a great place to go.

I’ve got a question on this side from somebody who is attending an entrepreneur tech conference and has a media invitation. So, if you’re going to these differently focused conferences which are about a slice of travel, or that are more towards the business side, everything I’m going to say in this call completely still holds true. The most important thing is just to ensure before you get there that it’s the right conference for you and who you want to meet when you’re there.

Let’s get into that. So, how do you prep and then work on the ground to make sure that you are getting the most out of these experiences? I think there’s really five main steps. So, the first one is to decide what is your goal. And this always surprises me when I’m at conferences and people tell me that they don’t really know why they’re there. Have any of you guys ever felt like this or heard somebody say this?

Drop it over here in the chat box. But I’ve heard this not just from attendees, but I’ve heard this actually from sponsors, and it cracks me up. I’ve been at a couple trade shows and also at TBEX, and gone to the speed networking, which if you don’t know what speed networking is. This is where in some conferences, and it’s becoming more prevalent, they have an opportunity for sponsors and attendees to have very short, sometimes longer, but they’re usually between five and ten-minutes appointments.

And during these appointments, it’s a little bit of a shit show, pardon my language. But the whole idea is that you’re pitching each other. And this comes from, like I was saying about a lot of the original travel trade shows have things for buyers and sellers. And there, they go, and they’re prepared, and they’re ready to do business, and they know what to do. But in a lot of these travel conferences, sponsors are there.

They haven’t quite prepared for the speed networking. And so, you kind of sit down and they either tell you all about what they’re doing with no idea how that actually works for you. Or they say, “Well, tell me about you.” So, if you want me to talk specifically more about how to ace speed networking, drop that in the questions box, and I’ll get to that later because I don’t want to talk about that specifically because it’s something that not all conferences have.

But one of the important things, whether you’re doing speed networking or not, is to set a goal of what you want to do there, and make sure that you know who is going to be at the event that will help you meet your goal. Okay? So, if you have the opportunity to do speed networking or other sort of appointment setting in advance, you can email those people and try to set up an appointment. Or you can go into the speed networking app instead of an appointment.

But otherwise, it’s up to you to figure out who is going to be there. So, how do you do this? So, let’s say, if anybody has a conference they’re going to and a goal, drop it to the side, and I’ll workshop that as well, but I’m just going to make one up for now. So, let’s say you’ve gone to Travel and Words, which is this conference that I was just at. They have a ton, a ton, a ton, a ton of destinations there that are from the Pacific Northwest.

Perhaps you’ve gone to that event knowing that you would like to plant a great big trip around that area, and that you want to set up as many sponsored stays as possible between a certain set of dates around a particular type of travel that interests you. And let’s call it like craft, food, wine, and beer. Okay? Great area for that. So, you have gone to that conference with that goal in mind that you’re not there just to meet people.

You are there to meet people who can help you with story ideas and with sponsored travel for this trip that you would like to do in the Fall of this year. Okay? So, then what you’re going to do is you’re going to look at everybody that’s — on step two — you’re going to look at everybody who’s sponsoring the event and see which of those sponsors best fit your agenda. How do they fit in terms of geography? If you have four weeks, you can really spend all sorts of time and rural Washington and Oregon and make it over to Idaho.

But if you only have one week, you need to do things that are much closer together. So, you’re going to create a hit list, I like to call it a hit list, of the people that are your high priority networking targets for the event. And so, in this case, it would be the sponsors or along a certain route that you can accomplish in one week for your trip. And then you’re going to plant the seeds.

Like I said, if there’s a speed networking component attached to the conference that you’re going to be attending, then planting the seeds is really simple, right. You just set up a speed networking appointment. No. Planting the seeds goes much, much deeper than just reaching out to somebody and asking if you can meet with them at the event. So, here is what I recommend.

Whether you want to be meeting destinations, tourism boards, if you want to be meeting companies, or if you want to be meeting other big bloggers, or if you want to be meeting other people who are on the same level as you. Whatever type of person fits into your goal, to plant the seeds about two weeks a month out from the event, start following them on social. Start liking what they’re doing, start commenting on their websites or on their photos.

That is planting the seeds because setting up a meeting has not endeared the person to you. It hasn’t given them multiple sort of flashes of your name in order to recognize you and associate you with something. And it’s not necessarily going to be enough for them to go look you up and figure out how you can work together. But if you maintain yourself as a little bug in their ear for a little while leading up to the conference, then by the time you get there, they’re like, “Oh, yeah.”

And even if they never ever saw you online before a week ago, now, as far has their concerned, you’re like online friends, and they’re super excited to see you. Now, I have keep your eye on the prize here, and this is really for when you get to the event. So, I find especially if you’re going to a very large event. So, for instance, the World Travel Market or ITB, which are these large expos that I was talking about.

If you’re going to a very large event, it’s very, very easy to get swept up in all of the stuff that’s going on. If you go to an expo, there’s going to be hundreds or thousands of exquisitely created booths. Sometimes there’s three stories of booths, and there’s parties, and there’s first-class airplane seats to sit in. And there’s people giving you away all sorts of quite nice swag and things like that.

It’s very easy to forget who was on your hit list. And the fact that if you don’t have a meeting set with them, you need to be bumping into them. Or that you need to be also finding people who aren’t on your hit list because you didn’t know in advance that they were going to be there, but they funnel into your goal. So, one of the most important reasons to set a goal for yourself before you actually land on the ground is so that you don’t get distracted by shiny, or edible, or drinkable objects that are fantastic because the thing is, like I said — and I don’t want to go back to the earlier side.

But like I said when I said there’s four reasons to go to conferences, the one that needs to be associated with each conference you go to is cold hard opportunities. And the reason for that is that you need to have a return on investment for these things that you are going to. And the reason for that is that it’s way, way, way too easy — and I see this happen a lot in our master classes. It’s just way too easy to spend a lot of time networking, a lot of time talking to people about kind of opportunities, and never close them.

If you are going to conferences without knowing what type of opportunity you are looking for without deciding in advance what type of person you need to be talking about for that opportunity, you’re going to have a grand time attending these things and just find that you have more friends and less money. But not necessarily a path to do something with those connections. So, as you’re there, and you’re keeping the eye on the prize, or your eye on the prize, which is your prize, in fact, it’s also important not to put too much pressure on those interactions.

Okay? I see sometimes people who are trying to close a deal on the ground with somebody that they met five minutes ago. Or even somebody that they perhaps have been following online before, but they haven’t quite gotten the person’s attention enough, and then they go up to the person at the conference and just expect that now they’re best friends. It’s very, very important to take the temperature of the people that you are trying to get in touch with and not necessarily — when I say take the temperature, I don’t mean like if they seem busy, to assume that they’re interested.

But I mean to see how far they are in the pipeline of having a partnership of some kind with you, of having whether it’s a friendship that’s a referral friendship, or if it’s a brand that you want to be writing for, or if it’s destination that you want to have to take you on a trip. But it’s really important to keep in mind that everyone is completely strapped for time at these events. Inaudible

It’s not that I’m saying that people are going to be wasted drunk, but between all of these different factors that are happening, it can be really hard to remember, even if you had a really great conversation, that you may have promised something, or you may have had a plan for something. And then now you as a person who went there hoping to work together on this, and that person has essentially forgot. And that leads to very, very, very awkward, and uncomfortable, and typically negative conversations.

When I say don’t put too much pressure on these meetings, what I mean is that focus on the connecting aspect. You definitely do want to be making sure that you are meeting people who are related to your goals, and that you are making sure that you spent time with them on the ground. But don’t spend too much time discussing business. This is the weird thing, right. I’m talking about setting business goals and making sure that you go to conferences with a business goal in mind and not go to ones that don’t fit your business goals.

But at the same time, you need to go there and essentially discuss business as little as possible, like 5% of the time. And here’s the weird reason for that. It’s like I said, people do business with people. So, they will remember so much better that you guys talked for half an hour about your different study abroad experiences in Italy, and that you recommended all of these places for them to go with their kids the next time that they’re in Italy, and that you gave them the name of the restaurant, and that you told them the story about the owner.

They will remember that so much more than this Instagram class that you were talking to them about doing together. Okay? So, when we don’t put pressure on the first meeting, what that means is that there’s a lot of pressure on our follow up. And this is the area where I see a lot of people start to fall off. So, I want to talk about that. But I’ve got a couple questions here on the side. Okay.

We’ve got “I’d like to make a public Twitter list and add people to that, so they get a notification that you’re doing that. It also makes it easier for me to keep up with the right people by just looking at this list.” Now, I like this tip, and I get added to these Twitter lists a lot, and I see them, but the thing that I find interesting about the Twitter list is that when I see that somebody has added me to a Twitter list, and I go to it in my notifications.

Like, I go to the Twitter list, and you see who else is on the Twitter list, but it doesn’t necessarily endear you to that person as much as if the person has been thoughtfully commenting on your post, or liking them regularly, or things like that. So, while having a Twitter list is useful for you to follow people, I don’t find being on the receiving end of that that it’s quite as ingratiating as some of these other things that you can do.

And, by the way, speaking of ingratiating, if you want to be really, really, really ingratiating, find an article that somebody has written not on their blog, but like an actual article. And even if it’s old — sorry, it just started raining. Tell me if you have trouble hearing me. But email them — everybody has their email on their website or a contact form — and tell them that you read this article and you really like it. You would not believe how infrequently that happens.

And I’ve always noticed I just do it because I like to do it, but I always notice that when I do that, people are just like floored. Like, people don’t get that that often. So, if somebody writes for BBC, or USA Today Road Warrior’s Blog, or something like that, find out. That is the best way for them to remember you. Okay, a couple more questions. “I’m not a big fan of Facebook. Is that your preferred method for social media?” I am also not a big fan of Facebook, Michelle, and sometimes people Facebook message me, and I probably see it like three months later.

I think some people are really into Facebook. Some people these days are really into Instagram. I notice that a lot of people, instead of direct messaging to find people at conferences over Twitter, now people are often doing it through Instagram. So, it’s really different for everybody. And how do you find that because on most people’s blogs, they’ll have all of their different social handles listed. I think this is just kind of a tossup.

And you can go and seen how active they are, but the thing is that people schedule things, so that’s not still the best metric. But if they have Facebook, Instagram, and Twitter all up there, I would see perhaps what they’re posting real-time things on, and that’s probably their preferred method. But it’s different. Like, I really only use Twitter. And some people these days are just really big on Instagram.

My friend Kirwin, who I think is also playing hooky from TBEX right now to be on the call, I believe is pretty good on Facebook. Kirwin, chime in if that’s not true. But a lot of people are on most networks. Especially anybody who’s a blogger, you really have to be checking in on all of them. So, I think it matters a little bit less what’s the preferred method rather than the one that they’re most likely to be looking at. I know that there was one more question earlier. Okay.

Someone wanted some more information about speed networking. So, this speed networking stuff is, like I said, an offshoot of something that’s a buyer program that has been in a lot of these travel conferences for a long time.

But in the media side, it’s never to have these one-on-one media appointments. And so, as I mentioned, often it’s not very clear to all parties involved what is supposed to happen. And I actually have something on the follow up that’s kind of related to this. But you don’t want to be in these meetings a Silicon Valley startup who is looking for VC funding and spews the elevator pitch at everybody they possibly can, and here’s why.

The key to acing speed dating is to forget for a moment what your goal is and concentrate as hard has possible until you know the answer on what the other person’s goal is. Because you might have a really fantastic pitch prepared and some really interesting stuff going on, but if they are there for a completely different purpose that doesn’t mesh with that, you’re just going to be operating in different planes.

So, what I like to do is I sit down, and no matter what they say first, I always pivot it. And like if they ask me a question, I say, “Well, before I answer that, I would love to know what brought you guys here and why you’re meeting with people and what are you are looking to find out.” Because this allows you to change what you’re saying to fit that. And I’ve had this lead to some really interesting stuff.

I’ve had some people who are actually at TBEX because they are looking for people to write for their blog, and as I mentioned in the newsletter and the blog post leading up to this call, this is very, very common now. And nobody is talking about that. All these bloggers come up, and they just think that the company is there either to do affiliate sales or to like put them on a free trip. But they’re actually looking for writers.

They typically, for the last like ten people who’ve been coming to speed dating with them sit there and listen to people’s pitch, and then sort of write down whether they like the person or not, but don’t really know whether that person can write from them. So, in other cases, you’ll find people who aren’t able to set up trips, and they’re only there to give information about their destination.

This is also really important because if you sit down, and you are there to set up your trip, and you’re like, “So, I’m coming these days, and like what can I do during that time and everything?” But they aren’t able to set that up for you, they’re going to tell you all sorts of things to do, and you might think that they’re going to help you with them, but they’re actually not. So, my number, number one tip for speed dating is to start by figuring out what they want, and then change whatever you’re going to say around that to make the most of unifying their goal with your background.

Okay. So, like I said, I knew I had a slide about the speed dating. So, my other pet peeve. I told you my favorite tip, but my pet peeve about speed dating, and I have been on both sides of this now, having sponsored a few conferences. My pet peeve about speed dating is people who are paper pushers. Now, what do I mean by this? So, people who are paper pushers sit down at your table, and they open like their folder, and this happens on both sides.

Destinations and companies do it, and writers do it as well. And they open like their folder, their press trip, whatever, their press kit, and they just start telling you all these things that are on the paper. Two things are happening here. First of all, what am I going to do with that paper? Like, honestly, we have file — what do you call them — file cabinets at home where I put all these papers that I get at these events, and they just sit there, and I never look at them again.

No matter how much I liked you, the information should be digital. And a lot of exhibitors are starting to understand this, but I don’t find as many bloggers do it. So, don’t use paper. So, what do I mean by that? First of all, you want to send them things after the fact, but second of all, on your phone, if you have like a big Samsung Galaxy or on your iPad, if you have it, have a little mini slide show. Like everything that would be in these papers you want to show, but have it on the screen.

And then here’s what I do. So, I find out, like I said, what they’re interested in. I move it to the correct slide. I give them my iPad, and I say, “Okay, here. Great. This is what you need to know about me.” I give it to them, and they can scan it in like 30 seconds. And then while they’re doing that, I get my business cards, I give them my business card, and they get their business cards. Now, they have some appropriate background on me.

I know what they’re looking for, and now we can start to talk because the second problem with being a paper pusher is that I find that people are just giving me a guided tour of these lecture materials about them, and there is no connection happening. And when you only have a very scarce, scant, and very precious number of minutes to make these connections, you can’t be doing that.

So, the magic happens, the business happens, the closing happens, on the follow up, not at the event, like I said before. So — oops, sorry. In terms of follow up, I have five tips here, and then I’m going to give you a little formula, but like I said, the formula is a little flexible because it needs to be quite personalized. So, the biggest, biggest, biggest, biggest, biggest most important thing about following up is that it should be about you as little as humanely possible.

You should only be mentioned in the context of the relationship that you had with the person at the event. And otherwise, it should be about them. And I think that this is hard. And I think sometimes we sit down, and we write these emails with what we want to tell them, and then if you don’t already do this, you should always look at your emails and make sure the first word of every paragraph isn’t the same. But you sit down and you look at it, and every paragraph starts with I.

I wanted, like I’m doing, I just, I something. They’re all I sentences, and this is not a good way to ingratiate yourself to somebody. And you might think, “Well, I had a great connection with this person. Why do I have to write them this very cold email-type email of ingratiating myself to them?” Because now they’re home. Because you’re not with them anymore, and because people have psychological triggers. And when there’s an email all about them, it simply makes them much happier.

It’s really just that easy. So, I can’t even remember who it was from, and this is quite telling that even though I basically collect this information, I can’t even tell you who sent me this email. But somebody sent me an email after a conference recently, and it was literally just about where they’re going on their around the world trip, and these are their handles, and I should follow them, and this and another thing. I had no idea why I was getting that email.

You never want someone to not know why they are getting your email. So, that’s the next point. Don’t let your email lack a reason for reaching out. And a next step, someone should never ever, ever have your email and be wondering why they got it first of all. Okay? That’s a big bad. But the second thing is even if you make it clear why you’re sending them that email, like I said, it shouldn’t be about you.

It should be about them, and it should also have a next step because saying, “Oh, I just wanted to let you know blah, blah, blah, blah,” is the end of a conversation. And if you want this email to be the beginning of a conversation, the beginning of a great, beautiful conversation that leads to money for all of you. So, what that means is that you need to have some sort of plan, some sort of steps, and just like I recommend with pitching, I recommend closing your pitch email by saying, “Would you be interested in blah, blah, blah article?”

Make sure that you end your follow up conference emails with a question, and make it an easy question. So, that question could be, “Would you like to talk more about this?” That question could be, “Could I send you some more information about this?” That question could be, “Can we set up a time for me to interview for this podcast?” All sorts of things.

But the reason you want to end with a question, especially if there’s a somewhat significant amount of information in your email, is to keep them from sort of falling into reading mode, and then just flipping to the next email. You want to get them to respond, and the best way to do that is to outline your plan so they know what they’re signing up for, and give them a very easy question so that they can just say, “Yeah, that sounds great. Thanks. Let me know what time works for you. Okay?”

Number three, don’t clutter your follow up with too many requests or pieces of information, especially not about what you’re doing. Okay? So, like I said, these emails of, “Here are all the things that are going on with me, and I am doing this book, and doing that thing, and this other thing, and this other thing, and this other thing, and this other thing, and this other thing,” are very common. I’ve gotten them from other conferences before as well.

But besides being all about you, one of the most important issues with those is that you force people into this read-only mode, even if they’re interested. Where they’re not interacting, they’re not really considering how this applies to you, they are taking in information. And you want these follow ups to continue the conversation that you spent time and effort and invested in starting at the event. So, just like you wanted to go to the conference in the first place with a very clear goal in mind, you want — especially your first follow up email.

You don’t have to be as strict about this in the future ones. But you want your first follow up email to be short and to one point, just one point. So, like I said, it could be that you are asking if you can send them more information about something you discussed at the conference. It could be you’re asking if you could set up a time for a follow up as the opportunity to discuss 27 other different things that you think you should work on with this person. Take small steps.

And there’s an important reason for this as well. And I’m going to just go forward to the last slide. So, this is because there is psychological power in asking for things. And this works two ways. There’s power in asking for things and somebody doing a small thing, and now, you create a cycle of yes’s. Okay? But there’s also a power in doing things for somebody else. Okay?

Just the same as if you asked somebody to set up an interview for your podcast, you are going to feel that you like them and you want to do something else for them, it works the other way. So, I highly recommend that you close your follow up email by offering that person something because there’s a lot of studies that show that when somebody helps you, you feel indebted to them. But it also works both ways. When you help somebody, you also care about what happens to them.

Just as much as you’re sending these emails and you’re asking people to do things for you, or work on partnerships with you, or if you can blog for them, and all sorts of things like that, you also need to make sure it’s a two-way street because you don’t want to get into the situation where you feel like, “Oh, I wrote these people, and I followed up with them a couple times, and I haven’t heard back, and they’re horrible people.” You want to remember that great connection that you had.

And one of the ways to do it is to keep the conversation and the connection upbeat at all times. So, some people do this at the end of every single email they ever send, and they’re brilliant, brilliant people who have a lot of connective capability, but it’s most important on the first email. So, you want to offer them something. And on the next slide about how to put together an email, I’m going to talk about what that can be. But let’s just go back to the fourth don’t for a second. Don’t forget to remind them how you met.

This is actually what should go at the top of your email, and we’re going to look at it again when I do the slide about the formula. But they might remember your face and not your name. They might remember your blog and not your name. It is so easy for that black and white email to come that has no relationship whatsoever to this great interaction that you had over drinks in this little topless bar in the steps of The Old City of Girona when it was the first time that you saw The Old City of Girona in the whole conference.

And everybody was just so excited to be in this beautiful place. Your black and white email has nothing to do with that. And it’s so easy if you just start writing this email and referencing how you want to work together for them to forget who you are, and how you met, and that they like you. So, this is the number, number one thing that you want to put in your email. So, here is how you should put it together.

Start by talking about how you met. And this is important. If it was a bit mundane, if you kind of just met at a cocktail bar, or at a cocktail party rather, it’s a conference, find a way to make it interesting. And hopefully, you made it interesting at the time. Hopefully, you found a way to bring up something that you had in common. Like I said, this should typically be something social, not something business-oriented.

Like that you both studied in the same country, you traveled the same country, or you went to the same college, or you know the same person, or you visited the same town, or you’re from the same town, something like that. That sticks much better than something business-oriented. But if you didn’t do that when you were there, you can find a great way to do it in your email as well. So, the way to do this would be to tie in something else.

Maybe you met them at this party at the conference, and there wasn’t anything particularly significant about your meeting, but you could mention something else about the party that was interesting. You could mention an observation. You can say like, “Wasn’t that Big Bird character that they had walking around taking selfies with everyone just hilarious?”

But make that intro to your email when you’re reminding them that you guys met. Make it interesting, make it positive. And this is important because when somebody is opening a cold email, the beginning of the email has the most important of all function of getting them to keep reading. So, it’s very common for these emails to start with, “Hi, so and so introduced me to you at such and such conference. It was great to meet you.”

I’m bored. A lot of people will just keep reading, but hopefully, the people that you’re trying to make these big partnerships and deals with, and write for, and work on programs together, hopefully, they’re big people who have busy inboxes. And to stand out in them, and particularly to make them excited to say yes to the question you’re going to ask at the end of your email, you want to start off on a positive note.

Now, once you’ve done that, you want to get right to the point, and you want to tell them why you’re writing, and what are the next steps about that one thing that you want to do with them. Again, don’t put everything that’s going on in your life. Don’t put every plan that you want to do with this person or this business. Just that one thing that we’re going to focus on in this follow up email.

No more information. Nothing about where you’re traveling to next. Nothing about where to follow you. And then add some value for them. So, this can be an introduction. So, let’s say — okay. So, there’s somebody here from a destination, it’s a pretty big city, I met them at the Women in Travel Summit. They are looking at starting a very interesting, specific blog that’s about meeting planning actually.

And they need somebody with a background both in leisure travel and with connections to meeting planners. Okay? So, what I might do after the Women in Travel Summit is email them, and remind them that we met, and about this funny thing that we had discussed. And then say, “I’m writing to follow up on that conversation that we had about this blog that you’re interested in starting about interesting information for meeting planners.”

Okay? “I would love to talk to you at TBEX, where we’re both going to be now, about that, and I’m sending you this e-networking request so that we can meet.” Now, the extra information I would give is — here’s a couple examples of the type of blog post that I think that you guys should be looking at doing for you to check out. And then at the end, I would say, “Do you have time for us to meet at TBEX? Thanks.” And that’s it, and that would be the whole email.

Okay, a question over here. “Regarding the next step, what if some of the connections you made aren’t people you want to work with immediately, but you still want to follow up on?” Thank you so much. That’s a great question. So, this is really important because these connections, I found that — we were just talking last night how many TBEXs some of us had been to, and I found that it can take like three or four years of repeat seeing people at conferences before you’re like super close just from seeing them at conferences with no in between follow up whatsoever.

If there’s somebody that you might want to do something with later, or even just that you have a really great connection with, you want to still do this, and the next step should be something like hopping on the phone, inviting them to a webinar that some other person is doing that is really interesting that they might like. And then talking about how it went afterwards, telling them that you’re going to another conference, and would they like you to send them some tips.

The next step can be social. The next step can be helping them develop their business. The next step doesn’t necessarily have to be, “Let’s set up a phone call to discuss that blog that you’re looking at starting.”

If you have any questions, let me know at questions@dreamoftravelwriting.com. And I have just a couple other questions over here that I want to answer quickly. So, one that came in over email that I thought was really interesting, and I don’t think she’s on the call, so I want to make sure I get to it, is that she said that she was at World Travel Market in London and realized that most brands where travel companies approached her were interested in figuring out whether or not she had a strong blog.

But no one mentioned anything about writing on their own blog. So, this is a really interesting one because like I said in the earlier — in the newsletter and the blog preceding this, this is new. That people are realizing that when they go to these blogging conferences, they should be looking for bloggers right for them. And a lot of people still don’t know how to do it, and don’t really know what questions to ask, and things like this.

As I mentioned when we were talking about speed networking, this also applies just when you’re walking around to different exhibitors and having a chat. You need to ask them what they’re there for. And I also — if I’m looking for blogging work, I tend to ask them what sort of content they have on their own site, and who produces it, and what’s the strategic plan for that, and if they have any needs coming up. So, that’s one thing that you can do.

Another question was, “If you have a very specific expertise, for instance, like you are in Greece, and that’s basically the area that you write about, do you just engage with companies from that area? Or when you go to a show…” And this is especially for trade shows. “Do you talk to people from other areas of the world, or other types of travel that you’re not necessarily knowledgeable about?” I really like to use these shows to find new areas that I might be interested in breaking into.

And the thing is that often you can break into those areas because that person has a writing need that you can fill. So, I definitely recommend walking around and seeing who else is there. For instance, somebody who is here at TBEX was at the TBEX in Israel about a month back, and he lives in the Midwest, and he wasn’t necessarily thinking, “I’m going to do a big Israel content project,” so much as he went because he was speaking at TBEX, and now, he was like two or three Israel content projects that he’s working on.

And he had no plans for that. He had no idea that they had the money to support the type of projects that he did or anything like that. So, this goes back to what I said earlier about possibility. One of the best reasons to go to these events is to explore what else is out there. And you might find yourself pivoting to something that really interests you that you didn’t even know interested you before.

So, if there’s not any other questions, I’m going to sign off and skedaddle over to my master class. And I will see some of you at the TBEX party later tonight.

How To Craft A Travel Content Marketing Pitch That Gets Attention Transcript

Download (PDF, 271KB)

All right so today we’re going to be talking about how to craft a travel content marketing pitch that gets attention. So in previous weeks we’ve looked at what types of travel content marketing gigs there are in terms of doing strategy versus execution or blogging versus Instagram or Facebook posts and different things like that. And in last week’s call we looked at where to find these companies. Different ways, not just to Google or find them but how to qualify these prospects once you get them. And this week we’re going to look at what to do once you’ve found those people, how to reach out to them. I know this topic of how to write a pitch of any kind, whether it’s for a magazine article or if you’re just writing in response to a gig you found online, forget about doing something completely cold like approaching somebody that you’ve just found on the Internet and saying, “Hey, I think you need help.” These are some of the scariest types of writing where you have the blank screen and the cursor blinking at you and you’re suffering from quote unquote, “writer’s block.”

So we’re going to look at a formula that you can use to write these types of emails and then we’re also going to do a couple live, out loud to show how to do it, so go ahead and whenever you have a question drop them in the questions box. If you have a scenario of a company that you’ve seen that you would like to reach out to that you would like me to sort of make up on the fly a content marketing pitch for, go ahead and drop that in there as well. So specifically what we’re going to look at today, is first I want to get clear on what we need to achieve with this email. When we looked at sending pitches to magazine editors, I talked a lot about how the goal of your pitch is not necessarily to get an assignment but just to get a response, just start that conversation with an editor. And it’s similar with these content marketing pitches but it’s a little bit different because magazine editors are expecting pitches from freelancers but the people that we’re approaching with these emails are not.

And then we’re going to look at the six sections that you need to have, to have a really effective travel content marketing pitch email. And then I’m going to take- … oops, sorry that’s not the right one … we’re going to do live demos of how to write these emails on the fly.

I am a former magazine editor and work with a lot of magazines but I also got 95% of my income from content marketing for a long time because I realized when I was really looking to up my travel writing income, that that is really where a lot of the money is these days. While you can earn very well writing for magazines, you don’t get paid until sometimes 60, 90, even more days after the article is published, forget about when you turned it in.

So travel content marketing I found really allows you to have a dependable, steady, travel writing income. So before we start looking at exactly how to craft your pitch letter, I want to talk a little bit about the approach. So I always tell people that before you begin any piece of writing, whether it’s a simple email, a newsletter, a full feature article, a white paper, anything like that … you need to start by thinking about who is the audience of this piece? Because that not only influences your tone, but it can also really influence your structure, particularly in terms of how you need to begin your communication to make sure that you grab and hold the attention of your intended audience. And also, what is the objective of the piece? Because that also informs a lot about the structure and also in terms of what you need to leave out, which I think when I see types of pitches like this, whether it’s somebody applying to a pre-existing job or pitching a magazine, that these things often are not super clear on their objective in terms of, they have an objective but it’s not an objective that really takes into account the audience. So we want to create those two things together.

So in this case unlike magazine editors, who as I mentioned, are expecting to get pitches from writers they don’t already work with, when you reach out to a company or a tourism board to pitch them for travel content marketing work, they aren’t expecting to hear from you and they may not need your services. And so, you have some very important goals around who your audience is because in this case, one of the primary things that you need to do is keep them engaged. You need to show them that this email is worth reading and that’s something that I think a lot of us forget, whether we’re pitching a magazine, which in that case like I said the editor’s looking for these pitches. When you’re writing, even to a gig that you’ve seen online, these people are looking for the right person. They’re looking for the right thing. They’re not looking to read every email or to hear from you so throughout your message you need to constantly keep in mind the fact that this person doesn’t have to read your email and that can be a very sobering thing because I think often we really get drawn into our “why” of why we’re writing this email and the story that we want to tell but especially with travel content marketing pitches you need to keep it entirely focused on the people that you are pitching and what is in it for them.

Also because these people aren’t expecting to hear from you it’s very important to keep it short and to make sure that you get to the point quickly because they’re not going to read too many sentences, no matter how many engaged … how much interesting statistics or things like that you put in there, they’re not going to read too far unless they understand why you have written this email and why they need to keep reading it. So the objective here, similar to writing a magazine pitch letter, where we want to get them to respond, whether yes or no, to start working towards getting an assignment from that editor, here the idea is to respond but specifically to get them to respond that they’d like to talk to you more about what you’ve proposed and we’re going to look at some language that can help with this later on in the call. So because our objective is simply to get them on the phone to talk to them more about what we’d like to pitch, in this email the focus is not necessarily on getting them to buy in completely to the solution that you want to sell them. The focus really is just on making sure that they’re interested enough that they want to hear more.

So that means you don’t need to outline an entire solution, as in you don’t need to tell them all the steps of the type of content marketing that you’re looking to do with them or all of the issues of their site that you’d like to fix, but just enough that they see that you know what you’re doing. And so, the way that we do this we’re going to look at later is to not be entirely focused on pointing out what’s wrong with their site, but to do it enough to show them that we know what the better path is and that we’ll help them to get there. But also in that vein, it’s important that we don’t layout enough of a framework of what the company or tourism board needs to change that they can go out and do it on their own. All right. So in terms of the formula for content marketing pitches, in a lot of ways this is very similar to the Perfect Pitch Formula that we would use for a magazine so I’m just going to go through that quickly for any of you who aren’t familiar. So when you pitch a magazine there’s really a pretty standard three-paragraph structure that you should be following.

In the beginning, you have the lead or the intro, which is really around getting the editor’s attention and also showing off your writing skills. In the middle, you’re going to tell them what the article that you’re proposing will be about. This is also known as the nuts and bolts section. And in the third paragraph, you’re going to tell them why you’re the best one to write this piece. And so in the lead of a magazine article we often do a lot of picture painting. We try to show off our writing style. Sometimes you just want to wow the editor with a good statistic or really focus on the importance of this idea. Now this is going to be different in a travel content marketing pitch because we’re not trying to sell the prospect on an idea in quite the same way. We are trying to sell them on the idea that they need to improve what they’re doing but not necessarily on the specific solution. People talk a lot about this concept of features versus benefits. Have any of you guys heard this before? Let me know in the chat box if you’re already familiar with this features versus benefits context but I’ll explain it a little bit for those of you who aren’t.

The concept of features versus benefits means that when somebody is selling something, which is what you’re doing anytime you have a pitch email, you don’t want to just tell them what comes with it. You don’t want to tell them the sauna is 200 ft.², that it has three levels of benches, that it can heat up in 10 minutes … all of those things are important to know but only once the person interested in purchasing is sold on the idea of the sauna. What that means is that sales people more typically would say, “10 minutes in the sauna a day can improve your health in … ” XYZ ways, “You’ll have better circulation, which leads to less heart problems … ” and so on and so forth. People typically start with what is called the benefit because that’s something that’s easier for people to buy into. So when you’re writing a magazine style lead, you don’t have to think quite so much about that. You’re really trying to sell the editor just on why this idea for the article is interesting. But in the case of a travel content marketing lead, you’re trying to show why they need to make a change and that’s quite different.

In the middle paragraph of a magazine article pitch, you’re going to say what section the pitched article would go into, what types of things you would cover in there, and any research you’ve done in the past. The central section of a travel content marketing pitch is quite similar in a lot of these ways. We’re going to show that we’ve done some research by showing what we’ve seen on the prospect’s site or social media sites that we think needs to change, we’re going to outline some ways that we think they should change it and we’re going to really show them that we have done our research. Not necessarily just on the company, but in the field, by showing that we know how to do this and propose some solutions which, like I said, are a little bit more of a teaser than a full solution. Then in the “I’m so great” paragraph or the paragraph about yourself, when you’re writing a travel magazine article pitch, you’re talking about what background experience or prior research you have that’s relevant to this specific article and what else you’ve done in the past. And that’s very, very similar.

In the travel content marketing pitch we’re, again, going to talk about when you’ve done this type of work in other settings, the biggest names you can draw off in terms of companies you’ve worked for and things like that. So this paragraph is probably the one that’s going to be the most similar between the two types of pitches. Now, I talk a lot about how the headline is a very under-appreciated part of the pitch letter and when you’re sending a magazine article pitch, this is actually a very simple section to surmount in terms of what you’re going to put in your subject line for your email. You’re just going to put the headline of what your article would eventually be in the word “pitch,” it’s very simple to fill in. However, this is an area that’s super both different and difficult in terms of travel content marketing pitches because, like I said, these people aren’t expecting your email so the subject line of the email needs to do a lot more work in this case. I found that ones that don’t have all-caps, or rather a title case, like you see in the ones here, which are magazine article headlines, those don’t actually perform as well because people who are not expecting your email might see something like that … they immediately think marketing. They think it’s a mass email and they don’t think it’s for them.

So you’ll see later when I show a sample pitch, but I found things that are very casual and also in lowercase can often perform really well here. So something like a quick question about your blog … like very, very simple things can actually have the highest open rates in this context. In terms of the format of your travel content marketing pitch, I found that while we’re also going to have a similar three paragraph-structure, there are several more pieces that you need to use to construct your pitch letter. When we start, like I said, we needed to explain right off the bat why we are writing to this person and this is where you are going to include a little bit of what you’ve seen on their site. So this is where you’re going to say, “It’s so wonderful that you have 8000 followers on your Facebook page,” or, “I love the images that you’re sharing on Instagram. The one that you shared on … ” XYZ day of blah, blah, blah “really caught my eye.” So you want to make it very clear in this first paragraph that you’re not sending a blanket pitch, because this is going to be one of the first things that people are looking at when they’re like, “Oh I don’t want to read this,” … they’re going to want to delete it.

They want to see why they should read it and if it looks like you have done your homework on them, they’re much more likely to keep reading. The next thing that we’re going to include, and I looked at a couple of these last week, are statistics. Because when somebody “doesn’t know you from Adam” as the expression goes, they’re not necessarily going to take your word for this so you need to include some numbers, some proof, that what you’re saying about how they need to improve their content marketing is true. I showed a couple of those last week, I’ll mention them again. I also want to get to this section of the pitch later, I’ll include some other ones that you guys can use. The next thing we’re going to talk about is what we notice negatively on their site or social. So once we’ve told them how important what we’re reaching out to them about is, we want to show them how they’re failing in service of showing them how they can do it better. And once we’ve done that, we’re going to explain how we help you to help people to improve this particular type of content marketing and how our background qualifies us to do that.

So like I said, early on they’re not necessarily going to take your word for it but once you’ve shown them that you understand this type of content marketing, that you have a solution for this type of content marketing, this is where you can talk more about yourself. And then at the end, we’re going to give them a very simple question that helps complete our objective, which is to get them on the phone to talk more about how we can work together. Now, like I said at the beginning, there’s a very strong natural urge as you write these pitch emails to really concentrate on you. On what you can do, on how you can help them … and I use the word “you” a lot in that format there but it’s very important that throughout each piece of this puzzle we keep the email language focused on them, on the prospect, on the organization as much as possible, so let’s look again at how we can do that. When we talk about why we are writing and we keep it positive, we’re focusing on their site. When we have the statistic, we’re focusing on a lack that they have, on a way that they are not achieving their full potential.

When we talk about what we’ve noticed on their site that they’re not doing well, we’re focusing on an area in which they can improve. Here is where you have to really, really keep the “you” in check. When you get to how you help people, you want to paint it as being all around the organization, of how you help the organization achieve the objectives, of how they will be getting four blog posts a week. Not so much you will be writing them, but they will be getting. These are little, tiny tweaks that you can do in your language that really help them to see why they would be interested in this as opposed to just thinking that it’s one more sales pitch. Even when you talk about your background, you can talk about … Obviously if you’re pitching … An example that I used last week that I’ll use again this week, an Italian Villa rental company, you can talk about how well you know that part of Italy but adding that one extra phrase to say, “I’m very familiar with your coverage area, having spent … ” XYZ time “living there, and so I understand the needs of your customers who would be looking for a villa in this region.”

Just adding that “you” in there a couple times and making sure that you bring everything you’re saying back to the prospect is incredibly important here. Again, at the end when we say the very simple question about how to get them on the phone, it’s not just going to be, “Hey, do you have a couple minutes next week and we can chat?” It’s going to be, “Do you have a couple minutes next week when we can talk about how to help you get more leads from your blog?” So part of the way that we’re going to accomplish this goal of keeping the prospect in mind at every turn is through something called story-selling. If you were on the call last week I mentioned this a bit. Story-selling is this really neat thing where you use some very age-old techniques of how to create a beginning, middle and end of a story around the issue that you see that the organization is facing but you paint yourself as an integral part of that story so that you’re showing the prospect the golden land on the other side isn’t possible without your help. And there’s five steps to this.

My friend who came up with this concept who is a copywriter loves the alliteration of the five C’s so he’s called it the “5 C’s.” So as we go through each of the six steps that I mentioned before, laid over that is this arc, this plot arc of where the prospect is now, where you’ll take them, how they’ll get there and what it looks like once they’re on the other side. And so the current state is something that we’re going to explain in those two early points where we talk about something positive about the prospect’s site or social media right now and also something negative. So we’re going to show that there are some things that they’re doing well but there are some things that really can be improved on. As we include that statistic where we show how important it is to have effective Facebook social marketing, they’re going to immediately say, “Oh, well that does sound important but I don’t know how I do it.” That’s the conflict that we’re creating for the prospect.

We want to show them that their current state needs to be improved but then they’re not going to know how. So that’s where we step in as the guide. When we talk about exactly what we propose doing, of course in an over-arching way so that they can’t do without us, but the type of package or plan that we’re proposing for them … that’s the climax. We’re showing them what type of output, what type of content marketing they will have working with us that will allow them to reach that point illustrated by the statistic that we shared. And then in the consequences, this is where you talk about your past experience. I know obviously this is new for a lot of folks. We obviously haven’t work with clients like this before, you wouldn’t need to be on the call listening about how to do this but that doesn’t mean that you haven’t done work like this in other settings.

So for instance, I used to work at a university where I did a lot of writing projects. I can totally pull a statistic about how many people were reached by this initiative and how much more money this initiative brought in or something like that, even if it’s not from my freelance career. So this is the kind of thing where you might want to get a little creative in terms of finding some impacts that you’ve had in other types of projects. Remember they don’t necessarily have to be the exact same type of project but you just want to paint a picture of the type of proven results that you’re able to bring. And in a conclusion, this is going to be that last line where we ask them to hop on the phone with us. The conclusion is that you should obviously work together and that they should just say, “Hey, yes, let’s chat next week.” So let’s dive into the individual portions of the pitch and then, like I said, I have some examples at the end. I have one that’s all written out that we’ll walk through and then a couple of the folks that we looked at last week we’ll do some live pictures there for them as well.

The first part of this six-step pitch is why are you writing? And this is the kind of thing where you really need, like I said, to check the “you” at the door and think about them. Think about the prospect and why they care. This is why it’s very important to use this initial part to show that you’ve done your homework, show that you spent some time on their site and that this isn’t just a cold pitch that you’re sending to everyone. So here I like to start with something, like I said, complimenting them, because not only are people going to be wanting to know what’s in it for them as you go along but it’s really important to get the prospect on your side early on. So there’s a prevailing concept of three steps that you need to do before somebody is willing to purchase something from you and it’s called “Know, Like, Trust.”

“Know” you’re accomplishing just by sending the email. As soon as they open your email they know that you exist. So “know” is done and you’re going to get more into knowing each other more deeply further on in the email and once you have a conversation. But for now, they know who you are. The next big hurdle is “like.” “Trust” is probably the biggest hurdle and we’re going to accomplish that in some of the other sections, but “like” … how do you get somebody to like you in a very short email that they’re not expecting, that they’re initially defensive about? And this is why it’s also very important to start with something complimentary even if what you’re approaching them about, is about a flaw that they have that you would like to fix. Because you need to get them to like you from the onset. Because the saying goes, “people don’t do business with people they don’t like.” Of course having Trump as president might be an interesting contradiction to that but typically, people will choose a brand that they like, that they have a good brand perception of or another brand or service provider, they may do the exact same thing or even cost less.

There is not a lot of studies about to this and it’s often very counterintuitive but even if they have an opportunity to save money or get better service through another provider people will often choose one that they like and stay with them. I’ve seen this myself when I’ve been approaching prospects to do this kind of content marketing work. There was one woman who had worked with a small company that had screwed up for her several times in the past and she had started with them when they were very, very small and now they had grown into something much larger. She had just so much brand affinity for them because she was one of their first customers, it was somebody that she knew personally and so it took really a lot of screw ups on their end for her to even consider switching to somebody different. So when we start this email I can’t tell you how important it is to make sure that you focus that very, very first sentence where you’re showing them that you’ve done your homework and that you are familiar with this brand and that this is a personalized pitch, to focus on getting them to like you.

But not in a way that’s artificial because people can smell that, especially when they’re already superstitious about things like this. We accomplish that using detail. We accomplish it by pointing to a specific blog post that we saw on their site that we enjoyed. I’ve done this in the past. There was a company that I worked with where the owner of the company had put up a blog post about how they were having Thanksgiving in Italy and how they couldn’t figure out how to cook the turkey because the ovens in Italy are very, very small and how they had to go into town and find a rotisserie that would make the chicken for them in the large oven and so on and so forth. So I opened the email to him by saying that we had the exact same problem when I was in Italy and I totally understand and I was highly amused that they were able to magically find a turkey in time. Before we go on to the next slide I have a couple questions in here that I want to jump over to.

Donna said that she pitched a social media management gig to a winery and they’ve already scheduled a call for next week so that’s awesome. Let’s all congratulate Donna on that because that’s fantastic.

And Bonnie is asking, “Do you approach the prospect differently if you’ve already connected with them?” For instance, she’s exchanged emails with the head of a travel board, a tourism board I assume, in a small town, and she knows the budget and they quote-unquote “need her help” … I assume that they said that they need her help, and the tourism board also helped her get a press trip to the town and she’d like to approach them for content marketing work. So two things here that I want to point out. What Bonnie’s described is a very common and interesting case. You’ll often go on a press trip somewhere or be on a tour or something like this and find that the people that have hosted you on a trip need help and they might mention even while you’re there or they might come to you later and say, “Hey, I know you do this kind of stuff. We need some help. Do you think you can help us with it?”

And it’s very, very important if you’ve gone somewhere on a press trip and then you have been approached to do content marketing work or you are thinking about approaching them to do content marketing, to make sure that any journalistic-style writing that you were doing at that place has been published. So not just written but also published, before you begin any content marketing conversation with them otherwise it’s a large conflict of interest and the editor can withdraw the story or other things like that. So that’s a legal road that you don’t want to go down. If you are looking to work with a tourism board or company that has hosted you for something free in order for you to write about it in a journalistic capacity make sure that you do that before you work with them from a content marketing perspective. So to go to the overarching angle … if you are writing somebody that you have worked with in the past, in this first section … in the “why are you writing” … then you would use that.

But again, don’t forget that we’re going to hit them with some negative stuff that they have to improve later so it’s still important to focus on the “like.” So in this case I would say something like, “Dear … ” so and so, “It was so great to chat with you over email about what your needs are in terms of content marketing. I really respect what you’ve already done with … ” blah blah blah blah blah blah blah, “and I have some ideas about how we can move forward.” So make sure that you don’t just say, “Hey … ” so and so, “told me to get in touch with you.” Or, “I know that you need some help because we talked about the other day.” Make sure you also get that little back-patting, like-inducing nudge in there in the first paragraph.

All right, so let’s go on to the next section. We’ve started by telling them why we’re getting in touch with them and giving them a little compliment to sweeten them up before we go in for what they’re not doing so great. Before we switch from, “Hey, you’re awesome” to “Hey, you need help,” I like to show them that while we think that they have some good things going for them, on an industry level, there’s some other things that they need to be working on and this is a good segue. Rather than you saying, “Hey, I like what you’re doing but actually … ” you can say, “Hey, I like what you’re doing but did you know there’s a lot of people who are getting much better results than that? I notice that you’re not doing … ” XY and Z, “so perhaps we can start doing it.”

There are so many great statistics out there and I know that people are going to start asking me in the chat box where these things come from. The truth is when I was getting these for the call last week, I just put in a couple Google things and there’s a lot of repositories of quotes out there. I didn’t want to put too many specific links in here because the thing is that the quote that will work best for your travel content marketing pitch really depends on exactly what you are pitching. If you can include several quotes that’s also great. In the pitch I’m going to show you later, I have a couple different ones about how blogging can help your business. It can be good to have multiple quotes but you don’t want to water down your pitch by making it just like a white paper. All of the quotes or all of the statistics that you include should really have a purpose.

So for instance, something I want to point out here is, we talked about Facebook having the most engaged users, 70% of them log on daily including 43% who do so several times a day. But if you’re pitching to help somebody with their Facebook, a very important thing to include is another statistic that I mentioned last week, which is that currently posts by brands only reach 6% of the people following that brand until they’re engaged with and once the post either gets liked or comments, it goes on to reach more people, a higher engagement percentage and that can snowball very quickly. This is the kind of thing where you can use multiple quotes. You can say that Facebook has the most engaged users but in order for your post to reach the majority of your users and get that engagement, you need to get engagement very quickly and then you can move on to say that you have techniques of structuring social media posts that allow them to get X percent more engagement in the first Y minutes or Y hours, that allows them to reach more users. And that’s when you segue into what exactly you would offer.

Likewise, in terms of Instagram, it says Instagram’s per-follower brand engagement is higher than these other social network, however the issue that Instagram has is that unlike Facebook, where you can put a link in every single social media post you’re doing so that followers and users can very easily become interested in something and click through, Instagram has the hurdle where you can’t put links in each Instagram post. You can only put a live link in your bio. So this is the kind of thing where you can educate the prospect that you know that this is a hurdle so you include the statistic and then you say, “However, Instagram’s click-through rates are significantly lower because of … ” XY and Z, “but I know a way to structure the text of your Instagram post … ” blah blah blah. And that’s where you start to describe your solution. Likewise, for companies that are doing blogs. So four times as many leads, this is just super powerful statistic, however if you look at this, this is already pre-classified sort of say for companies that are blogging a little bit.

So many examples that we looked at last week that we’re going to look at again this week are companies that simply aren’t blogging at all or whose blogs have been more or less defunct for two or three years or maybe they only blog once a month. In this case, while this lead is awesome or this statistic, who doesn’t want four times as many customers coming in, we need to find different statistics like this that fit people who are blogging in different frequencies presently. So HubSpot is a place that has a lot of those … that has a lot of different statistics like this but like I said, whatever you need a statistic on, if you just look for brand Instagram engagement in Google statistics, then you’ll find a lot of different things like that. And make sure like I said, that the statistic that you’re using is really tailored to what you’re trying to pitch because if you’re just throwing different statistics in there about how the engagement can be higher, but then you aren’t showing the prospect that you’re going to help them with that, they’re going to be confused and become disinterested and not see what’s in it for them. That’s something that we definitely want to avoid in these emails.

The third part of the pitch is where we start to tell them what they can improve. So here is where you’re going to be less positive but you still need to show them something that will have a positive outcome in the end. So you don’t want to just tell them, “Oh, I thought this post wasn’t really a good fit for your audience.” You want to say a problem and then a potential solution. So you’re going to say, “I thought this wasn’t a good fit for your audience. For instance, we … ” and we’ll look at some in the next couple slides and give you some examples here, but you’re going to say, “This post I didn’t think was a good fit for your audience. If you do keyword research on this topic people are searching for … ” XY and Z “and I can help you craft some blog posts around those things.” And likewise, saying something like “I didn’t think this post was a good fit for your audience,” is very subjective unless you include some statistics.

That was why I mentioned that you can pull in Google keyword searches and things like “you have this many followers but you’re simply not posting that often” … that’s pretty hard to refute. When you take a statistic like the one I shared about blogging, that people who are blogging this often have more leads than people who are blogging that often, that’s pretty clear. You can look at their blog and see how often they really are blogging and that’s a pretty steady leg for you to stand on. So let’s look at some examples. These are a selection of the ones that we looked at last week. In the case of this Tuscan House company … so they are doing rent, again, villa rentals in Tuscany and they are posting super sporadically. They had, it looks like somewhat a regular post in 2015, one random post in 2016 and then one not pictured here here in January 2017. So it seems like they know that they should be blogging and they just can’t get around to it.

So in this case, you want to compliment the blog post that they have. They also have a very, very … as my husband would say, “fancy-ass website,” so they’re clearly investing in their website and you can also just compliment the general look of the website. I try to pick something specific to point to if at all possible because anyone who has a blog has seen these comments that come in that look like they might not be spam until you read very closely where they’re like, “Hey, I love the idea that you’ve had here. It definitely deserves some further thought.” So you don’t want to have the type of praise comment, that falls into that category of an astrologer-style prediction that could fit a lot of things. So in this case I would look at this blog post they’ve got here in the upper left about the Canta Napoli seafood restaurant and I would look through and see okay, they discovered this restaurant in 2014.

So they’re also writing about things that have happened pretty long ago and they say it’s unusual to find a seafood restaurant this far inland but it should get every seafood lover’s attention. So in this case I would say, “Huh, they found a seafood restaurant very far inland that they thought was really great.” Okay, so let me turn back to my pitch and say, “Dear … ” so and so, “I really enjoy the sleek look of your Italian villa rental website and I thought the blog post in which you discovered a seafood restaurant in Cortona, in an area typically known for its mountain food was really enlightening.” So that would be our positive part. Now when we get into the negative part, we’re going to include a statistic similar to the one that I showed you about people who blog 11-plus times getting more leads than people who blog four to five times, a simple poll on this for people who blog once a month rather than people who blog never, once every six months or something like that. So I’ll include that statistic and then I’ll say, “I notice that while you’ve got a really nice layout for your blog, you’re blogging very infrequently.” That’s all you have to say here because they do seem to have an interest but it’s just not happening frequently enough.

The other example that we have also, I pulled two villa rental ones here because they’re very different. Here’s a company that does do blog posts. They haven’t blogged in a while but they were doing it pretty regularly before that but their blog posts are really lackluster. They’re the type of things that you would find anywhere, they’re really click bait and they really don’t show anything about the company. 6 Tips on How to Rent a Villa, A Short Guide To Val Di Chiana, 5 Great Farm-To-Table Restaurants. There is a really big backlash right now against websites that have this kind of content on their blog that people say is just contributing to the clutter of the Internet. So in this case, rather than just saying a statistic about companies that blog frequently, here I would actually use a statistic about companies that have insightful blogs or storytelling blogs or something like that because they clearly, even though they haven’t been doing it for a little bit, understand or understood at one point that blogging frequently can have an advantage but it looks they stopped, and I would imagine because they weren’t finding the advantages that they thought. And I think that their frequency wasn’t the issue so much as the topic of the blog posts.

So in this case I might say, “Dear … ” so and so … this is the first sort of complimentary sentence, you’d say, “I found the blog on your website and I just wanted to say that I was really impressed with the broad coverage that you have of different activities for people who are renting villas in Italy to do during their stays.” I think we can pretty honestly say that they do have a pretty broad coverage. And then you would say your statistic and then you would say, “But while I noticed you used to blog quite frequently and haven’t recently, it seems like the content that you were serving might not be … ” Let not say “might not” … “isn’t the best fit for the type of customers looking for a villa at this price point that you’re trying to reach because of its general nature and you would be better served by some deeper storytelling.” And then you would go in to talk about how when you work with blog clients you interview the villas and you get the stories of the villa owners and so on and so forth. Here’s another case of Facebook rather than blogs.

So in this case, I double-checked again because I just want to make sure, this company has 61,000 Facebook followers and they have not posted since last year. Their engagement was very low even when they did. I don’t know how they got 61,000 followers, I imagine that they may have bought some, but in any case they have them and they’re not using them. So in this case I would say, “Dear … ” so and so, “I found your Facebook page and I was really impressed that you’d gotten 61,847 followers,” and then I would have a statistic, like I said, about how “That engagement on Facebook can be very high but you only reach a certain portion of your followers” and say, “I noticed that you haven’t posted since October and when you were posting your posting got … ” blah blah blah “… engagement. I think that given the size of your list or your Facebook following we can do a lot to improve that, using techniques like … ” and then you will talk about the things that you do that help people to get more Facebook comments and likes early on after things are posted.

Another thing that we looked at last week was Instagram because a lot of companies especially in the travel and food sectors are really jumping on Instagram but they have no idea how to do it and it’s very difficult for them because having somebody who can actually do these things from their phone essentially often restricts them to having somebody’s niece or an intern do these things. In fact, I’m not just making this up. I found a lot of companies and they say, “Oh yes, my niece said she will do our Instagram.” So in this case, this company has very few posts, regular posts and they have amassed a great number of followers and they have some really lovely photography. So this would be a great place to tell them a statistic about how engaged users on Instagram are when interacting with brands but to mention also then a statistic about best practices. Because in this case, they’ve got a good number of followers but they’re posting very inconsistently.

So we would want to show them how posting more frequently and using more diverse images would allow them not only to get more followers, but to get more customers. And so we would want to show that the user on Instagram are some of the most engaged but then we would follow up by saying, as I mentioned earlier that, “because you can’t include direct links in your post it can be hard to get a return on your investment from the time on Instagram.” And then you would mention the techniques that you use to get around this. So continuing on with the different sections of our pitch, number four, the section on how you help people. I’ve mentioned this a little in our examples before but this really circles back to what we talked about in the beginning of the call last week, which is … what is your particular type of travel content marketing that you are going to do? This has both a geographic focus as well as a service focus. So that service isn’t necessarily that you do blogs or that you do strategy. That service should be something specific and it should be something that you really think about, not just how it will work for you.

One of the other things we talked about in the last webinar was how frequently do you want to be in touch with the clients? How many rounds of edits do you want to do? How much autonomy should you have? So you need to think about your package in terms of that but also in terms of what is the client getting and how do we make sure they are getting a return on their investment? So this is the type of instance where you would want to say, “I do my typical starting package with clients that need to get some more leads coming through their blog is to start with one post every week around a keyword-oriented topic selected from the questions that you are getting from your customers to ensure that we’re both serving your existing customer base and helping educate potential customers that are coming in through search. Brainstorming these topics is done collaboratively after an initial on-boarding phone call that we complete together to ensure that I have a complete understanding of your customers and their needs and once we’ve done that initial call then I would prepare the editorial calendar each month for your review so all you need to do is approve or give me suggestions on how to nudge things more in the direction that your clients need to see.”

And so you want to make sure that you show that you have a process in place. But like I said, you don’t want to make that process be something they can go and do without you so there’s a little bit of magic in there, the way that you are creating this editorial calendar or the way that you are coming up with which ideas are the exact ideas that are going to be used, you’re not really mentioning how that’s happening but you’re essentially showing them that they put in a little something, they talk to you at the beginning, they think about what questions their clients has and then you do some magic and then they get these blog posts. It’s important to keep that little bit of magic out of the equation at this point because like I said, we don’t want to tell them how to do it without us and we want to get a little tease in the there so that they want to get on the phone with you, so they want to know more. Now, in point 5, where we looked at how your background uniquely qualifies you to help, this answer goes back to what we talked about last week about picking both the geographic focus and a service focus about what type of content marketing you’re going to do.

And it’s very, very important not to try with these not to shoehorn them, not to try to fit what you do into something that you have really no background in because in these cases, like I said, the potential clients are not expecting your email. They aren’t on the lookout for somebody to help them with this so if you’re emailing them and you are not super clear that you are able to do and have done and can produce results with this type of work, it’s not going to work out. You need to be super sure about it and super excited about it or they’re not going to be. And it really will show because if you are hemming and hawing a bit in your “about you” paragraph, then they’re not going to be convinced and they’re not going to respond. This is often one of the clearest ways that you can fix your pitches. If you send a couple pitches and you’re not getting responses, this is often why. Because you’ve paint an interesting picture for them about why they need this type of service but not why they should go with you to do it. So this is why you have to think, like I said, about what you’ve done perhaps in other jobs or ways that you are qualified to do this that aren’t necessarily really good to doing the work.

So for instance, if you … is Tanya on this call? Yes … So Tanya lives in Japan, Tanya traveled all over Japan. She’s very familiar with different tourism opportunities in Japan and there, and able to get pictures and help find new ones so the fact that she lives in Japan is very advantageous to her working for instance with a Japanese tour company that’s based in the US and brings travelers to Japan because she can get photos for their Instagram all times of year, even when their own employees are not in Japan. So that will be the kind of experience that you can bring that might not necessarily be demonstrable statistics about how you’ve previously improved other people’s Instagram accounts but if you have wonderful photos and you show that you know how it works and you are there when the company isn’t there, these are some little ways where you can get around this. And like I said, you can take things that you’ve done in other professions. For instance, if you have had a corporate job doing project management, you can say that you’ve previously had projects brought to you or you were able to optimize the system and produce 125% better results.

So in this case, you obviously don’t want to lie. You don’t want to create statistics that don’t exist, but you should definitely draw parallels to other things that are not exactly what you are pitching them while making sure that your language is very, very clear. And again, not lying about what the statistic refers to. So like I said, if you have project management experience you would say you’ve “taken systems that were previously not producing optimal results and turned around in six months” or something like that. But that’s not saying that you have had companies for whom you did Facebook optimization that you turned around in six months. So you’re allowing your background to speak for itself without making the prospect any promises or including anything that could potentially come back and bite you. None of us want to be the Yahoo CEO that got fired because he said on his resume that he had attended Harvard but it was really Harvard extension school or something like that. Now the simple close, this I find is often the part where people falter.

You always, always, always want to make sure … and I talk about this also in making magazine pitches … that you end with a question that is easy for the prospect to say yes to. So what that means, is that you don’t want to ask for too much. You don’t want to say, “Does this sound like something you could use?” Because that’s a complicated question. They’d have to think, “Well I don’t know? How would this work for me?” … which is something that you would rather address with them on the phone. You just want to say, “Do you have a couple minutes this week or next week when we can jump on the phone and talk about how to … ” and then make it something that has a clear benefit for them. So this is where you’re taking it back to the beginning and what you first, first reached out to them about and talk about “how to get your blog turning out qualified leads, to bring more visitors to your site through Instagram marketing or to get more leads on your Facebook posts.” So let’s look at some of these companies that we’ve talked about and build some of these pitches live. There are a couple that I already started doing, sort of in bits and pieces before, so I might just skip through and choose one.

So this pitch that I have here is a template that’s in the Six-Figure Travel Writing Roadmap and I wrote this before I knew about the concept of story selling. So I’m going to read you this one and then we’re going to create a more story-selling oriented one around one of the companies that we looked at. But this is a good framework in terms of how vague you need to be about what you’re going to offer versus getting into a lot of detail about exactly what the program is, which is going to make your email too long. So like I said, I keep the subject line very casual, in this case it says “A quick question about your blog.” This is going to be for a company that needs help with its blog or they don’t know that but you perceive that they need help with their blog. So “I’ve spent some time on your gorgeous website … ” and in this case you would say, “I particularly liked the story about trying to cook a Thanksgiving turkey in a tiny Italian oven, I’ve had that experience myself and I loved the way you handled it.”

And then you say, “I wanted to get in touch with you about how your blog can do more than just host testimonials from happy clients. It can actively cultivate future business.” So in this case the company had a blog, like a WordPress blog in place, but it was kind of … a little bit of a company newsreel. They would have some random stories here and there, but they would mostly just drop in testimonials that they’d gotten from clients. And while those are useful, what I wanted to show this company is that there are a lot more different types of content we can include in there that would increase their leads. And so then I go on to say, “Did you know that blogs are the single most important inbound marketing tool for small businesses? And they cost half as much as outbound marketing per lead generated.” In this case I want to emphasize that you really need to speak the language of the prospect and so, like I said, websites like HubSpot that have these statistics, are often going to use those terms. So if you see something like inbound marketing or outbound marketing that you don’t know what that means, look it up as you’re working on these pitches because this is the type of language that the clients understand. This is the language that they speak in.

For them, inbound marketing is a prospect that is coming to them, as opposed to outbound marketing, which is when they are putting ads on Facebook or on Google or things like that, where they are reaching out to prospects. And so I go on to say, “Companies with blogs generate 67% more leads per month on average than their none-blogging competitors. And companies that frequently posts content relevant to their audience, generate 3.5 times as many leads as those with outdated or untended blogs.” So what I’m essentially saying here is that, by having a blog that’s not really a blog, that’s mostly testimonials, they basically don’t really have a blog at all and that they’re losing a substantial portion of potential business from the people who are coming to their blog. “Another thing I want to say, for a business of your size, it really means I recommend one to two blog posts per week on topics that interest your audience, i.e. not just testimonials, to keep both you and their next vacation front of mind for them. So here I’m not just saying that I want to write one or two blog posts a week for you.”

“I’m saying that by you posting one or two blog posts per week, not only are you keeping your audience thinking about you but you’re also keeping them thinking about their vacation, which for the company is very important because they want people not just necessarily be thinking of them as a service provider but story-selling themselves. They want their clients to be picturing themselves on that vacation and see this tour company as the solution.” So then go on to say, “I can ghostwrite these for you at a package rate for an initial two-month trial period to see how we fit together and help you start to experience the SEO and lead-generating benefits of an active blog.” So this again, I’m having a little nuts and bolts thing. I’m showing expertise by showing that I know that a trial period to see how people fit together is beneficial for both parties but then I also have the second part where I’m saying … keeping it with them, that this period helps them to start to see the benefits of having an active blog. And go on to say, “I’m also available to advise you and your staff on how to effectively promote your blog to receive the best ROI in your marketing.”

This is really important because if you’re offering just one type of content marketing like blogs, what often happens is that there is another type of content marketing that’s not going so well that they need in order to maximize the type that you’re selling them. So in this case, “I’ve seen people have blogs but then nobody comes to them really because they don’t have great SEO in the first place, so there’s not a huge bump from having an active blog and so they really would need to have their social media going to have people start coming in to their blog.” Now I get into the more “about me” paragraph. So I say, “I’m a professional travel blogger who has covered … ” In this case I would say Italy … “for Italy Magazine, Italian America, the Dewsbury News and USA Today and also I lived for several years in Italy, I attended university there and have worked to improve the lead generation through content marketing for several other boutique Italian concierge travel companies.” Well that’s what the next paragraph says. “So most importantly I’ve developed blogs, content strategies and share-worthy blog posts for countless clients based on my training in web writing.” And in this case I would maybe say my “training in web writing at MIT” or drop something else important there.

And then I said, “I’ve increased email newsletter open rates and Facebook likes by more than 10% for many clients.” So this is one of these areas where I’ve mentioned the statistic about the past but I haven’t necessarily sad it was for other Italian boutique tour companies or something like that. Adjust it for other clients so these can be other clients in other industries. And then I wrap up by saying, “Can we schedule a brief chat? No more than 30 minutes needed, to talk about how we can work together to ramp up your blog and your business.” So I’m going to open this back up so I can see if we have any other questions. So in this example, it is a little bit long and the thing is that we are struggling when we write these emails between how to make sure that we cover enough ground to answer enough questions that they don’t have too many questions to write us back, while also making the email not get too long. So let me pick one of these to do a little sample live post, a little live pitch letter on here and if there is was one of them that you like throw that in the chat box. I think this one is good but if you guys want to see the Instagram and the Facebook one let me know.

So like I said, we really walk this line between making it too long versus having enough information. So if we’re going to look at this villa company, where they have not been posting for a while but they clearly saw the interest of posting but their content also when they were posting was not necessarily the best. Here is how I would go about it. So I did the intro a little bit earlier but I’ll just make up a new one again. So I’d say, “Dear … ” and I would find the name. So never say, “To whom it would concern … ” Or like, “Dear Tuscan Dream owner … ” Always go on the “About” page, go on LinkedIn, go on the contact page, go wherever you need to go to get the actual name of the person. So I’m going to pretend in this case that her name is Frederica. So I’m going to say, “Dear Frederica, I saw that on your Tuscan Dream website you have a blog that includes wonderfully broad information about the types of things that visitors to Tuscany looking to book a villa rental can enjoy during their stay.”

And then I would go on to use in these statistics of our blogs that are updated and I would say, “Did you know that while blogs can be a very effective content marketing tool, companies that have outdated blogs or blogs covering topics that are unrelated to their audience get 3.5 times fewer leads than those who update their blogs regularly. In particular, blogs that cover general topics, which can be found on other websites are less effective than blogs that use brand storytelling. Because of a new update to Google’s algorithm called Panda I’ve worked with several companies like yours who have blogs that are out of date to address this Google update through using effective brand storytelling to talk about the unique opportunities of booking villas through your company as opposed to others, by interviewing the owners of the villas represented by your company to tell their unique stories that entice potential visitors to stay with your villas as opposed to those offered by other companies. I typically do this in collaboration both with you as the company owner and the questions that your potential customers have to create an editorial calendar that addresses both opportunities around storytelling as well as more in-depth posts on the type of things that a traveler would need to know coming to Italy in one to two blog posts per week of the recommended length for SEO purposes, which is between 300 and 500 words.

And then I would go on to say that a similar sort of “About me” paragraph as I had in the previous one and wrap up with the same, “Could we hop on the phone for no more than 30 minutes to chat about how I can help get more traffic coming into your blog and more leads for your company.” So this one, like I said, I did on the fly. You want to have the right statistics for each place but it’s important to address whatever the shortfall of the company is. So even though, as I said, in the template that I outlined before … even though there is a general structure that you can use, you really need to be adapting it for each place. You need to be including different statistics. You need to be slightly changing how you describe your service package to show how it affects this particular company. In this case, it’s not just that they need blog posts, but they need blog posts that have a different approach than the one that they’ve used before. In the case for instance of the City Sights, the Facebook posts, it’s not just that they need Facebook posts because they don’t have them, but they need Facebook posts that give them better engagement because they’ve already got a lot of people liking their company but those people probably aren’t seeing their Facebook posts.

So you would really need to focus on … in your package section, and also in the statistics, on how what you offer would increase the engagement, which would allow more of the followers they already have to actually be seeing the content that the company is posting. Likewise, in the case of the balloon company, they’ve also got a bunch of followers but they’re posting really inconsistently. But we need to show them what the problem is with that. You can’t just say, “You’re posting inconsistently and so you’re not getting the most bookings that you could from your followers.” We need to show them why other companies that post more consistently are getting more followers and more business and show how we know that you can get business directly through each post that you put up on Instagram but you need to do it in a certain way due to the limitations of Instagram and we know about that and we’re happy to walk them through that. And then, like I said, wrap up with a very, very simple question.

So depending on what type of content marketing you’re trying to pitch, of course in the case of Instagram you need to have photography skills or in the case of Instagram or Facebook you need to be accessible in order to do social media updates for the company. You want to really make sure that you think about at least one sentence that you can add in that middle section about how you execute this, that shows that you have not just experience doing Instagram or doing Facebook that you have thought about or have experience of doing it for companies. And the picture that I showed you … let me go back to that for a second … I talked about how “I can ghostwrite these for an initial two-month trial period so that you can see the lead-generating benefits.” You can also say, in the case of Instagram for instance, think about the process. You say, “I can use photos that you already have or take original photos and submit them to you for review two weeks in advance,” or with social because the posts are going to be going live at a certain time, you would say, “I can work with an existing social media schedule app that you have or we can decide on the posts or we can agree on the post content in advance and then I will post them manually.”

So you want to show that you have thought about not just what the content is that they need but also the process and how that process fits for different companies because that is what shows not just that you have the authority to do this but that you are a professional, that you are a service provider that is used to working with organizations. And those are the kind of touches, like I said, constantly taking it back to the company that you’re pitching with every sentence that you write that make them have that last important factor of the “Know, Like, Trust,” which is the trust. You want to establish through your paragraph, not just the paragraph about you, but also the paragraph about how you worked with companies, that they can trust you with this important piece of content marketing.

If you’ve got any other questions about travel content marketing feel free, like I said, to respond to the email confirming your webinar or to shoot an email to questions@dreamoftravelwriting.com. Thanks so much again for joining me. Have a good weekend.